Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.

Alcatel, the Alcatel logo, MainStreet, and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.

Copyright © 19992006 Alcatel.

All rights reserved.

Disclaimers
Alcatel products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be
sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in
the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life-support
machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the
products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The
customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability
that may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel products. Please note that this
information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects
information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel product and contact the
supplier for confirmation. Alcatel assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided
about non-Alcatel products.

Alcatel has made reasonable efforts to ensure that the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, Release
8.0, complies in all material respects with the "Referenced Detailed Functional Specification for Newbridge Product Date
Compliance" for all loads. To obtain this document, the Year 2000 Date Compliance status of the other products discussed
in this document, and other information related to Year 2000 Date Compliance, visit the Alcatel Year 2000 Date
Compliance website at the URL:
http://www.newbridge.com/year2000/index.html
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel products, if any, are
set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel and its customers.

This document was originally written in English. If the document you are reading is not in English, please refer to the
English version for a full legally binding description of the product/service.

PRINTED ON
RECYCLED PAPER
Preface

This General Information Book describes Release 8.0 (Generic S1118) of the
3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager builds on the

successful architecture of the 3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager, and
provides a scalable option to meet the increasing demand for multiple services
and higher bandwidths on a single platform. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports a wide range ofATM adaptation,
circuit- and packet-based voice and data services, and is compatible with the
3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager, providing seamless integration into
existing networks and protecting equipment investment.

This General Information Book is divided into four sections:

Product overview
Chapters 1 and 2 introduce the features and benefits of the 3600 + MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, and describe its many value-added
applications. Asummary of major new Release 8.0 features and capabilities is
provided at the end of chapter 1.

A closer view
Chapters 3 through 10 provide detailed information about 3600/3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager system design, cards, and interfaces.

Management
Chapters 11 and 12 provide detailed information about 3600 + MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager network and node management capabilities.

iii
Preface

Technical specifications
Chapters 13 through 15 provide a convenient reference summary of
3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager system, card, and power
information.

Following the Technical specifications section are a list of abbreviations and an

index.

iv
 Table of contents

Product overview 1 Introduction........................................................................3

End-to-end multiservice delivery.....................................................................4
Built-in intelligence and flexibility...........................................................................6
Exceptional software control..........................................................................13
Comprehensive system protection features............................................................15
Easy-access maintenance features...........................................................................16
Modular architecture......................................................................................19
Major new release 8.0 features.......................................................................20

2 Applications.....................................................................23
SONET and SDH switching...........................................................................26
ATM adaptation..............................................................................................28
ISDN bandwidth on demand..........................................................................31
Subrate data applications................................................................................39
Inverse multiplexing.......................................................................................66
Super-rate data: up to 1984 kb/s.....................................................................69
Voice applications...........................................................................................70
Frame relay switching.....................................................................................91
X.25 packet switching.....................................................................................97

A closer view 3 Design............................................................................105

Shelf architecture..........................................................................................106
Alarm panel..................................................................................................109
Power supplies..............................................................................................110
Ringing generators........................................................................................111
Cooling equipment.......................................................................................112
Distribution panels.......................................................................................112
Data termination units..................................................................................116
Site requirements..........................................................................................120
System integrity............................................................................................121
Control packet switching system..........................................................................131
SONET and SDH data communications channels..............................................133
Node and network synchronization.....................................................................133

v
Preface

4 Connections...................................................................139
Network connections....................................................................................139
External equipment connections..................................................................142

5 System cards.................................................................143
Control card..................................................................................................144
Timing card..................................................................................................145
Test card...............................................................................................................1.46
Test module..................................................................................................146
Common Carrier card...................................................................................146
Control card configurable features...............................................................147
Test card and
Test module configurable features...................................................................150

6 High-speed aggregate cards............................................153

HSA DS3 card..............................................................................................155
OC-3 card.....................................................................................................155
STM-1 card...................................................................................................155
TU-12 mapper card......................................................................................155
VT-1.5 mapper card.....................................................................................156
Configurable parameters..............................................................................156

7 Aggregate cards............................................................165
ATM Services card.......................................................................................167
E1 cards...............................................................................................................1.68
Multiport Aggregate card.............................................................................170
T1 cards...............................................................................................................1.70
TTC2M card.................................................................................................173
V.35 PRI card...............................................................................................174
X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards................................................................174
Optical Extension cards................................................................................175
Configurable parameters..............................................................................175

8 Voice interface cards and channel units...........................193

4WDX channel unit......................................................................................195
4WTO line card............................................................................................195
E&M interfaces.............................................................................................195
LGE interfaces..............................................................................................196
LGS interfaces...............................................................................................196
MRD interfaces.............................................................................................197
Configurable parameters..............................................................................197

Table of contents

vi
 9 Data interface cards and channel units.............................201
DNIC line card.............................................................................................203
2B1Q line card..............................................................................................203
2B1Q channel unit........................................................................................203
27LC2 line card............................................................................................204
27LC3 line card............................................................................................204
28LC line card..............................................................................................204
4WTO channel unit......................................................................................205
DS0-DP channel unit...................................................................................205
BRI S/T card.................................................................................................205
64 kb/s Codirectional card............................................................................206
OCU-DP channel unit..................................................................................206
RS-232 DCC.................................................................................................206
RS-422 DCC.................................................................................................206
V.35 DCC.....................................................................................................207
X.21 DCC.....................................................................................................207
Configurable parameters..............................................................................207

10 Application and packet switching cards.........................219

Call Processing card.....................................................................................221
Data Communications Processor card.................................................................221
Digital Signal Processing cards and modules, and Inverse Multiplexing cards. 222
FRE card.....................................................................................................222
FRS card.....................................................................................................223
PE card................................................................................................................2.24
Configurable parameters..............................................................................224

Management 11 Management overview.....................................................241

Types of management..................................................................................242
Service management.....................................................................................242
Network management...................................................................................244
Node management........................................................................................249
Open interfaces.............................................................................................250

12 Node management............................................................253
Node management sessions..........................................................................253
System serial ports........................................................................................255
Configuration and cross-connections...........................................................255
Database management..................................................................................255
Maintenance and diagnostics........................................................................257

vi
i
Table of
contents

Technical System specifications 267

specification Power supplies..............................................................................................267
s Ringing generators........................................................................................267
External timing inputs and outputs......................................................................268
Standards conformance................................................................................269
13
14 Voice interface specifications........................................271

15 Power dissipation..............................................................289

Abbreviation

s Index

viii
Product overview
1
Introduction
Network operators around the world, both carrier and corporate, are faced with
the challenge of keeping their networks in step with the increasing demands of
users in terms of bandwidth, performance, and services offered. A key element is
to be able to efficiently consolidate legacy and new services on a single managed
network, as well as protect the investment in the existing network infrastructure.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is a multiservice

edge/access platform built on Alcatel’s highly successful 3600 MainStreet
Bandwidth Manager. Fully compatible with all the interfaces and functionality
of the 3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager, the 3600 + MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager provides both higher bandwidth and narrowband capacity
for increased density and cost savings, as well as the ability to transport and
manage wideband and broadband services.

When integrated into an existing MainStreet network, the 3600 + MainStreet

Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides investment protection through the
common use of the UCS interface and resource cards, as well as a highly
efficient link into the backbone network fully managed by the powerful Alcatel
5620 Network Manager.

3
Product overview

Key features of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager

include:

• end-to-end multiservice delivery

• built-in intelligence and flexibility
• exceptional software control
• comprehensive system fault protection features
• easy-access maintenance features
• modular architecture

End-to-end The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager can be used in

multiservice PTT networks to provide end-to-end services, while interworking with existing
delivery core networks. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager
acts as an access device, feeding a range of circuit- and packet-based services to
the local exchange where the SONET or SDH link is terminated either by a
higher-order ADM, or by a SONET- or SDH-compatible DCS. The ADM or
DCS divides the incoming traffic into the appropriate service networks.

For circuit-switched services, all POTS traffic is directed to the local digital
switch for access to the PSTN. All special services and leased line services are
connected to the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager for
access to a special service overlay network. For packet-based services, traffic is
directed to an Alcatel 7470 MSP for ATM and frame relay switching.

Figure 1-1 shows the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager

integrating a wide range of circuit- and packet-switched services from each
access location into the core network.

4
 1. Introduction

Figure 1-1: End-to-end multiservice delivery

Access network Core network

Highrise
Alcatel 5620 Network
Manager

PBX
T1/E1
3630 MainStreet node
T1/E1

SONET/SDH
inter-office network
Office park or campus Switched services
TDM

services Special
T1/E1 services
T1/E1 3600/3600+ MainStreet
3600 MainStreet node node OC-3/STM-1 SONET/SDH
access ring DCS/ADM ATM services

3600/3600+
MainStreet
node

Router 3600/3600+ MainStreet

3600
MainStreet node node

Remote office

2B1Q
V.35

3600/3600+ MainStreet
Fax node
DTU T1/E1

3600
MainStreet
Video
node

15158

5
Product overview

Built-in By embracing industry standards, 3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes address the public,
intelligence and private, and hybrid network requirements for concurrent circuit, frame relay, and
flexibility X.25 packet switching, for ATM adaptation, and for SONET/SDH multiplexing.
Its software-downloadable resource cards and wide range of WAN, voice, and
data interfaces make it one of the most flexible platforms available on the market
today.

Strict adherence to
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager was developed in
international
standards accordance with recognized industry standards to provide interfaces and services
that comply with diverse international requirements.

To assist in the planning and implementation of your specific services, your local
Alcatel representative can provide detailed compliance information for your
region, as well as access to the full range of the Alcatel international network
services.

For more information about the standards to which the 3600 + MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager conforms, see chapter 13.

Private network
efficiencies with central Enhancements to standards, where implemented, are optional; their use is at the
office services discretion of network designers and operators. Where applicable, enhancements
are designed to work within the boundaries of established communications
standards. For example, HCM provides an 800 b/s resolution for subrate data
while respecting standard, 64 kb/s channelized aggregate timeslot boundaries.

Versatile
service
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is designed not only to meet initial service
capabilities and requirements, but to expand easily to handle growth in service demands. With a
applications nonblocking information bandwidth capacity of up to 448 Mb/s (narrowband) or
3  155 Mb/s (broadband), the 3600 + MainStreet multiplexer can perform a
variety of high-capacity networking hub and backbone node applications
simultaneously. These applications are:

• digital cross-connect switching

• SONET or SDH switching
• frame relay switching
• X.25 packet switching
• ATM service adaptation
• inverse multiplexing over ATM
• ISDN bandwidth on demand
• line and circuit grooming
• 2.048 Mb/s E1-to-1.544 Mb/s T1 format conversion
• aggregate multiplexing at the customer premises or at a CO
• drop and insert, and bypass multiplexing
• integrated voice and data multiplexing

6
 1. Introduction
• inverse
multiplexing

7
Product overview

• low- and high-speed data transmission and control

• subrate data switching and multiplexing (including data and
compressed voice)
• multidrop data bridging and MJUs
• PCM bridging – digital multipoint
• super-rate data transmission – domestic and international
• G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation
• V.32 modem relay
• voice conference bridging (Hoot ‘n’ Holler)
• ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP
(G.728) voice compression, super-tandem operation, and transport of
compressed voice signals over frame relay (VoFR)
• international Mu-law and A-law companding, signaling, and
ringing conversion

Choice of switching
technology – circuit or Because the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides circuit, frame relay, and
packet X.25 packet switching, network designers can choose the switching technology
that best accommodates the transmission characteristics of each end-to-end
connection.

The low transit delay and constant bit rates provided by circuit switching are ideal
for highly interactive communication such as voice and video conferencing. In
addition, the cost of a dedicated, end-to-end circuit-switched connection is
justified by the steady and high-average bandwidth usage typical of bulk file
transfer applications. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides a fully
nonblocking DS0 DCS. It performs circuit switching between all interface and
resource cards at the DS0 level. For example, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
cross-connects voice channels from an LGS card to a T1 or E1 aggregate card.

Because frame relay has dynamic bandwidth allocation and high transmission
rates, it is ideal for bursty, high-speed, and low-average bandwidth usage
applications such as LAN internetworking. Circuit-switched channels and frame
streams can be configured on the same aggregate link.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports standards-compliant frame relay

services on the FRS, FRE, and PE cards. These cards provide relay and routing
functions at the data link layer (Layer 2 of the OSI reference model). In addition
to supporting frame relay PVCs, the cards also support:

• frame relay-to-X.25 network and service interworking

• HDLC-based protocol encapsulation
• QoS and fragmentation/defragmentation features for support of
delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR and voice and data integration on frame
relay networks

8
 1. Introduction

X.25 packet switching provides reliable data transfer, and port and bandwidth
sharing for access line speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 2 Mb/s. The X.25 FRE and PE
cards provide fully standards-compliant X.25 and X.75 services appropriate for
both public and private networks. To further optimize bandwidth usage in the
network, the MainStreet X.25 Service uses frame relay PVCs as high-speed
backbone trunks between nodes.

The X.25 FRE and PE cards consolidate frame relay and X.25 services on the
same card, providing seamless network and service interworking features, which
simplifies the migration path from X.25 to frame relay and protects hardware
investment.

Software-driven services Node software maintains extensive subrate voice and data applications. These
applications are downloaded to, and run on, DSP cards and modules at the
request of the network operator.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports DSP cards and modules that
provide different levels of processing power so that customers can purchase only
the processing power they need. Also, because DSP cards are application-
independent, they provide the flexibility to change with network requirements.

Upgrades of node firmware provide an ever-increasing choice of DSP

applications, often without a need to acquire new hardware.

In addition to software-downloadable DSP cards, several optimized,

application-specific DSP modules are available. For example, the VCM3
provides M48 and M60 ADPCM transcoding. The VCM3 is supported on Dual
T1 and Dual E1 cards.

9
Product overview

800 b/s switching

resolution with subrate
The resolution of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system core switching matrix can
switching be enhanced by the SRS DSP application. This application can be downloaded to
one or more DSP4 cards at the request of network operators. Fully flexible
space-switching and time-switching between similar data formats is supported for
DDS DS0-A and DS0-B (and DDS-compatible services), ITU-T X.50 Division 3,
HCM, and I.460 (transparent) subrate data channels. For example, drop and
insertion of individual subrate data channels to and from DS0-A and DS0-B,
X.50, HCM, or transparent aggregate channels is supported. For HCM
aggregates, the switching resolution allows drop and insertion of 800 b/s data
channels.

SRSis ideal for grooming subrate voice and data circuits prior to their
transmission over the backbone network (for example, when the 3600 +
MainStreet system is configured as a hub to multiple feeder nodes whose
aggregate DS0s are underutilized).

Noncontiguousbandwidth
Further bandwidth efficiency is achieved through Alcatel 5620 NM support
– ideal for rerouting
for noncontiguous, 800 b/s HCM bandwidth elements. This capability greatly
increases the bandwidth available to the Alcatel 5620 NM to route subrate
data channels during normal and fault conditions. Also, super-rate channels
can use noncontiguous aggregate DS0s.

Choice of aggregate
and high-speed
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides switching capacity for 448 Mb/s
aggregate interfaces (narrowband) or 3  155 Mb/s (broadband) of full-duplex, nonblocking
information bandwidth. With the availability of up to 16 UCSs, the
3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports any combination of up to 32 T1 and/or
104 E1 interfaces. The switching capacity of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
allows for future developments with greater port density.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports the following aggregate and high-
speed aggregate interfaces:

• OC-3 and STM-1 high-speed aggregate cards which, when working in

conjunction with TU-12 and VT-1.5 mapper cards, allow mapping of
narrowband (64 kb/s) voice and data services onto broadband (155 Mb/s)
circuits
• the HSA DS3 card, which allows connection to other DS3-
compatible equipment via coaxial cable
• 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ATM Services cards, which provide ATM service
adaptation for four T1 or E1 interfaces and inverse multiplexing over
ATM (IMA)
These interfaces are recommended for providing adaptation of low-speed,
legacy services to ATM cells for transmission through a multiservices
broadband network.

1
0
 1. Introduction

• channelized 2.048 Mb/sSingle E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, and Octal E1 cards
with CAS, CCS, or 31-channel signaling
These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network
facilities and CPE, such as digital PBXs and LAN bridges.
• channelized 1.544 Mb/s Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, Octal T1,
and fractional T1 cards with D4 or ESF framing
These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network
facilities and CPE, such as digital PBXs, remote channel banks and external
echo cancellation units.
• 4-port, n  48, n  56, n  64 kb/s MPA cards with software-
configurable RS-449/V.36, RS-530-A, V.35, or X.21 interfaces
This multiport card provides end users with a low-cost aggregate interface or
network trunks in areas where T1 or E1 links are unavailable.
• single- and dual-port Optical Extension cards with IOTUs for converting
2.048 Mb/s E1 electrical signals to optical signals
These interfaces are used to extend transmission links beyond distances
supported by current copper technology.
• channelized 2.048 Mb/s TTC2M cards, which provide a CMI interface to PBXs
• V.35 PRI, X.21, or X.21 ESI cards for 56 and n  64 kb/s links
between multiplexers over private or leased lines
These interfaces support n  56 kb/s and n  64 kb/s super-rate channels, and
D4 or CAS voice signaling codes.

Direct connect data

For direct connection to computers, peripherals, front-end processors, video
interfaces
codecs, modems, and digital network links, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
supports cards for connection to X.21/V.11, V.35, and V.24/RS-232 interfaces.
Subrate speeds as low as 150 b/s and super-rate speeds of up to 1984 kb/s are
supported.

For example, the RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces, each
independently configurable as either RS-530-A, RS-449/V.36, X.21, or V.35.
This allows a single DCC to serve diverse data interfaces simply through
software configuration.

The RS-422 DCC is complemented by the UDP, which can be provisioned with
any combination of up to four DCE or DTE (or a combination of both) RS-530-
A, RS-449/V.36, X.21, or V.35 interface modules. Interface modules provide
the appropriate connector for each interface type supported by the RS-422 DCC.
For more information about the UDP, see chapter 3.

In addition, a 64 kb/s Codirectional card is available that provides four

synchronous interfaces to G.703-compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuits.
These circuits would typically be connected to 64 kb/s timeslots in a 2.048
Mb/s G.704-framed signal.

11
Product overview

Basic rate (2B+D)

interfaces and remote
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system offers basic rate (2B+D) interface circuits for
DTUs the remote distribution of data to compact and network-manageable DTUs. The
2B+D interface represents a combination of the NT and TA functions of the
ISDN reference model. DTUs offer V.24/RS-232, X.21/V.11, and V.35
interfaces.

For off-premises applications, the combination of an extended-range 2700

MainStreet series DTU and a 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or
2B1Q channel unit provides two fully network-manageable 64 kb/s channels over
a single twisted pair—an attractive alternative to the traditional OCU and DSU
configurations used for access to DDS network services. Also, this combination
allows PTT authorities to provide flexible X.50 network access services over
existing 2-wire facilities.

All DTUs are completely network-manageable, provide remote DCE or DTE

ports, and use a 2-wire, twisted-pair loop. DTUs can be located beside desktop
equipment that is physically remote from the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system.
The maximum loop length supported depends on the DTU series, the type of
copper cable used, and the cable’s associated resistance factor. For example, the
2600 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of up to 3.3 km (2 mi) using
24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84 /km; the 2700 MainStreet series
DTUs support a loop length of up to 7.2 km (4.5 mi) using 24 AWG copper cable
with a resistance of 84 /km.

Multirate HDSL interfaces

and remote DTUs The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system offers multirate HDSL interface circuits
for the remote distribution of data to compact, network-manageable 2801
MainStreet HDSL DTUs. Two versions are available:

• the 2-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n  64 kb/s (up to 1 Mb/s) service over a single twisted-pair loop
• the 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n  128 kb/s (up to 2 Mb/s) service over a double twisted-pair loop

Both versions provide one remote DCE port and support V.35, V.36/RS-449, or
X.21 interfaces.

1
2
 1. Introduction

The DTU can be collocated with desktop equipment that is physically remote
from the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system. The maximum loop length supported
depends on variations in cable characteristics and impedance, the presence of
bridge taps, impulse noise, electrical noise, and crosstalk. For example, the 2-
wire version of the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to
4.0 km (2.5 mi) using 26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s. The 4-wire
version supports a data rate of 512 kb/s over the same distance.

Analog voice interfaces Analog voice interfaces allow analog telephone CO exchanges, PBXs, and
telephone sets to connect to the 3600 + MainStreet system. Six different analog
voice interfaces are supported:

• LGS, which connects the network directly to either a PBX or telephone set
• LGE, which connects the network directly to a telephone CO exchange or PBX
• E&M, the popular, short-distance private-wire circuit used to connect
switching systems (for example, PBXs) to each other over T1 or E1
facilities
• MRD, which provides an on- or off-premises, single-circuit, 2-wire
terminal interface
• 4WTO, which is commonly used in analog cellular networks to
provide on-premises, 4-wire applications for which there is no
requirement for signaling
• 4WDX, a 4-wire transmission line interface that provides bidirectional on-
or off-hook signaling, and is used to interface with equipment that converts
DX signaling to E&M signaling

Analog voice interfaces are available on multiport cards and on single-port

channel units. Cards are intended for on-premise applications; channel units are
intended for off-premise and CO applications. Digital voice access over T1 and
E1 is also supported.

Central office
Channel units, the Common Carrier and Test cards, and the Test module have
compliant and
international voice been specifically designed to meet public telephone company requirements.
frequency channel
units The following channel units are available:

• LGS
• LGE
• E&M
• MRD and 2WMRD
• 4WTO
• 2B1Q
• OCU-DP
• DS0-DP
• 4WDX

13
Product overview

The Common Carrier card accommodates any combination of up to four channel

units, each with individual circuit modularity (that is, a channel unit can be
removed from the Common Carrier card without affecting service on the other
three channel units).

The Test card provides metallic test access, and the optional Test module
provides analog and digital test access to any channel unit, and 64 kb/s digital
access to the OCU-DP channel unit. Test configurations are controlled by
software and include direct and high-impedance monitor, split access, 4-wire
loopback, and integral BERT.

Dissimilar voice and

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system connects dissimilar voice and data interfaces
data accommodated
over digital transmission facilities. For example, an X.21 device can be cross-
connected to a V.35 device, or an LGS circuit can be cross-connected to an E&M
trunk, either directly within a node or at endpoint nodes joined by an aggregate
link. The conversion between interfaces is performed internally by node system
software.

Exceptional All hardware for the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is software-configurable;

software control there are no mechanical switches or jumpers on any card. This reduces the
number of
on-site visits by skilled personnel, as node configuration and reconfiguration can
be performed by software commands, issued locally or from a remote network
control center anywhere. For example, software commands can be issued to
configure an E&M card for 2-wire or 4-wire circuits, to specify transmission level
points for any voice port, to select the speed and format of data transmission, or
to set cross-connections between ports, aggregates and resource cards.

Node and network

management The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can be managed using these products:
products
• Alcatel 5620 Network Manager
This sophisticated network manager uses a GUI that runs on a UNIX-based
workstation from Sun Microsystems.
• Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager
This PC-based software product provides remote access to the
Alcatel 5620 NM from laptops and personal computers.
• Alcatel 5521 PCElement Manager
This PC-based software product provides menu-based management of up to
100 nodes from laptops and personal computers.
• Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager
This PC-based software product is intended for on-site node commissioning
and maintenance using the Control, frame relay, and X.25 cards. The software
runs on laptops and personal computers.
• ASCII terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal or PC-based terminal emulation software can

1
4
 1. Introduction
be used to
initiate a node
management
session with
the Control,
frame relay,
X.25 and call
processing
cards through
a built-in
NMTI.

15
Product overview

Communications The Control card manages the following communications functions for the
3600/3600+ MainStreet system:

• intrashelf communications (card-to-card)

• external communication to a management system, such as the Alcatel
5620 NM, through either a serial or Ethernet port using CPSS
• external communication to other equipment using CPSS over inband
channels
• external communication to the SONET or SDH data communications
channel (section or regenerator DCC for 192 kb/s channels)

See chapter 3 for information about CPSS, and SONET and SDH data
communications channels.

Software upgrading
and downloadable The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system features fully upgradeable system software.
software-based The Control card and some application cards can be easily upgraded to exploit the
applications latest system software release simply by downloading the software remotely from
the Alcatel 5620 NM.

Certain cards (such as the ATM Services, frame relay, X.25, and call processing
cards as well as some digital signal processing cards) support software
upgrading. This feature greatly simplifies system upgrades by allowing new
versions of card software to be downloaded locally to a card using the Alcatel
5521 EM or Craft Interface.

Within the node, DSP card and DPM applications are software-downloadable
from the common control DSP application library. This allows a single DSP
or DPM to serve different applications at different times.

Centralized network
management The centralized approach to network management reduces internode control
overhead on the network. Connection management functions are handled by the
5620 NM using a state of the art standard processor.

In the centralized network architecture, the higher-level networking functions,

such as path routing, are controlled by the Alcatel 5620 NM. Functions, such as
managing port configuration parameters and cross-connect information, are
assigned to the nodes.

In older, distributed network architectures, each node must communicate with

every other node. Any change in node status must be reported to all nodes in the
network. These architectures create a flood of status messages, effectively limiting
the size of the network. In contrast, centralized control reduces network traffic,
enabling much larger networks to be constructed.

1
6
 1. Introduction

In addition to supporting more nodes, the Alcatel 5620 NM is designed to run on

industry-standard computer platforms offered by Sun Microsystems. The Sun
platforms provide high performance and allow customers to take advantage of
third-party development of workstation technology at no extra cost.
Furthermore, because network managers perform the network management
functions, the nodes require simpler, less expensive CPU components.

Shared node usage –

network partitioning The combination of centralized network management and fully
software-controlled nodes provides a powerful foundation for advanced network
management functions. For example, the Alcatel 5620 NM allows a physical
network to be managed as multiple VBNs, VSNs, or a combination of the two.

Corporations gain economic advantages by multiplexing all enterprise

information over common transmission facilities, while at the same time letting
operational groups within the organization manage their parts of the network. For
transmission service providers, the ability to provide end-customer control of
managed bandwidth services represents new revenue-generating services that
stem bypass and extend the life of their equipment investment.

Comprehensive A suite of system protection capabilities ensures that 3600/3600+ MainStreet

system protection nodes provide high levels of availability and accessibility. Protection begins at
features the component level with state-of-the-art, low-power IC technology. At the
system level, protection options include full control and switching
redundancy, power supply redundancy, interface redundancy, and automatic
path rerouting.

Energy-efficient design The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system requires less power than comparable
products from other vendors. A fully loaded 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
requires only 300 W to operate, reducing power and heat dissipation problems.
Aseparate, dedicated UPS is seldom required because the low power
requirement of the 3600 + MainStreet system allows it to tie into existing PBX or
computer power backup systems.

Hot standby protection All 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelves support redundant control complex and
load-sharing power supplies for hot standby capability that automatically
switches to the backup cards and power supplies when a fault is detected. All
redundant cards and power supplies can be independently installed and removed
without interrupting service. In addition, the Single 2.048 Mb/s E1, Octal E1,
Single 1.544 Mb/s T1, X.21 PRI, and V.35 PRI aggregate cards, and the high-
speed aggregate cards, can be configured for one-to-one card redundancy.

If the node becomes isolated from the network manager, it continues to function
as programmed. To reduce the likelihood of node isolation, redundant and
remote Alcatel 5620 NM configurations are supported. In addition, CPSS is
designed to reroute around link failures, and can be configured to use backup
modem links.

17
Product overview

Alternate path routing End-to-end circuit paths can be protected by an alternate route should the
preferred route become unavailable. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
supports the following types of path protection:

• RAPID and ISDN leased-line protection, which are implemented at the

node level by the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
• AAR, which is implemented at the network level by the Alcatel 5620 NM
• unidirectional path switched rings, which are implemented at the
network level by the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system

Timing sources The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can be programmed to derive system timing
from a variety of sources:

• external dedicated timing sources

• interface cards
• Timing card (when this source is chosen, timing is in free-run mode and
the system is synchronized to a Stratum 3 oscillator with a long-term
accuracy within 4.6 ppm)

When a source is impaired, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system enters holdover

mode. In holdover mode, the system is synchronized to the long-term average
frequency of the last timing source used.

For more information about timing and synchronization, see “Node and network
synchronization” in chapter 3.

Easy-access A suite of system maintenance features provides network operators with easy
maintenance access to status information and diagnostic tests.
features

Dual maintenance ports The Control and DCP cards are equipped with dual V.24/RS-232 maintenance
ports for connection to network management products or the NMTI. These ports
can be configured for direct local access or for modem access. In control-
redundant configurations, the currently inactive Control card ports are disabled to
allow Y-cabling and ensure communications with the active Control card. The
frame relay, X.25, and call processing cards also provide V.24/RS-232
maintenance ports.

1
8
 1. Introduction

Automatic and
directed diagnostics
Startup diagnostics, which provide program integrity, memory, and equipment
configuration checks, are run automatically during system initialization. During
regular operation, the system can be configured to run background diagnostics
on a cyclical basis, and the system operator can activate diagnostics selectively
(including analog and digital loopbacks). If a voice circuit (or an aggregate
channel cross-connected to a voice circuit) is required for a call while a test is in
progress, the test on that circuit is aborted.

Digital connection
maintenance Digital connection maintenance allows access to the data paths through the
central switching matrix of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system, so that you can
verify and change data and signaling carried between two connected target
circuits.

Connection maintenance provides these functions:

• monitor maintenance
• split-through and split-back maintenance
• terminate and leave maintenance

For more information about digital connection maintenance, see chapter 12.

Digital and metallic

split and monitor test
The optional Test card provides both digital and metallic test access connections.
access
Digital test connections allow access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the Test
card to configure interface speed, error correction, and fault signaling.

Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card. The Test card supports these metallic test
connections:

• direct monitor
• high-impedance monitor
• split access
• 4-wire loopback

For more information about digital and metallic split and monitor test access, see
chapter 12.

Analog, digital, and

BER tests The optional Test module, which is installed on the Test card, generates an analog
or digital sinusoidal test tone that has a configurable frequency and output level.
Analog tone testing conducts tests on cabling connections, external equipment,
channel units, and digital components. Digital tone testing measures the amplitude
and frequency of the test tone on voice circuits in digital PCM format.

BER tests allow you to check the quality of data paths.

19
Product overview

Continuous
alarm The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is continuously monitored for abnormal
monitoring conditions and significant events. The Control cards monitor events and
conditions for the system components, as well as for the system, interface, and
application cards. The frame relay and X.25 cards monitor local events and
conditions on the card, and maintain card-specific alarm queues. The types of
alarm notification that may be raised by the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system are:

• configuration alarms
• equipment faults
• loss of aggregate link signaling or framing alignments
• external alarm activities (tail circuit status)
• synchronization timing source changes
• external contact closures (alarm panel)
• startup diagnostic errors

Categorized and recorded

alarms
The cards and shelves are monitored for significant events and abnormal
conditions. When such an event or condition is detected, an alarm record is
created. Individual alarms are logged to alarm queues of varying degrees of
severity. Each alarm management mode (standard mode or TEP-1(E) mode), has
different names for the severity classifications.

Alarm messages in both modes can be viewed, acknowledged, and deleted using
an Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI. All queues hold up to 1000 alarms, except for
the frame relay and X.25 card alarm queues, which hold up to 256 alarms.
Queues can be configured to discard new alarms when the queue is full, or to
overwrite the oldest alarms.

Standard mode
Standard mode supports two types of trouble and event notification:

• alarms
• diagnostic notifications
Alarms indicate conditions that have an immediate or potential impact on the
operation of the node. Alarms require technical attention; the severity of the
alarm dictates the level of attention required.

Diagnostic notifications report system events (for example, a database reset) or

alarms raised during node maintenance. Every diagnostic alarm raised by the
node is automatically cleared and stored to provide historical maintenance
information; they do not require technical attention.

Standard mode classifies alarms and diagnostic notifications according to the

following severities: critical, major, minor, or diagnostic.

2
0
 1. Introduction

TEP-1(E) mode
In TEP-1(E) mode, each alarm may be categorized by the operator as either
prompt, deferred, or in station. Once categorized, alarm messages are recorded in
the corresponding alarm queue. All alarms are identified by the date and time, a
unique number, and a message describing the alarm. Alarms can also be
categorized as none (meaning alarm occurrences are ignored and no information
is logged).

Remote or local
alarm logging Alarms can be logged locally to a printer, the NMTI, or a network management
product directly connected to the node. Alarms can also be logged remotely to
the network operations center using either CPSS or a modem link to transport
alarm information.

Flexible external
alarm support The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports extensive external alarm
capabilities, such as:

• blower unit, power supply, and ringing generator failure alarm inputs
• user-configurable external alarm names
• major and minor visual and audio external alarm outputs

Loopbacks The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports up to 100 circuit loopbacks, up to

184 slot (or link) loopbacks, and up to 40 port loopbacks (on the MPA card)
simultaneously. Loopbacks can be invoked by the network operator or by
network-generated requests, such as DDS. Analog loopbacks occur at the
attached device interface, and digital loopbacks occur at the junction of the card
and backplane. Loopbacks can be applied to individual channels on a link or to
an entire link.

Modular The minimum configuration of a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides access to

architecture eight UCSs and provides a switching capacity of 128 Mb/s. Access to all 16 UCSs
can be gained by adding a Narrowband Switching module on the Control card. The
addition of a Narrowband Switching module provides a switching capacity of
448 Mb/s. Access to the HSA slots is gained by adding a Broadband Switching
module on the Control card. The addition of a Broadband Switching module
provides a 155 Mb/s switching capacity at the VT or TU level for each HSA
slot.

Universal card slots

determine The UCSs accommodate any of the aggregate interface cards, voice and data
application interface cards, and application cards. The cards chosen from these many card
options determine the functionality any one 3600 + MainStreet system can provide.

21
Product overview

Shelf options There are two variants of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf: a 19-inch shelf and a
23-inch shelf. The shelves arecompact in design: the 19-inch shelf measures 78
cm (31.5 in.) high, 47.8 cm (19 in.) wide, and 24.5 cm (9.5 in.) deep; and the 23-
inch shelf measures 62.2 cm (24.5 in.) high, 58.5 cm (23 in.) wide, and 30.8
(12.1 in.) deep. The 19-inch shelf fits directly into standard 19-inch racks or into
23-inch racks using extender brackets.

Major new release This section summarizes the major new features and enhancements that are
8.0 features supported in Release 8.0.

System features Release 8.0 introduces a new memory module.

Memory module 2
The Memory module 2 is introduced for use with Release 8.0 generics onward. The
Memory module 2 contains 8 Mb of Flash and 16 Mb of DRAM.

Aggregate features Release 8.0 introduces the HSA DS3 card, the Octal T1 card, and 32-port
versions of the TU-12 mapper card and VT-1.5 mapper card.

HSA DS3 card

The HSA DS3 card allows for connection to other DS3-compatible equipment
via a coaxial cable, and supports a total of 28 T1 line interfaces. The HSA DS3
card terminates the DS3 rate signal, multiplexes and demultiplexes the
constituent DS1 signals asynchronously, and cross-connects constituent DS0s to
different outgoing signals.

Octal T1 card
The Octal T1 card accesses both fractional and full T1 network services and CPE
such as digital PBXs and remote channel units. It provides eight T1 interfaces
and is available with a DSX-1 termination.

Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter

The Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter provides an alternate means of connecting
CPE directly to a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit. It allows I/O connectors to be
connected via wire-wrap rather than via the typical AMP/CHAMP cable and
distribution panel.

32-port TU-12 mapper card

The new version of the TU-12 mapper card extends the port density to 32
narrowband E1 ports, each with a fixed connection to an associated broadband
circuit on the TU-12 card.

2
2
 1. Introduction

32-port VT-1.5 mapper card

The new version of the VT-1.5 mapper card extends the port density to 32
narrowband T1 ports, each with a fixed connection to an associated broadband
circuit on the VT-1.5 card.

For more information about the HSA DS3 card, see chapter 6. For more
information about the Octal T1 card, and about the 32-port TU-12 mapper card
and the 32-port VT-1.5 mapper card, see chapter 7.

Data features Release 8.0 introduces the 27LC3 line card and DPM3 module, support for a 4-
wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the 2752 MainStreet DTU, and new
functionality for the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet DTUs.

27LC3 line cardand DPM3module

The 27LC3 line card provides 12 ports of 2B1Q connectivity for the 2751, 2752,
and 2753 MainStreet DTUs. The functionality of the 12-port 27LC3 line card is
identical to that of the 6-port 27LC2 line card, except that it supports double data
bandwidth.

The DPM3 module is supported with th e 27LC3 line card, providing subrate
multiplexing for all 12 ports. The DPM3 supports only HCM in this release.

For more information about the 27LC3 line card, see chapter 9.

Supportfor 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU

The new 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU allows for low-cost, high-bandwidth
access from the edge of the network, with selectable loop and customer data rates.
The 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides two wires to each of
two (1 Mb/s) ports on the 28LC line card, for a maximum line speed of 2
Mb/s.

For more information on the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, see chapters 3 and 9.

2752 MainStreet DTU and expandedufnctionality for 2751 and2753 MainStreet

DTUs
The 2752 MainStreet DTU supports both X.21 and RS-449 interfaces in either a
redundant or a 2-port nonredundant configuratio n.

Enhanced functionality for the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet series DTUs includes
data port redundancy support, visual indicators, OOS lead handling, integral
BERT, built-in self tests and reporting, and n  64 kb/s super-rate data interface
speed.

For more information about these DTUs, refer to chapter 9 and to the
2600/2700/2800 MainStreet Family Data Termination Units (DTUs) data sheet.

23
Product overview

Management and
configuration features
Release 8.0 improves control redundancy by introducing failure switching as an
alternative to demerit switching (supported in earlier releases).

Failure switching determines the system health based on the severity of failures
that occur on each control complex. The control complex with the most severe
failure is the inactive complex. An activity switch occurs when the active
complex develops a problem that is more severe than any problem on the inactive
complex, even if the inactive complex has several minor problems.

Other features Release 8.0 introduces an enhanced version of the external ringing generator.
The enhanced external ringing generator assembly provides:

• wider input voltage operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

• dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
• customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
• pull-out tray for easy access to ringing units from the front panel

For more information about the external ringing generator, see chapter3.

2
4
2
Applications
This chapter describes the wide range of value-added applications supported by the
3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, including:

• SONET and SDH switching

• ATM adaptation
• ISDN bandwidth on demand
• subrate data applications: DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460 transparent rate
adaption; multidrop data bridging; subrate multiplexing; subrate
switching and Switched 56 kb/s access
• inverse multiplexing
• super-rate data access (up to 1984 kb/s)
• voice applications: ADPCM G.721, HCV, CS-A-CELP G.729 and G.729
Annex A, LD-CELP G.728 voice compression, super-tandem operation,
and VoFR; G3 fax and V.32 modem relay; and echo cancellation;
international aggregate and voice signaling, and companding conversion;
analog interface conversion; voice conference bridging
• frame relay switching
• X.25 packet switching

23
Product overview

Both Telco-standard and optional proprietary applications are supported using

one or more of the following resources:

• high-speed aggregates
• multipurpose, software-downloadable application cards and modules, such
as the IMC, DSP card, and the DPM
• hardware-optimized, application-specific cards and modules, such as the
FRS, FRE, X.25 FRE, and PE cards, and the VCM3 and CCM
• system software Generic 1118, which resides on the Control card

Table 2-1 lists the applications supported by the 3600 + MainStreet system and the
specific resources they require.

Table 2-1: 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager value-added applications

Application Card or module

C D D D D D D I F D D V C F P O S T V A
P S S S S S S M R P P C C R E C T U T T
C P P P P P P C S M M M M E 3 M 1 1 M
2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 1 2 5 S
H C
SONET mapping
and switching
✓ ✓
SDH mapping and ✓ ✓
switching
ATM adaptation ✓
X.25 services ✓ ✓
Frame relay
switching
✓ ✓✓
Subrate switching ✓
ISDN bandwidth
on demand
✓
Inverse ✓ ✓
multiplexing
DDS Access ✓ ✓ ✓
DDS Core ✓ ✓
X.50 (Div. 3); X.50 ✓ ✓ ✓
Telco (Div. 2 and 3)
HCM or ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
transparent rate
adaption
HCM with 4 kb/s ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CPSS
PCM bridging ✓ ✓ ✓
ADPCM ✓

24
 2. Applications

Application Card or module

C D D D D D D I F D D V C F P O S T V A
P S S S S S S M R P P C C R E C T U T T
C P P P P P P C S M M M M E 3 M 1 1 M
2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 1 2 5 S
H C

ADPCM with G3
fax
✓

✓
CS-A-CELP(G.729 and
G.729A)
CS-LD-CELP ✓
(G.728)
Bulk HCV ✓ ✓
HCV ✓
HCV and G3 fax ✓
Super-tandem ✓ ✓ ✓
operation
VoFR ✓ ✓
Echo cancellation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Voice conference ✓
bridging
PCM companding ✓
conversion
G3 fax ✓
V.32 bis modem ✓
relay

25
Product overview

SONET and SONET and SDH are standards for signaling in fiber optic networks in
SDH North America and Europe, respectively. The SONET and SDH standards define
switching the format, optical line rate, wavelength, power levels, pulse shape, and coding
for optical networks. The creation of these standards ensures a long-term
solution for inter-vendor development of interfaces that allow the transport of
existing digital services over fiber optic networks. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet
system supports the OC-3 SONET level through the OC-3 card, and the STM-1
SDH level through the
STM-1 card.

Since SONET and SDH networks are synchronous, only single-stage

multiplexing and demultiplexing is required; there is no requirement, as there is
in asynchronous networks, for multistage multiplexing. Single-stage multiplexing
and demultiplexing eliminates the need for back-to-back multiplexing while
inserting data into or extracting data from a network. Data can be added to or
dropped from a SONET or SDH signal without demultiplexing and
remultiplexing the entire SONET or SDH signal. This makes SONET and SDH
equipment compact and efficient. A SONET or SDH signal is bandwidth-
flexible and can support transmission of a combination of services including
broadband data switching, high-speed packet-switching and video conferencing.
A basic SONET or SDH signal is a structured frame that is divided into overhead
layers and a payload envelope. The overhead layers contain transport and
payload information and can be used for maintenance operations. The payload
carries signals that have been mapped into a payload envelope.

The flexibility of the SONET and SDH frame formats allows for efficient
mapping of network services into payload envelopes. On the 3600 + MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, the mapping function is provided by the TU-
12 Mapper and VT-1.5 Mapper cards.

TU-12 Mapper cards have TU-12 broadband circuits and VT-1.5 Mapper cards
have VT-1.5 broadband circuits. Each Mapper card has a fixed broadband
circuit-to narrowband port connection. When Mapper card broadband circuits
are connected to broadband circuits on OC-3 or STM-1 cards, the Mapper cards
transmit narrowband DS0-based data and voice from circuits connected to the
narrowband port to a SONET or SDH network.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can be set up to support four basic

applications: high-density time-division multiplexing, linear add/drop
multiplexing, signal termination, and ring multiplexing. Traffic protection is
supported in all shelf configurations.

26
 2. Applications

High-density time-division
multiplexing The 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf can be set up to support time-division
multiplexing. The basic shelf configuration provides access to 8 UCSs; if a
Narrowband module is installed on the Control card, access to 16 UCSs is
provided. In this application, no HSA cards are installed; therefore, no SONET or
SDH functionality is supported.

Linear add/drop
multiplexing and For this application, a series of 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelves are set up to
signal termination support the adding and dropping of data in a linear network. The shelves at
either end of the linear network provide signal termination. HSA cards can be
used in these applications, providing SONET or SDH functionality. Traffic
protection is supported on a link level.

Figure 2-1 shows an example of how 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelves are used in
linear add/drop multiplexing and signal termination applications.

Figure 2-1: Example of linear add/drop multiplexing and signal termination

applications

Linear broadband network

3600/3600+ MainStreet3600/3600+
node MainStreet 3600/3600+ MainStreet
Narrowband and broadband signal
node termination
node
Narrowband and broadband signal termination

9770

Ring multiplexing The ring topology consists of a minimum of three 3600 + MainStreet shelves.
The advantages of ring multiplexing include support for linear add/drop
multiplexing and signal termination applications, and traffic protection at the
circuit level which allows for quick recovery of service in the event of a failure.

Figure 2-2 shows an example of how 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelves are set up in a
ring.

27
Product overview

Figure 2-2: Example of a ring application

3600/3600+
MainStreet
node

Corporate
PBX 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet MainStreet MainStreet MainStreet
node node node node

Linear add/drop

SONET or
SDH UPSR

3600/3600+
MainStreet
node

POTS

Public
network
9771

ATM adaptation This section describes the ATM adaptation methods supported on the ATM
Services cards, and how bandwidth is distributed to support these
adaptation methods.

Adaptation methods Two adaptation methods are supported on the ATM Services cards: AAL1
which provides circuit emulation service, and AAL5 which provides HDLC
service.

The circuit emulation service formats data and signaling for n  64 kb/s circuits
into constant bit rate AAL1 cells for transport over an ATM network. Circuit
emulation service can be applied to traffic from voice, data, aggregate and DSP
circuits, and frame relay packets.

The HDLC service formats HDLC and frame relay packets into variable or
unspecified bit rate AAL5 cells for transport over an ATM network. HDLC
service can be applied to traffic from data, aggregate and DSP circuits, and frame
relay packets.

The ATM Services card supports service and network interworking modes.
Service interworking mode translates frame relay into ATM for transport across
28
 2. Applications
an ATM network to ATM devices. Network interworking mode transports frame
relay across an ATM network to another frame relay network.

29
Product overview

In addition to supporting ATM adaptation, the ATM Services card provides:

• traffic management for frame relay and ATM

• connection admission control
• scaling factor
• redundancy (load sharing of traffic)
• timing and synchronization

Figure 2-3 illustrates the multiservice aspect of ATM adaptation.

Figure 2-3: Multiservice ATM adaptation

Central office Business park/customer premises

PSTN 4WTO

E&M/LGS
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager Subrate (DDS, X.50)
n x 56/64 kb/s V.35/X.21
ISDN T1/E1
ATM
infrastructure n x T1/E1 ATM

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

DDS X.50 Frame relay PSTN
with ATM Services card
ISDN

Internet
X.25

15159

Bandwidth distribution Bandwidth distribution is instrumental in providing adaptation services. The

ATM Services card uses two types of bandwidth: backplane and network
bandwidth. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit provides 16 Mb/s of backplane
bandwidth. The 4 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 4 Mb/s of backplane
bandwidth, and the 16 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 16 Mb/s of backplane
bandwidth. Network bandwidth support is the same for each card variant, but is
allocated differently depending on the configuration.

30
 2. Applications

The ATM Services card provides four T1 or E1 network interfaces (physical

ports), and is equipped with an IMA module, which provides one ATM network
interface (logical port). Each T1 or E1 port provides an independent network
link, or can be assigned to an IMA group for combined transmission. An IMA
group can be inversely multiplexed to form an aggregate ATM cell stream (see
“Inverse multiplexing” in this chapter for more information).

Each T1 port provides 1.5 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 6 Mb/s;
each E1 port provides 2 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 8 Mb/s. The
IMA module provides a logical port for an IMA group, which can be composed
of up to four T1 or E1 physical ports and their associated links. The effective
network bandwidth for the IMA port is approximately n  1.5 Mb/s (T1) or n  2
Mb/s (E1), where n is the number of ports in the IMA group. The values are
approximate as IMA overhead must be factored into the total bandwidth.

Transport entities
The ATM Services card uses bandwidth to support:

• ASC circuits
An ASC circuit represents 64 kb/s of TDM bandwidth on the system
backplane. ASC circuits, which are organized into ASC circuit groups, act as
intermediate points between the TDM and ATM sides of the ATM Services
card. On the TDM side, the circuits cross-connect through the Control card
switching matrix to 64 kb/s circuits on other UCS cards. On the ATM side,
the circuits are assigned VC parameters to define an AAL1 VC, or are
assigned to a frame stream circuit that connects to an AAL5 VC.
The 4 Mb/s ATM Services card provides 60 ASC circuits, organized into
two circuit groups with 30 circuits per group.
The 16 Mb/s ATM Services card provides 248 ASC circuits, organized into
eight circuit groups with 31 ASC circuits per group. The four physical ports
and ATM overhead limit the number of usable ASC circuits to a maximum
of 104 E1 or 84 T1 circuits.
• frame stream circuits
A frame stream on the ATM Services card specifies the bandwidth over
which HDLC-formatted connections operate. HDLC-formatted traffic
includes frames configured for transparent HDLC applications or frame relay
HDLC applications. A frame stream circuit is the entity used to configure and
connect a frame stream. Frame streams are specified by frame stream circuit
identifiers.
The 4 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 44 FSCs, providing 2816
kb/s (44  64 kb/s), providing a combined bandwidth of up to 2816
kb/s for
HDLC-formatted traffic. An individual stream carries up to 1920 kb/s. Future
developments on the AAL1/5 variant include support for 62 FSCs.

31
Product overview

The 16 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 44 FSCs, providing 2816 kb/s
(44  64 kb/s), providing a combined bandwidth of up to 2816 kb/s for
HDLC-formatted traffic. An individual stream carries up to 1984 kb/s. Future
developments on the AAL1/5 variant include support for 62 FSCs.
• DLCs
An FSC configured for frame relay interworking can support up to 250
DLCs; however, the 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ATM Services cards support a
total of 1024 DLCs. Each FSC configured for transparent HDLC traffic
counts as one DLC toward the 1024 DLCs per card limit.
• VPs
The ATM Services card supports 32 VPs per port (E1, T1, and IMA), with a
VPI range of 0 to 31 and a VCI range of 32 to 65535 (per VP).
• PVCs
A PVC connects a backplane circuit to a VC on an ATM link. VCs
carrying AAL5-adapted traffic require frame relay-to-ATM PVC
configuration. VCs carrying AAL1-adapted traffic require AAL1 PVC
configuration.

ISDN bandwidth ISDN in 3600/3600+ MainStreet systems provides customers with an alternate
on demand transport facility for leased-line applications. For example, customers can use
ISDN bandwidth to address the backup and disaster recovery requirements of
their leased-line network; service providers can offer ISDN access to their
managed bandwidth services networks (see Figures 2-4 and 2-5).

Figure 2-4: Advanced managed bandwidth services

Remote CPE

3600/3600+
MainStreet node
3600/3600+
MainStreet 3600/3600+
T1/E1 node MainStreet node
ISDN
Multiservice backbone network

ISDN as an access facility ISDN

to extended leased-line or frame relay services to customers who:
are not directly accessible T1/E1 T1/E1
only require part-time connectivity
3600/3600+
MainStreet node
ISDN within the backbone network:
for backup and disaster recovery solutions
to access nodes only reachable through another provider's network

3600/3600+
MainStreet
node 11238

32
 2. Applications

Figure 2-5: Extended corporate

networks

Remote
CPE

3600/3600
+
MainStreet
node 3600/3
600+ 3600/3600
T1/E1 MainStreet +
ISDN MainStreet
node
node
Multiservice backbone
network

T1/E1 ISDN
ISDN as an access facility
to multiservices backbone network:
branch office, telecommuter connectivity T1/E1
remote learning, telemedicine
3600/3600
+
ISDN as an adjunct to leased lines within the
MainStreet
multiservices backbone network: rapid node
deployment of interim
and overflow services
leased versus switched tariff optimization
flexible leased-line backup and
disaster recovery solutions 3600/3600+
MainStreet
node 11237

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports a variety of ISDN applications on

the CPC, IMC, BRI S/T card, Dual T1-2 card, Dual E1 card, Dual E1-2 card, and
2B1Q channel unit. These applications fall under four categories:

• ISDN access
• ISDN channel search
• ISDN protocol tracing and status message monitoring
• ISDN transport

ISDN access ISDN leased-line backup is supported on the CPC and can be used to back up
two, twenty-three or thirty 64 kb/s Bchannels, depending on whether the
interface is basic rate, T1 primary rate, or E1 primary rate.

ISDN leased-line backup

The ISDN backup application provides RAPID protection of leased lines
using ISDN. For situations in which out-of-band signaling is not needed and
the call setup for the backup connection can have a delay of 1 or 2 seconds,
ISDN
B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.

In backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a leased line

uses a BRI or PRI interface as its alternative path. RAPID uses a one-to-one
mapping of channels from preferred to alternative paths.

33
Product overview

When a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches
the leased-line circuits to a BRI or PRI with the appropriate preprogrammed
dialling information. You can program a variable delay setting to prevent
simultaneous dialling by both endpoints, which may result in a glare situation.

When it answers an incoming ISDN call, the node disconnects the specified
channel from its preferred path and connects it to the B channel specified by the
network. One end node can be programmed for answer-only mode.

Figure 2-6 shows a channel connected from 3600 MainStreet node #1 to

3600/3600+ MainStreet node #2 through intermediate 3600 + MainStreet nodes
A and B on a leased line. If a failure is detected by 3600 MainStreet node #1, it
initiates an ISDN call through the PSTN to the 3600/3600+ MainStreet node #2.
Each
3600/3600+ MainStreet node then connects the backed-up channel to the
ISDN B channel.

Figure 2-6: ISDN backup application

Preferred connection

3600/3600+ MainStreet 3600/3600+ MainStreet

3600 MainStreet node #3
node #2
node #1

Node A Node B

Backup Backup

PSTN

3600/3600+ MainStreet node #4

11226

On 3600/3600+ MainStreet systems, ISDN is used to set up 56 kb/s or 64

kb/s clear
channel bandwidth between two points. CPE signaling, if required, is
transported inband (for example, inband voice signaling using HCV).

Super-rate connections can also be backed up with ISDN. Some ISDNs support
n  64 kb/s connections or specific speeds, such as 384 kb/s (H0); for networks
that do not, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides inverse multiplexing
capability (for more information, see “Inverse multiplexing” in this chapter).

34
 2. Applications

Figure 2-7 shows the connections required in the 3600 + MainStreet system for
the ISDN leased-line backup application. The D channel for each interface used
for ISDN signaling must be connected to an HDLC circuit on the CPC through
the switching matrix. Up to 31 D channels can be connected to each CPC. The
B channels are not connected until the need for backup occurs, or a preferred
connection is programmed.

Figure 2-7: ISDN backup

connections
BRI CPC
HDLC
D channel D channel
BRI-1 BRI-2 BRI-3 D channel
BR 2B
2B
BRI-8 2B

D channel
2B

B channels are unconnected Connected through

except when a call is in progress switching matrix
7916

ISDN backup is ideal for providing sporadic backup for leased lines because it is
tariffed on a usage-only basis. ISDN backup can be used in situations where
there is not enough leased-line bandwidth available. You can set up a link for a
few hours in an overflow situation, or for several weeks until more leased lines
can be installed.

ISDN channel search ISDN channel search allows multiple circuits within an ISDN interface to have
the same directory number. The channel search facility is ideal for applications
in which many, short-duration calls are made to the same number (for example,
credit card authorization and 1-800 services).

Circuits with the same directory number are part of the same hunt group. When
a call is received, the node searches thegroup that contains the specified number,
and connects the incoming B channel to the first available circuit.

As with ISDN backup, the D channel for each BRI interface must be connected
to an HDLC circuit on the CPC. However, each circuit connection does not have
to contain a unique directory number.

ISDN protocol tracing and

status message
The ISDN protocol tracing feature allows you to record and view Layer 2 and
monitoring Layer 3 protocol messages for any circuit on the CPC. When ISDN protocol
tracing is activated for a particular circuit, each Layer 2 and Layer 3 message
transmitted by the CPC physical layer over that circuit is recorded. The messages
are stored in the trace buffer.

Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages currently stored in the trace buffer can be
viewed using short or detailed formats. Layer 2 trace status information of the
circuit or group of circuits specified can also be viewed.

35
Product overview

ISDN transport There are two ISDN transport applications: ISDN leased lines and ISDN loop
extension. Both the leased-line and loop extension applications are supported on
the BRI S/T card; loop extension is supported on the 2B1Q channel unit.

Leased lines
This application allows CPE to be connected to the 3600 + MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager through a BRI or PRI. The B channels and D
channels are treated as regular 16 kb/s, 64 kb/s or n  64 kb/s connections. On
the network side, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can use the BRI S/T card
for leased-line connectivity in countries such as Germany and Japan where the
Sofv and I interface, respectively, are so prevalent.

Figure 2-8 shows a typical 2B+D leased-line application. In this example, a

3600/3600+ MainStreet node is used in a private network to access a 2B+D
leased-line
network. The 2B+D leased line is carrying six 8 kb/s compressed voice calls, three
D channels with the signaling for the voice calls, three 9.6 kb/s X.21 data calls
and a 4 kb/s CPSS channel. (The X.21 data calls are connected to an X.21 DCC
in the 3600/3600+ MainStreet node.) The 3600/3600+ MainStreet node passes
the D channels transparently to the network.

Figure 2-8: Leased-line application

B1 B2 D
Front end processor
or mainframe 4 kb/s
CPSS
Voice 1

Voice 2

Voice 3
Voice 4
Voice 5

Voice 6
9.6 kb/s

D
and 2 x
D1

D2
9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s X.21
X.21

ISDN
PBX

2B+D
2B+D BRI BRI 2B+D leased
S/T S/T line network

3600/3600+
MainStreet
node
11224

ISDN loop extension

When cost or distance factors make it impractical to access an ISDN network,
a non-ISDN digital facility can be used to extend the ISDN loop. Figures 2-9
and 2-10 show an ISDN loop extension.

In Figure 2-9, at either end of the loop extension, a BRI S/T card provides the
2B+D interface. At the customer premises, the BRI S/T card operates in NT
mode. At the network end, it operates in TE mode.

36
 2. Applications

Figure 2-9: ISDN loop extension with the BRI S/T card

3600/3600+
MainStreet 3600/3600+
node MainStreet
node
ISDN Non-ISDN
device digital facility E1 BRI
TE BRI S/T ISDN
E1 NT1 network
2B+D S/T 2B+D
format format

(NT) (TE)

1st DS0 2nd DS0 3rd DS0

B1 B2 1 1 0 0 1D 1

3DS0 format
11225

The loop extension scheme on the BRI S/T card uses three DS0 channels on a
DS1 interface to transport the basic rate traffic between the two 3600 +
MainStreet nodes. One DS0 is used for each B channel and the third DS0 carries
a D channel containing signaling. In Figure 2-9, an ISDN device gains access to
a remote ISDN network using 3DS0 transport over an E1 link. If the application
needs delay equalization, the B1, B2, and D channels can be configured as a
super-rate group; otherwise, each channel can be connected individually.

In Figure 2-10, at either end of the loop extension, a LUNT and LULT provide
the termination for the U-interface. The LULT and LUNT are very similar to an
LT and NT (respectively), but have slight differences that make them suitable for
loop extensions. In 3600/3600+ MainStreet systems, the 2B1Q channel unit acts
as a LUNT or LULT.

Figure 2-10: ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit

Alcatel 5620 Network Manager

3600/3600+ MainStreet local node

3600/3600+ MainStreet remote nodeLocal
ISDN CO LUNT loop
LULT CPE
LT LT LT 3DS0
NT1
format
LUNT LUNT T1 T1 LULT LULT
SS7
network Managed private line network facilities
(4-5 interoffice T1 links)
T1 T1
LTLUNT LULT

Basic rate
2B1Q CU 2B1Q CU
U reference
soft-configured soft-configured
point as defined by
for LUNT mode for LULT mode
ANSI T1.604 - 1992
15160

37
Product overview

Oneloop extension scheme, defined byBellcore in TR-TSY-000397, uses three

DS0 channels on a DS1 (or higher) interface to transport the basic rate traffic
between the LULT and LUNT. In the 3DS0 format, one DS0 is used for each B
channel and the third DS0 carries a D+ channel containing signaling.

Figure 2-11 shows a typical 3DS0 loop extension application. In this example,
the U-interface- compatible device gains access to a remote ISDN network using
3DS0 transport over a T1 link. The B1, B2, and D+ channels are treated as parts
of one 192 kb/s super-rate circuit connected to the T1 card.

Figure 2-11: 3DS0 ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit

3600/3600+ MainStreet
3600/3600+
NT node MainStreet
node

U 2B1Q CU Digital facility 2B1Q CU U

interface LULT LUNT interface
T1 T1 LT

ISDN
U-interface computer ISDN
network

DS0n DS0n+1 DS0n+2

B1 B2 D+

192 kb/s data over 3 DS0s

11223

Another transmission scheme, specified in ITU-T Q.512, carries the data stream
for two U-interfaces on five DS0 channels of a digital facility. Four DS0s
correspond to the Bchannels from both interfaces. Two 32 kb/s D+CV channels,
which consist of D channel bits and overhead bits, are multiplexed onto a fifth
DS0.

Figure 2-12 shows a typical 5DS0 loop extension application. In this example,
two U-interface-compatible devices use 5DS0 transport over a T1 link to access
a remote ISDN network. An SRM multiplexes two D+CV channels into one
DS0. The B1 and B2 channels are connected to the T1 link directly as parts of
one
128 kb/s super-rate circuit.

38
 2. Applications

Figure 2-12: 5DS0 loop extension application

ISDN
U-interface
telephone
3600/3600+ MainStreet node 3600/3600+ MainStreet node

2B1Q CUB1 B11 B21 2B1Q ULT

LULT 1 CU
U B2 interface
LUNT
interface 1

D1CV1 D2CV2 Digital facility D1 CV1 ISDN

NT 2B1Q CU SRM T1 T1SRM D2 CV2 network

U
2B1Q CU
interface U
B12 B22 LUNT
interface LT
LULT B12 B22

ISDN
U-interface
computer

DS0n DS0n+1 DS0n+2 DS0n+3DS0n+4

B11 B21 B12
B22 D1CV1 D2CV2

320 kb/s over 5 DS0s

11222

39
Product overview

Subrate data T1 and E1 specifications define framing structures based on the 64 kb/s channels
applications required for digitizing one voice call. Data devices often operate at rates well
below 64 kb/s, rates that T1 and E1 framing were not specifically designed to
support.
Consequently, data formats have been developed that rate-adapt subrate data onto
64 kb/s channels.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports both standard and proprietary

subrate data formats:

• DDS and all DDS-compatibles – DS0-A, DS0-B, MJU, and Switched

56 Special Access
• ITU-T X.50 – Division 2 and Division 3 framing, X.54 channel allocation, and
X.51 bis transmission format
• HCM – a proprietary technique that provides a multiplexing resolution of
800 b/s while respecting channelized T1 and E1 boundaries
• ITU-T I.460 – transparent n  8 kb/s subrate channels

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system performs the following subrate data

applications on each of these data formats (where applicable):

• rate adaption
Rate adaption applies a particular data format to a subrate circuit for
transmission on a 64 kb/s T1 or E1 channel.
• MDDBs and MJUs
MDDBs and MJUs allow several subrate circuits to use the same
transmission bandwidth on the assumption that only one circuit will use the
shared bandwidth at any one time (typical of mainframe computer to
multiterminal communication networks).
• subrate multiplexing
SRMs combine several discrete subrate circuits onto the same 64 kb/s T1 or E1
channel.
• subrate switching
SRSs allow network operators to switch (groom) subrate circuits on aggregate
DS0 channels.

Other subrate data services include:

• control lead propagation through the network

• end-to-end continuity checking and error correction
• independent (pass-through) clocking
• network- and operator-requested loopbacks
• multiplexing low bit-rate voice and data in the same DS0

40
 2. Applications

Most subrate data applications use independently programmed DSP resources

(see Table 2-1) to emulate SRMs for DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460
(transparent) service.

Dataphone Digital Service DDS is an all-digital data transmission service. It provides full-duplex
point-to-point and multipoint data transmission for subrate data circuits.
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports DDS access over OCU-DP channel
units, DNIC and 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q channel unit-attached DTUs, and
X.21, V.35, and V.24/RS-232 DCCs.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU devices
for both DDS and DDS-compatible services and provides the following user-
programmable DDS resources:

• traditional DDSAccess on the OCU-DP channel unit, using OCU-DP

channel units (providing 4-wire CSU interfaces) programmable for standard
or Switched 56 Special Access
• DDS Access, a DSP application for standards-compliant DDS DS0-A, DS0-
B, and MJU functions (including 19.2 kb/s DS0-B and MJU, BCH error
correction for 19.2 kb/s DS0-A connections and DS0-A formatted MJU
connections, and MJU antistreaming) used at the edges of large networks
and throughout networks with small DDS requirements
• DDS Core, an optimized version of the DDS Access for high-volume DS0-
B and MJU functions; intended for bulk DDS processing on the backbone
network
• subrate switching, a DSP4 card application for DS0-B channel time and
space switching, and DS0-A channel drop and insertion

There are three possible configurations for DDS access on the 3600/3600+
MainStreet system: traditional, CSSNA, and local (T1) access. Figure 2-13
shows the DDS access configurations, and Figure 2-14 shows DDS subrate DS0
frame structures.

41
Product overview

Figure 2-13: 3600/3600+ MainStreet node DDS Access configurations

DT
Central office
3600/3600+ MainStreet
node
Customer premises

MJU
SRM
DDS
DS network
DT U/ DS0-A T1
4-wire OCU-DP
CS ca
conditioned
Traditional loop DS0-B rd
access Carrier card SRM

Central office
3600/3600+ MainStreet
node

Customer premises
MJU
SRM

DT 2B1Q
CSSNA li DDS
2700 DS0-B
access ne T1 network
MainStre SRM
DT et series ca ca
2-wire rd
twisted pair rd
loop (24 AWG)
7.2 km (4.5 mi) DS0-A
SRM

Central office
3600/3600+ MainStreet
node

Customer premises
MJU
SRM

DNIC
2600
2700 li DDS
ne DS0-B network
MainStre T1
ca SRM
et series 2-wire ca
DT rd rd
twisted pair
Local loop (24 AWG)
access 3.3 km (2.1 mi) DS0-A
SRM

10850

42
 2. Applications

Figure 2-14: DDS DS0-A and DS0-B frame formats

• Framing bit
• Standard CSU-to-CSU
• User data for 56 MSB LSB
8- bit DS0 communication channel
and 64 kb/s
• DDS secondary channel, plus:
operation
- end-to-end control lead propagation
- continuity checking
• Primary channel • Switched 56 signaling channel
- user data • User data for 64 kb/s operation
- inband
maintenance
codes

Frame
2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 56 or 64 kb/s
1 1
2 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 1
5 6 7 8 3 4 2 2
3
9 10 11 12 5 6 3 3
4
13 14 15 16 7 8 4 4
5 17 18 19 20 9 10 5 5

5 frames,
20 channels 5 frames, 5 frames, 5 frames, 1 frame,
10 channels 5 channels 1 channel 1 channel
DS0-A:
• user data repeated in DS0-A: DS0-A: DS0-A: DS0-A:
all 20 cells • user data repeated in • user data repeated in BCH (17,9) OFF • 56 kb/s operation:
• majority vote 12/20 all 10 cells all 5 cells • user data divided user data occupies
DS0-B: • majority vote 6/10 • majority vote 3/5 between cells framing bit plus
• each cell (numbers DS0-B: DS0-B: 2 and 3 primary channel bits
1 to 20) • each cell (numbers • each cell (numbers • pad characters (7 bits total)
represents a separate 1 to 10) represents 1 to 5) represents a elsewhere • 64 kb/s operation:
2.4 kb/s channel a separate 4.8 kb/s separate 9.6 kb/s DS0-A_EC (using the OCU-DP
channel channel • user data divided channel unit) user
between cells data occupies
1 and 2 framing bit, primary
• BCH code in cells 3 channel bits, and
and 4 secondary channel
• framing in cell 5 bit (8 bits total)
DS0-B: • BCH (17, 9) code in
• each cell second DS0
(numbers 1 to 5)
represents a separate
9.6 kb/s channel
• 19.2 fits onto 2 and 3
and/or 4 and 5
5964

In traditional DDS implementations, DTE on the customer premises connects to a

DSU or CSU. The CSU provides the line drivers necessary for transmission over
the local loop. At the CO, the local loop terminates on an OCU, such as the
3600/3600+ MainStreet OCU-DP channel unit.

The OCU-DP channel unit rate adapts the local loop signal to form a DS0-A
channel suitable for multiplexing into a single 64 kb/s timeslot on a DS1
(T1) network link or cross-connected to:

• a DS0-B device, which produces an aggregate DS0-B signal composed of up

to 20 DS0-A channels
• an MJU device, which produces a composite DS0-A signal (that is,
a DDS-based multidrop data bridge)

43
Product overview

DS0-B and MJU functions are performed by the 3600 + MainStreet system using
SRMs.

In CSSNA implementations, 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are located on the

customer premises and 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q channel units are installed in
the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system located at the CO. SRMs are used to provide
the desired DDS rate adaption, subrate multiplexing, and multipoint
configurations.

CSSNA provides several advantages over traditional DDS implementations. For

example, the same local loop that supports one DSU/CSU data port will support
four ports using 2700 MainStreet series DTUs and either 2B1Q line cards or
2B1Q channel units (dual-port DTUs use a 2-wire, unconditioned loop).

The CSSNA approach also enables network management (CPSS) out to the
customer premises, since DTUs are fully software-configurable.

For local (T1) access to the DDS Network, a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit
and 2600 MainStreet series DTUs can be located on the customer
premises.

Traditional DDS with the OCU-DP channel unit

The OCU-DP channel unit can be installed in any of the four channel unit
positions on the Common Carrier card to provide single-circuit modularity.
Built-in DS0-A functionality includes:

• majority vote error correction for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-A signals and
BCH (17, 9) forward error correction code support for 19.2, 56, and 64
kb/s DS0-A signals
• upstream and downstream control code support (see Figure 2-15)
• network- and operator-generated latching and alternating loopbacks (see
Figure 2-16)
• DS0-A rate adaption for the attached DSU or CSU primary and
secondary channels (see Figure 2-17)

The OCU-DP channel unit can also be configured to interface to Switched 56

kb/s services offered by interexchange carriers. In this mode, on- or off-hook
status and dialing information from the CSU are translated into standard D4, T1
RBS E&M codes.

Access is supported on the customer loop by installing OCU-DP channel units at

the CO, or by installing a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system and OCU-DP channel
units at the customer premises and accessing the Switched 56 network over T1
and a SW56 CSU.

The Common Carrier card provides network bandwidth support for all
configurations, including four OCU-DP channel units configured for 56 kb/s
primary channels with error correction.

44
 2. Applications

Figure 2-15: DDS control codes supported by the OCU-DP channel unit

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

DSU/
CSU OCU- T
DP
1
Upstream Downstream
control codes control codes
IDLE Control Mode Idle (CMI)
Zero code suppression CSU loopback (CSU)
Out of service DSU loopback (DSU)
Out of frame OCU loopback (OCU)
Loopback (customer control) Abnormal Station Code (ASC) Mux
out-of-sync (MOS) Unassigned
Mux Channel (UMC) Test
Test Alert (TA)
MJU Alert (MA)
Loopback Enable (LBE) Far
End Voice (FEV) Transition
In Progress (TIP) Block code
(BLK)
Release code (Rls)

11248

45
Product overview

Figure 2-16: DDS loopbacks

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Upstream device (1)

DDS Access MJU, DS0-B DDS Core MJU, DS0-B SRS
OCU-DP CU DDS network via T1/FT1
DSU/ CSU
4-wire

DT
Alternating Alternating Alternating Loopback
DSU and latching and latching C
loopback CSU OCU (switching shelf)
loopbacks loopbacks

3600/3600+ MainStreet node Upstream device (1)

DDS Access MJU, DS0-B DDS Core MJU, DS0-B SRS
2B1Q/ DNICDDS DDS network via T1/FT1
interface Access SRM (3)
DTU
DT (2) 2-wire
DT

Alternating Alternating Alternating Loopback

DSU and latching and latching C
loopback CSU OCU (switching shelf)
loopbacks loopbacks

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

DT Upstream device (1)

DDS
Access DDS Access MJU, DS0-
DCC (4) SRM (3) B DDS Core MJU, DS0-
B SRS
DT DDS network via T1/FT1

Alternating Loopback
DSU CSU OCU C
loopback (switching shelf)
Alternating
and latching
loopbacks
Notes
1. Upstream DDS Access and Core SRMs pass network-generated loopback commands to the downstream terminating DDS device. Upstream DDS
Access and Core MJU SRMs also pass loopback commands, provided the appropriate MJU Branch Select is invoked.
2. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DTU port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DTU’s Rate Adaption Gate Array near the
DTE interface (DSU) and the 2B1Q/DNIC interface (CSU).
3. For DTU and DCC tributary or branch circuits, all DDS Access SRM functions can be used as the terminating DDS device (for example, DDS
Access DS0-B and MJU SRMs include DS0-A rate adaption functionality). Terminating DDS Access DS0-A and MJU SRMs support latching and
alternating OCU, CSU and DSU loopbacks (terminating DDS Access DS0-B SRMs support alternating loopbacks). DDS Access MJU SRMs also
support Branch Select, Branch Block, MJU loopback and Global Release.
4. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DCC port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DCC’s Rate Adaption Gate Array near the
DTE interface (DSU) and the backplane interface (CSU).
11249

46
 2. Applications

Figure 2-17: Valid tributary and branch channel sources for DDS resources

DDS resources and applications

OCU-DP DDS Access DDS Core SRS (1)
DS0-A MJU DS0-B SRM MJU DS0-B DDS
DS0-A SRM SRM (maximum # of tributaries)
SRM (maximum # of tributaries)
port
2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s

CSU
2.4
4.8
kb/s 9.6
19.2
Eligible tributary/branch channel sources

56
DTU/DCC (2)
1.2/2.4 (3) 20 10 5 3
4.8 10 5 3
kb/s 9.6 5 3
19.2 2 2
56 1 1
DS0-A (4)
2.4 20 10 5 3 20 10 5 3
4.8 10 5 3 10 5 3
kb/s 9.6 5 3 5 3
19.2 2 2 2 2
56 1 1 1 1
DS0-B (5)
2.4 1 1
4.8 1 1
kb/s 9.6 1 1
19.2 1 1
Secondary (6)
supported trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans-
channel parent parent parent parent parent parent parent parent parent

Notes
1. A " " in this column indicates that the tributary/branch channel source can be cross-connected to a DDS-
configured subrate switching application port.
2. Data ports include 2600 and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, V.24/RS-232 DCC and V.35 DCC.
3. DTU and DCC ports rate adapt 1.2 kb/s to 2.4 kb/s prior to DDS Access DS0-A rate adaption.
4. DS0-A sources include OCU-DP (all speeds), DDS Access DS0-A SRMs (all speeds), DDS Access/Core
MJU SRMs (2.4, 4.8, 9.6 and 56 kb/s), and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots (all speeds). OCU-DP 56 kb/s and
DS0-A signals connected to an SRM should have error correction disabled.
5. DS0-B sources include DDS Access DS0-B SRMs, DDS Core DS0-B SRMs and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots.
6. Secondary channel data from CSU supported by OCU-DP and passed transparently by other devices indicated.
7931

47
Product overview

DDS Access
The DDS Access application uses SRMs to provide a standards-compliant suite
of DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU functionality. DDS Access is intended for access
applications. For example, it would be used at a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
configured to groom several data streams from attached 2600 MainStreet series
DTUs and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs for transmission through a DDS
network. DDS Access is also used when the volume of DS0-B or MJU traffic (or
both) is less than the processing capacity of one DSP card (DDS Core is best
suited for
higher-volume DDS traffic).

DDS Access runs on DNICs equipped with a DPM2, or on a pair of DSP

resources residing on a DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Figure 2-25 and Table 2-3). The
propagation delay through an SRM running DDS Access is only 1.5 ms,
independent of data rate.

DDS Access DS0-A functionality includes:

• majority vote error correction on all incoming 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-
A signals
• BCH error correction on incoming 19.2 kb/s DS0-A formatted connections
• latching loopbacks as described in Bellcore TA-TSY-000077 and
alternating loopbacks (see Figure 2-16)
• support for all DDS maintenance codes
• transmission of CMI when the attached HCM/transparent device is idle
(RTS low)
• optional continuity checking using the secondary channel
• optional end-to-end RTS-to-DCD control lead propagation for DTU and
DCC data interfaces; DCC and DTU interfaces also allow control leads to
be forced high or low

DDS Access DS0-Bfunctionality includes all of the DS0-A features noted above,
as well as:

• 19.2 kb/s DS0-B

• Bellcore TA-TSY-000189 compliance (DS0-B framing algorithm and
reframe performance)
• transparent upstream and downstream control code transmission (except
when configured as the terminating DDS device, in which case,
alternating loopbacks are supported)
• UMC and DS0 OOS support

48
 2. Applications

DDS Access MJU functionality includes all of the DS0-A features listed above
as well as:

• antistreaming
• 19.2 kb/s MJU
• Bellcore TA-TSY-000192 Issue 2 MJU compliance for primary channel
• hub ID report as TR-TSY-000476
• latching HL96 and DS0 DP loopbacks processed as an OCU loopback
for directly connected HCM/transparent branch channels (otherwise,
control codes are passed transparently)
• maintenance code support for Branch Select Branch Block/Unblock
MJU loopback MJU antistreaming Global Release (unblock all)

DDS Core
The DDS Core application is an optimized version of DDS Access. DDS Core
supports a fourfold increase in DS0-B and MJU traffic (twelve 9.6 kb/s DS0-B
SRMs for each DSP card versus three for DDSAccess) and lower SRM
propagation delays (only 0.625 ms versus 1.5 ms for DDS Access). DDS Core is
intended for high-volume DS0-B and MJU requirements at hub locations. It
supports DS0-A and DS0-B channels originating from OCU-DP channel units,
the DDS network, and DTU/DCC circuits formatted using DDS Access (see
Figure 2-17).

The DDS Core application uses an entire DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Table 2-3).

DDS SRM enhancements

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system offers several enhancements to DDS. These
enhancements include:

• the use of 2700 MainStreet series DTUs

• secondary channel continuity checking
• SRS

Secondary channel continuity checking is a proprietary continuity checking

algorithm supported by DDS Access SRMs using the secondary channel
(DDS Core DS0-B SRMs pass secondary channel data transparently). For data
paths that span several nodes, endpoint devices detect faults on intermediate
links, even though a Red Alarm has not been raised on the link to which they are
directly connected.

Continuity checking can also be used to detect faults on individual DS0-B

subchannels (that is, subchannels that are carried partially by links other than the
one carrying the DS0-B aggregate).

49
Product overview

The error threshold is 20%. The time to declare continuity gained from startup
varies from 657 msfor 2.4 kb/s channels to 33 ms for 56 kb/schannels. When a
fault occurs, the time to declare loss of continuity varies from 15 ms for 2.4 kb/s
channels to 0.8 ms for 56 kb/s channels.

Figure 2-18 shows a number of paths for which continuity checking (labeled CC
in the figure) can be applied. The first path is between two DDS Access DS0-
BSRMs (labeled DS0-B II in the figure). The remaining paths pass continuity
checking information transparently through these two SRMs, which can be either
DDS Access or DDS Core SRMs as specified in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-18: Secondary channel continuity testing

-1-

Terminating SRM DS0-B II DS0-B II Terminating SRM

DCCDS0-A -2- DS0-ADCC

(a) DTU DTU (a)

DTU DTU -3- DS0-BDTU DTU
(b) DS0-B (b)
(c) (c)

DCC
DCC
DTU DTU MJU -4- DS0-ADTU
Master channel
Slave

CC
on path DSP Application:
Terminating SRM DS0-B II SRM

1 Any DDS device

2 DDS Access (CC enabled)
3 DDS Access (CC enabled)
4 DDS Access (CC enabled)
DDS Access (CC enabled)
DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
DDS Access (CC enabled or disabled) or DDS Core
DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
6075

DDS subrate switching

DDS subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the subrate
switching application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate
switching for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate channels as well as drop and
insertion of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A channels (see “Subrate switching”
in this chapter for a complete description of the application).

50
 2. Applications

ITU-T X.50 X.50 is a subrate data multiplexing scheme used in E1 environments. It specifies
techniques for rate adaption and subrate multiplexing of 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 48 kb/s synchronous data channels.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system X.50 implementation complies with:

• ITU-T X.50 Division 2 and Division 3 envelope structure

• ITU-T X.54 channel allocation
• ITU-T X.51 bis transmission format for 48 kb/s channels

Support is also provided for 19.2 kb/s channel speeds (point-to-point), A-bit
operation, control lead propagation, bit-aligned framing, multidrop data bridging,
and subrate switching.

Table 2-2 describes the X.50 DSP applications supported on the 3600/3600+
MainStreet system.

Table 2-2: X.50 DSP applications

Application X.50 Telco Basic X.50

Division 2 Division 3 Division 3
Framing pattern 80 frame pattern: five phases of 16 20 frame pattern: five phases of 20 frame pattern: five phases of
frames each four frames each four frames each
Subrate channels • for each phase (1): 1 • for each phase (2): 1 • for each phase (2): 1
supported
x 9.6 kb/s x 9.6 kb/s x 9.6 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s
8 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s
16 x 0.6 kb/s • two phases: 1 • two phases: 1
• two phases: 1 x 19.2 kb/s x 19.2 kb/s
x 19.2 kb/s • all five phases: • all five phases:
• all five phases: 1 x 48 kb/s 1 x 48 kb/s
1 x 48 kb/s

51
Product overview

Application X.50 Telco Basic X.50

Division 2 Division 3 Division 3

SRM inputs (3) 6 6 12

A-bit support  (4)  (4) –

Control lead –  –
propagation
Bit-aligned framing   –

MDDB (5)   

SRS –  

Notes
1. 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s channels occupy exactly 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s of bandwidth, respectively.
2. Each 1.2 kb/s channel connected to an X.50 or X.50 Telco Division 3 SRM is rate adapted by the X.50 application into 2.4 kb/s worth of
bandwidth for transport across the network (each 1.2 kb/s channel is made up of 3 data bits repeated as aabbcc to occupy 6 bits of bandwidth).
3. One input for each X.50 SRM can be an X.50 DS0 aggregate.
4. When the X.50 Telco SRM loses synchronization with the incoming signal, it sets the A-bit in the transmit direction. The
3600/3600+ MainStreet system does not raise an alarm.
5. Only MDDBs with channel speeds below 19.2 kb/s are supported.

Both the X.50 and X.50 Telco applications use all DSP resources on DPM2s or
all pairs of DSP resources on DSP2 or DSP3 cards. Propagation delay through
an X.50 or X.50 Telco SRM is 1.5 ms independent of data rate.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can access X.50 network services over E1 and 64
kb/s Codirectional (G.703) links. DTE access is provided by applying the X.50 or
X.50 Telco DSP application to the HCM/transparent output of DTUs and DCCs
(see Figure 2-19).

Using 2700 MainStreet series DTUs and 2B1Q cards or 2B1Q channel units,
PTTs can provide flexible network access services over existing 2-wire facilities.
The NMTI and the Alcatel 5620 NM can be used to direct loopbacks on
individual X.50 SRM tributaries and other points in the network.

52
 2. Applications

Figure 2-19: X.50 access and loopback

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

2600 and 2700
MainStreet series DTUs
DTE
2B+D B channel
B channel X.50/
2B1Q/ DNIC UpstreamX.50
X.50 Telco SRMdevicesnetwork
2-wire twisted pair loop
DTE
E1 timeslot
64 kb/s Codirectional Loopback Loopback • SRS
DTE
DCC (individual X.50/X.50 Telco SRMs
tributaries)
Loopback Loopback

Loopback Loopback
11250

The X.50 aggregate DS0 is divided into five phases as shown in Figure 2-
20.
Depending on the type of X.50 application applied, each phase can be individually
configured to accommodate the subrate channels listed in Table 2-2.

Figure 2-20: The X.50 framing structure

MSB
8- bit DS0 LSB

X.50 framing End-to-end control

and A-bit User data lead propagation
(one for each (X.50 Telco only)
superframe)
Data channels for each phase
X.50 TelcoX.50
1 Phase 1
2 DIV 2 DIV 3 DIV 3
Phase 2 1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s
3 Phase 3 2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s
E1

4 Phase 4 4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s

8 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s
5 Phase 5 16 x 0.6 kb/s
2 phases can accommodate 1 x 19.2 kb/s
All 5 phases can accommodate 1 x 48 kb/s
7563

53
Product overview

X.50 SRM enhancements

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager offers several
enhancements to X.50. These enhancements include:

• control lead propagation

• bit-aligned framing
• multidrop data bridging
• SRS

The X.50 Telco Division 3 application provides C-to-I lead propagation for X.21
data interfaces and RTS and DCD lead propagation for RS-232 and V.35 data
interfaces when data interface control leads are configured for end-to-end
operation.

The X.50 Telco application supports bit-aligned framing. This means that an
X.50 data stream need not be received from the network in the byte-aligned
order in which it was transmitted. The X.50 Telco application can extract
framing from a data stream that has been skewed (shifted) during transmission.

Multidrop data bridging allows several data devices to communicate with a host
processor using the same bandwidth within an X.50 aggregate (see “Multidrop data
bridging” in this chapter for a complete description of the application).

X.50 subrate switching

For X.50 and X.50 Telco Division 3, subrate switching is performed by the
DSP4 card SRS application. It provides flexible subrate switching of 2.4, 4.8,
9.6, and 19.2 kb/s aggregate channels, and drop and insertion of X.50 data
channels (see “Subrate switching” in this chapter for a complete description of
the SRS application).

As shown in Figure 2-21, for X.50 Telco Division 2, back-to-back SRMs can be
configured to provide switching of subrate channels. For clarity, the X.50
five-phase framing structure is shown beside each of the four aggregate
channels, and each subrate channel has been assigned a number (which does not
relate to subframe position). For example, the 1.2 kb/s channel (4) is subrate-
switched between the X.50 aggregate shown in the upper left and the X.50
aggregate frame shown in the lower left.

54
 2. Applications

Figure 2-21: X.50 Telco Division 2 back-to-back SRMs

X.50 aggregate DS0

X.50 aggregate DS0
9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s
1 1
2 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 2
3 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 3
4 11 12 1.2 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 6
1.2 kb/s 11 14

1
2
3
SRM 11
SRM
6
14
12

46 14

SRM SRM SRM

5
7

8
9
SRM10
13
15
X.50 aggregate DS0 X.50 aggregate DS0
4.8 kb/s 2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
5
9.6 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 5
6
9.6 kb/s 1.2 kb/s 12 15
13
2.4 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 13
7 8 9 10
4 14 15 1.2 kb/s
7585

High Capacity
Multiplexing – 98% HCM is a proprietary rate adaption and subrate multiplexing scheme that
bandwidth provides a bandwidth granularity of 800 b/s throughout the network. This
efficiency scheme dramatically improves the efficiency of today's networks, which are
based on
56 and 64 kb/s channel connections. Using HCM, more than 98% bandwidth
utilization can be achieved on aggregate links, while still respecting standard
carrier DS0 channel boundaries.

HCM applications and the resources that provide them include:

• rate adaption, using a customized rate adaption gate array located on all
DCCs and DTUs
• multidrop data bridging, using SRMs (located on various cards and
modules, as noted in Table 2-3)
• subrate multiplexing, using SRMs (located on various cards and modules,
as noted in Table 2-3)
• subrate switching, using the subrate switching application on DSP4 cards
55
Product overview

Table 2-3: Location and quantity of SRMs

Card or module DCC (1) DPM1 (2) DPM2 (2) DSP (3) DSP2 (3) or
DSP3 (3)

Number of DSP resources (4) 1 2 2 2 or 6 2 or 6

(5)
DDS Access
Tributary channels (m) – – 6 – 6
Aggregate channels (n) – – 6 – 6

DDS Core (6) (7)

Tributary channels (m) – – 12 – 12
Aggregate channels (n) – – 12 – 12

X.50 (5) (8)

Tributary channels (m) – – 12 – 12
Aggregate channels (n) – – 12 – 12
(5)
X.50 Telco
Tributary channels (m) – – 6 – 6
Aggregate channels (n) – – 6 – 6

HCM/transparent (7) (9)

Tributary channels (m) 6 12 12 10 10
Aggregate channels (n) 3 4 4 4 4

Notes
1. Includes RS-232/V.24 DCC, V.35 DCC, and X.21 DCC. SRM tributary channels service on-card ports.
2. 2B1Q and DNIC line cards provide 23 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card connections do
not use a backplane DS0 channel (for example, connections between DNIC or 2B1Q ports and the card's DPM, or connections between
SRMs located on the same DPM; this is also true for DSP cards).
3. DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards provide 26 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card connections
do not use a backplane DS0 channel.
4. Only one composite input can be connected to an SRM. Cascaded SRMs are considered as a single SRM. Connecting a second composite
input disconnects the first.
5. This application uses a pair of DSP resources (m and n for each DSP resource pair).
6. DDS Core is a single DSP resource application but the entire DSP2 or DSP3 card must be configured. A DSP2 or DSP3 card provides
support for up to 12 DS0-B or MJU SRMs and 60 tributary channels. The system backplane supports 26 and 48 DS0s for single and double
bandwidth UCSs respectively (on-card connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel).
7. This application uses a single DSP resource (m and n for each single DSP resource).
8. This category also applies to the DDS application.
9. DSP2 and DSP3 cards support a maximum of 50 aggregate and branch channels.

HCM provides additional functionality, such as:

• independent (pass-through) clocking

• end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control leads
• subrate multiplexing of HCM data with 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels

HCM can be used with aggregate timeslots which provide transport bandwidths
of 64, 56, 48 . . . 8 kb/s. HCM divides this n  8 kb/s frame into 800 b/s
bandwidth elements (for example, a 64 kb/s HCM frame consists of eighty 800
b/s elements, and a 56 kb/s HCM frame consists of seventy 800 b/s elements).

56
 2. Applications

The Alcatel 5620 NM and the NMTI display an HCM frame as a 10 row by 8
column matrix, as shown in Figure 2-22. The rows are named Frame 0 to Frame
9 (F0-F9) and the columns are named Bit 7 to Bit 0 (B7-B0). An element is
identified by its row and column, for example, F2-B2.

When an HCM channel is connected to a DS0 on an aggregate link, one row is

sent every aggregate frame. Because the HCM frame pattern is independent of
the aggregate framing pattern, the start of the HCM frame is flagged by a
framing bit, indicated by an F (found in position F0-B7 in Figure 2-22). Each
tributary circuit has an optional signaling bit (indicated by an S). This bit is
required for each subrate data channel using control lead propagation or
independent clocking (or both).

Bandwidth allocated to a circuit within an HCM frame is represented by HCM

elements containing a D (for data), where each D represents 800 b/s of bandwidth.

Figure 2-22 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel with end-to-end signaling or
independent clocking, or both (9600 b/s plus 800 b/s).

Figure 2-22: A 64 kb/s HCM frame with eighty 800 b/s elements

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F0 F S D D D D D D
F1 D D D D D D - -
F2 - - - - - - - -
F3 - - - - - - - -
F4 - - - - - - - -
F5 - - - - - - - - 10 rows
F6 - - - - - - - -
F7 - - - - - - - -
F8 - - - - - - - -
F9 - - - - - - - -

8 columns (64 kb/s)

5969

Any combination of data rates can be used to fill an HCM frame: synchronous
and asynchronous, and 8 kb/s and 16 kb/s HCV channels. Awide range of
synchronous and asynchronous data rates are supported. Any element in the
HCM frame that does not contain an F, S, or D represents unused bandwidth.

HCM frames can also be reduced by 8 kb/s increments (that is, by 10 HCM
elements) to allow both HCM and transparent (I.460) data to occupy the same
aggregate DS0. This is useful when 8 or 16 kb/s CPSS channels are multiplexed
together with HCM data. Figure 2-23 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel and a 16 kb/s
CPSS channel multiplexed with it. Transparent data can be positioned before or
after the HCM framing bit position.

The ability to reduce the HCM frame bandwidth in 8-kb/s increments also
permits use of 48 and 56 kb/s transmission services. Transparent (I.460)
channels can be configured before or after the framing (F) bit.

57
Product overview

Figure 2-23: A combined 48 kb/s HCM and 16 kb/s transparent frame

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F0 F S D D D D T T
F1 D D D D D D T T
F2 D D - - - - T T
F3 - - - - - - T T
F4 - - - - - - T T
F5 - - - - - - T T 10 rows
F6 - - - - - - T T
F7 - - - - - - T T
F8 - - - - - - T T
F9 - - - - - - T T

6 columns (48 kb/s) HCM 16 kb/s transparent

5970

The HCM S-bit provides end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control
signals (control leads can also be forced high or low).

Independent (pass-through) clocking

The S-bit can also be configured to provide independent clockingwhen a
particular data circuit's timing cannot be locked to the MainStreet network. This
typically occurs when a data circuit between a host computer and a cluster
controller is transported by two transmission providers, and each provider’s
network uses a different clock. The HCM S-bit allows synchronous isochronous
communications with only 800 b/s of overhead (see Figure 2-24).

Figure 2-24: 9.6 kb/s synchronous isochronous communications with 800 b/s overhead

9.6 kb/s HCM + 800 b/s S bit 9.6 kb/s DDS

Transmission
service Transmission
provider service
A provider
B

Network Network
DSU DSU
Host 3600/3600 A 3600/3600 B Cluster
+ gives clock + gives clock controller
MainStreet to each MainStreet to each
node MainStreet node Port DSU
Port
configured for node configured for
independent independent
clocking clocking
11231

58
 2. Applications

Optional multidrop data bridging

Multidrop data bridging allows several data devices to communicate with a
host processor using the same HCM bandwidth (see “Multidrop data bridging”
for a complete description of the application).

HCM subrate switching

HCM subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS
application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for
data channels within an HCM frame, as well as drop and insertion of individual
HCM data channels.

Transparent (I.460) rate

adaption – 100% The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides rate
bandwidth efficiency adaption, multidrop data bridging, subrate multiplexing, and subrate switching
for synchronous, n  8 kb/s transparent/I.460 data channels. Transparent
aggregate channels support transport bandwidths of 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56,
and 64 kb/s.

Transparent data channels carry data, signaling, and framing information

through the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system without adding any system
overhead. For example, 8 kb/s and 16 kb/s CPSS circuits can be carried through
the network using the transparent data format.

As with HCM rate adaption, transparent rate adaption is applied by a customized

rate adaption gate array integral to DTUs and DCCs. SRMs are used to perform
subrate multiplexing and multidrop data bridging. Both HCM and transparent
data can be processed by the same SRM and transported in the same aggregate
DS0 (see Figure 2-23). An HCM/transparent SRM can accommodate one
terminating CPSS channel at either 4 kb/s (HCM format) or n  8 kb/s
(transparent format). Any number of nonterminating n  8 kb/s CPSS channels
can be transported as normal data.

Multidrop data bridging allows several data devices to communicate with a host
processor using the same bandwidth (see “Multidrop data bridging” for a
complete description of the application).

Transparent subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS

application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for
transparent data channels within transparent or mixed HCM or transparent
frames. Drop and insertion of individual data channels is also supported.

59
Product overview

Fully software-
configurable The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses versatile DSP
SRMs technology to provide fully user-programmable SRM functionality. DSP cards are
available with two or six DSP resources. The DPM has two DSP resources. Some
SRM applications use a single DSP resource to provide several SRMs. Other SRM
applications require that DSP resources be configured in pairs (that is, two DSP
resources combined to provide several SRMs).

The type of DSP card or module and the SRM application determine the number
of SRMs provided by a given DSP resource or resource pair, and the number of
tributary and branch channels it supports. Figure 2-25 shows a DSP resource or
resource pair configured to provide SRM functionality. Table 2-3 lists the number
of SRMs supported.

Figure 2-25: A DSP resource configured for SRM operation

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Voice card or channel

DSP4
unitcard with
DSP3 card Primary rate card
Fax module

Device 2
Device 1 Network
SRM

Device 2 Device 1 HCM frame on SRM

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F F0F0 F F0 F1 F2 F3F F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
Device 1
F1F1
F2F2
F3F3 Device 2
F4F4
F5F5 Other HCM connections
F6F6
F7F7
F8F8
F9F9

Reserved
Transport position = F0-B5Transport position = F0-B5 Transport bandwidth for transparent
= 48 kb/sTransport bandwidth = 48 kb/s Data position
Data bandwidth = 9.6 kb/sData bandwidth = 8 kb/s

11244

60
 2. Applications

Subrate switching Subrate switching is a DSP4 card application. It is a resource-efficient

application ideally suited for the grooming of subrate voice and data circuits
prior to their transmission over the backbone network (for example, when a
3600 + MainStreet system is configured as a hub to multiple feeder nodes whose
aggregate DS0s are underutilized).

The SRS application performs:

• space switching (for example, a specific channel can be switched between

two aggregate DS0s)
• time switching (for example, a switched channel can occupy a
different position or phase within each aggregate DS0)
• drop or insert of individual channels

The SRS application runs on the entire DSP4 card and provides 48 DS0 ports on
each card (30 in single bandwidth UCSs). The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
supports a total of 12 DSP4 cards performing subrate switching and up to 6 cards
in each shelf. Concurrent DDS, X.50 Division 3, HCM, and transparent
switching is supported on the same card, with switching between like data
formats (that is, DDS to DDS,
X.50 Division 3 to X.50 Division 3, HCM to HCM, and transparent to transparent).

The Alcatel 5620 NM is specifically programmed to control the SRS

application. Using its advanced GUI, the Alcatel 5620 NM creates SRLs
between SRS applications, SRMs, and aggregate timeslots throughout the
network. The Alcatel 5620 NM uses SRLs to automatically route and reroute
(under fault conditions) end-to-end subrate data paths.

The Alcatel 5620 NM supports noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elementsbetween

HCM SRLs and SRSs. The criteria that determines whether a subrate channel can
be transported by a particular aggregate DS0 is the aggregate's total unused
bandwidth, not the amount of contiguous bandwidth. This feature fully exploits
HCM's 800 b/s bandwidth granularity and greatly increases rerouting options
during network fault recovery.

DDS subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate
channels, as well as drop and insertion of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A data
channels. DS0-A channels experience a delay of 2.5 ms. DS0-B channels
experience these typical and worst-case delays:

• 2.4 kb/s DS0-B: 5 ms and 7.5 ms

• 4.8 kb/s DS0-B: 3.75 ms and 5 ms
• 9.6 kb/s DS0-B: 3.125 ms and 3.75 ms

61
Product overview

Figure 2-26 shows subrate switching of DS0-A and DS0-B channels from a
remote channel bank (A), a remote 3600/3600+ MainStreet system (also running
SRS) at (B), a collection of local terminations including an OCU-DP channel
unit (C) and two 2600 MainStreet series DTUs or 2700 MainStreet series DTUs
(D), and the DDS network (E). Some of the channels switched include:

• one 9.6 kb/s DS0-A channel (1) switched between (A) and (B)
• two 4.8 kb/s channels (2) and (3) within a 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (B) switched to a
4.8 kb/s DS0-B at (E)
• one 19.2 kb/s DTU channel (6) switched to 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (E)

Figure 2-26: DDS subrate switching capabilities

A 3624 MainStreet
Channel Bank E
1 9.6 kb/s DS0-A
DDS network
3600/3600+ MainStreet
9.6 DS0-B node

2 4.8 kb/s 2 3
SRS
3 4.8 kb/s (DSP4)
T
4 9.6 kb/s
1 T 5
7
4.8 kb/s 9
DS0-B
T

SRS T1 9.6 kb/s

O
C DS0-B 6
B 3600/3600+
MainStreet 2B1 6
node via DDS 4
Access
9.6 kb/s DS0-B
SRM 8
C DSU/CSU DT D DT
5 4.8 kb/s Port (a): 6 19.2 kb/s 8 9.6 kb/s
Port (b): 7 2.4 kb/s 9 4.8 kb/s
11232

X.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 subrate switching

Full switching flexibility (including drop and insert) is provided for 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 19.2 kb/sX.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 data channels (X.50 Telco Division 2
does not support the SRS application). The typical delay through the application
is 5 ms; the worst-case delay is 7.5 ms.

Figure 2-27 shows subrate switching of X.50 Division 3 formatted channels

from a third-party device (A), a remote 3600 + MainStreet system (also
running
SRS) at (B), two 2600 MainStreet series DTUs or 2700 MainStreet series DTUs at
(C), and the X.50 network (D). Some of the channels switched include:

• one 9.6 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (D)
62
 2. Applications
• one 4.8 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
• one 2.4 kb/s channel (12) switched between (C) and (D)

63
Product overview

Figure 2-27: X.50 Division 3 subrate switching capabilities

X.50 aggregate A D
9.6 kb/s 3rd party equipment
1 X.50 network
9.6 kb/s
2
9.6 kb/s
3
3600/3600+ MainStreet node
64 kb/s Codirectional X.50 aggregate
9.6 kb/s 1
X.50 aggregate
9.6 kb/s 2
4.8 kb/s 4 5 SRS (DSP4)
E1 9.6 kb/s 3
9.6 kb/s 6 9.6 kb/s
6
4.8 kb/s
11 14
2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
E1 X.50 aggregate
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s 7 8 9 10
2B1Q/ DNIC
4 5
SRS E1 2.4 kb/s 12
via X.50 or 9.6 kb/s 13
X.50 Telco SRM
B 3600/3600+
MainStreet node
DTU C DTU
Port (a): 11 4.8 kb/s 13 9.6 kb/s
Port (b): 12 2.4 kb/s 14 4.8 kb/s
11233

HCM subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for all HCM data channels, including drop
and insert and use of noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elements. The typical delay
through the application is 3.75 ms; the worst-case delay is 5 ms.

A special CPSS capability enables the SRS application to extract 4 kb/s HCM
CPSS channels from HCM aggregate channels. These channels can be dropped
or inserted directly to or from 4 kb/s CPSS ports on the Control and DCP cards.

Figure 2-28 shows subrate switching of HCM formatted channels between

3612 MainStreet feeder multiplexers at (A) and (B) and 3600/3600+ MainStreet
nodes at
(C) and (D). Some of the channels switched include:

• one 19.2 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (C)
• one 4.8 kb/s channel (2) switched between (A) and (D)
• one 19.2 kb/s channel (3) switched between (B) and (C)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (5) switched between (C) and (D) using noncontiguous
bandwidth at (C)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (6) switched between (C) and (D)
• two 4 kb/s CPSS channels extracted from (A) and (B)

64
 2. Applications

Figure 2-28: HCM subrate switching capabilities

56 kb/s HCM frame

F 4 kb/s CPSS 48 kb/s HCM frame
F
1 3600/3600+ MainStreet 5
node
2 6
DCP card / SCC3 card 4
kb/s CPSS ports 4

CPSS
3612 (A)
CPSS
3612 (B) 2

SRS
(DSP4) I/F SRS
3612 3600/3600+
A MainStreet I I D MainStreet
node node

56 kb/s HCM frame

F 4 kb/s CPSS I I
64 kb/s HCM frame
F
3
1
Subrate
link
4
5a
I/F 3
SRS
3612
MainStreet 6
node 3600/3600
5b
B +
MainStreet
node
C 11234

Transparent subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for transparent data channels including
n  8 kb/s (I.460) data channels, 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels, and n  8 kb/s
CPSS channels. The delay of transparent data through the SRS application with a
DSP card is 2.5 ms.

Multidrop data bridging Multidrop data bridging, which is a subrate data application, allows a master
host processor to communicate with two or more slave devices using the same
transport bandwidth (see Figure 2-29). As with DDS MJUs, multidrop data
bridges operate on digital data. By contrast, PCM bridges operate on modem
outputs, which are the PCM representation of voice band data. All SRMs
configured for HCM, transparent, or X.50/X.50 Telco (Divisions 2 and 3)
support multidrop data bridging.

65
Product overview

Figure 2-29: Multidrop data bridging

SRMs map all slave circuit data

into the same phase (X.50) or
element (HCM/transparent)
Polling information broadcasted to slaves
Slave

SRM Slave
Master
SRM SRM Slave
Slave

Tributary Slave responses Tributary

not involved (user application must ensure not involved
in MDDB only one slave transmits at any in MDDB
one time)
7568

Digital multidrop data bridging

The data for all circuits involved in a multidrop data bridge must use the same rate
adaption technique and must occupy the same elements (HCM or transparent) or
phase positions (X.50, X.50 Telco Divisions 2 and 3).

The master device sends out polling messages and receives data from slave
devices in these elements or phase positions. The host communication protocol
must ensure that only one slave transmits information at any time (for example,
SNA/SDLC).

Large multidrop data bridging applications can be configured by cascading

SRMs. Cascaded SRMs may be collocated or situated throughout the network on
remote nodes. Any aggregate DS0 bandwidth not used by the multidrop bridging
can be used for normal subrate multiplexing.

PCM multidrop data bridging

PCM multidrop data bridging is a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system DSP
application that provides multipoint data bridging for analog, VF data circuits.
For example, the multiplexer can bridge multipoint modem circuits between a
master host processor and two or more slave devices.

Figure 2-30 shows a typical application with a host processor as the master
device and cluster controllers or intelligent data terminals as slaves.

The master polls the slaves by broadcasting polling information to all of them.
The addressed slave responds to the host with the requested information. Each
slave may only communicate with the host and not with other slaves. The
communications protocol, such as SNA/SDLC, Pole Response or Bisync, must
ensure that only one slave communicates at any one time. The PCM bridge is
responsible for identifying the active slave channel and for switching the slave
data to the host.

66
 2. Applications

Figure 2-30: PCM bridging (digital multipoint)

Slave responses
(user application must ensure
only one slave transmits at
any one time) Polling information
broadcasted to slaves

DSP resource 64 kb/s

configured for PCM E& In-house
PCM bridging T T1 M copper
voic

3624 MainStreet
Channel Bank
E
Host
processor Outside plant
copper
4W
TO
chann

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

4-wire modems
used throughout
11251

The PCM bridging application provides the following

features:

• bridging on DSP cards

The PCM bridging application runs on a single DSP resource located on any
DSP card. One or two bridges can be configured for each DSP resource; up
to 10 slave channels are used for one bridge, and up to 10 slave channels are
shared between two bridges. DSP cards installed in single bandwidth UCSs
support 26 backplane DS0 channels, while double bandwidth UCSs support
48 (on-card connections between bridges do not use backplane channels).
• antistreaming
PCM bridging will automatically remove a slave channel from the bridge if
the end device using the channel fails to return to an idle state upon
completion of its host messaging. The disconnect threshold can be set for
each slave channel; the range is from 1 to 255 seconds, in 1-second
intervals.
• dynamic connections
Individual slave channels can be dynamically connected to and
disconnected from active bridges.
• multipoint configurations
The master channel from one bridge can be connected as a slave on another
to form large, noncollocated and/or physically diverse multipoint
configurations.
• RAPID protection
The PCM bridge master (composite) channel can be protected with RAPID.

67
Product overview

• support for high-speed data and low-speed control channels

Data rates supported by PCM bridging are dependent on the modems’ voice
frequency data modulation (that is, if two modems can communicate over
the MainStreet network in a point-to-point configuration, they will also
communicate in a PCM bridge configuration). The PCM bridge identifies
and transmits the PCM representation of the two loudest slave channels’ VF
signals. This supports applications that use both a high-speed data channel
and a low-speed control channel.
• low processing delay
The processing delay through the PCM bridge is 1.0 ms.
• support for 4-wire modems
Four-wire modems are supported with any combination of E&M and 4WTO
interfaces.

Inverse The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports two inverse multiplexing

multiplexing applications: inverse multiplexing over ATM, and BONDING-based inverse
multiplexing.

Inverse multiplexing over

ATM
Inverse multiplexing over ATM, which is supported on an IMA module
installed on an ATM Services card, distributes an aggregate ATM cell stream
onto an IMA link, which is composed of one or more E1 or T1 links. Cells on
these circuits are passed via the IMA link to the far end through an ATM
network. At the far end, round-robin schedulers on the IMA module control the
collection and distribution of cells on the active circuits in the IMA link, and
recombine them to form the original aggregate ATM cell stream. The IMA
module is compliant with ATM Forum standard AF-PHY-00086.

Figure 2-31 illustrates the inverse multiplexing process over ATM.

Figure 2-31: Inverse multiplexing over ATM

Transmit direction IMA link (multiple physical Receive direction

links)

Aggregate IMA ATM network IMA Aggregate

module module

Receive direction Transmit direction

10112

68
 2. Applications

BONDING-based inverse
multiplexing
BONDING-based inverse multiplexing, which is supported on the IMC,
breaks down an n  56 kb/s or n  64 kb/s super-rate circuit into individual 56
kb/s or 64 kb/s circuits, passes these individual circuits through a network with
variable transit delay paths, and recombines them at the far end to form the
original super-rate circuit.

Figure 2-32 shows how a data stream may become delayed as it is inversely
multiplexed and then sent over channels with varying delays.

Figure 2-32: Data transmission without BONDING-based inverse multiplexing

A 64 kb/s ?
network

BC ? ?

A Channel A Channel
Channel B Channel
B Channel C Channel
C
661

Figure 2-33 shows how the same data stream is handled by the IMC. Based on
the BONDING specification for delay equalization, inverse multiplexing
compensates for the differential delays among the individual data streams,
allowing the data passing over the super-rate circuit to remain intact.

Figure 2-33: Data transmission with BONDING-based inverse multiplexing

ABC BONDING 64 BONDING ABC

kb/s
n x 64 kb/s netwo n x 64 kb/s

A Channel A Channel
B Channel B Channel
C Channel C Channel
6616

69
Product overview

Typically, inverse multiplexing is used when the underlying network cannot

assure the end-to-end sequence integrity of super-rate data passing through it, or
when insufficient bandwidth is available to transport the circuit on any one
aggregate link (which would normally result in the circuit being passed over
multiple and often diversely routed links). Inverse multiplexing equalizes the
delays of data streams and maintains data integrity.

Figure 2-34 shows a typical leased application in which two communicating data
devices (in 3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3) do not have enough
bandwidth for direct connection. The network manager uses the available three
64 kb/s timeslots between 3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 and three
timeslots between
3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #2, as well as the three timeslots
between 3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes #2 and #3. Since the delay is
unpredictable, inverse
multiplexing resources on 3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 determine
and then equalize the delay.

Figure 2-34: Typical leased application

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

#1 with BONDING 3600/3600+ MainStreet node
#3 with BONDING

3 x 64 kb/s

Data device #2 Data device #1

(384 kb/s) (384 kb/s)
3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s

3600/3600+ MainStreet node #2

11243

70
 2. Applications

Super-rate The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides

data: up to super-rate network access and transport on the cards listed in Table 2-4.
1984 kb/s
Table 2-4: Supported super-rate speeds

Card Supported data rates n  (64, 56, 48 . . . 8 kb/s)

1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 24} (1)
2.048 Mb/s E1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 30} (2)
X.21 and V.35 aggregate n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 30} (3)
X.21 and V.35 DCC n = {1, 2, 4, 6 . . . 30}

RS-422 DCC (4) n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 62} for double bandwidth

FRE, X.25 FRE and PE (4) n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 62} for double bandwidth

FRS n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 31}

28LC line card (2-wire configuration) n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8}, or
n = {1, 2, 3, 4} (5)
28LC line card (4-wire configuration) n = {1, 2, 3, ... 32}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, or
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8 } (6)

Notes
1. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate channels
(including AT&T Publication 54019A IBR format).
2. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous, noncontiguous and equidistant super-rate
channels (including ITU-T G.735, G.737).
3. Timeslot 0 is partially used by the supervisory channel. User-defined aggregate timeslots usage
supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate channels.
4. The card can access up to 3968 kb/s (for double bandwidth). Any one circuit can be configured for up to
1984 kb/s.
5. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 4, 8, or 16 DS0s in 2-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.
6. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 8, 16, or 32 DS0s in 4-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.

The use of noncontiguous timeslots for super-rate circuits adds flexibility,

particularly when rerouting is required (for example, the alternate path can
consist of unused DS0 timeslots within a link). Contiguoussuper-rate channels
can also be cross-connected to noncontiguous super-rate channels between T1,
E1, and X.21 and V.35 aggregate links.

CAS and CCS E1 links also support equidistant super-rate channels around
TS16. For single E1 cards, the SAM provides this capability (if the channels
allocated to a super-rate circuit are confined to one side or the other of TS16, a
SAM is not needed).

71
Product overview

Voice applications The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides a wide range of voice
applications, including:

• voice compression: ADPCM (G.721), HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729

and G.729 Annex A), LD-CELP (G.728)
• voice over frame relay
• G3 fax relay
• V.32 bis modem relay
• super-tandem operation
• echo cancellation
• international aggregate signaling and companding conversion
• analog interface conversion
• voice conference bridging

Uncompressed PCM voice circuits require the full 64 kb/s bandwidth provided
by an aggregate’s timeslot. Voice compression reduces this bandwidth
requirement and maintains voice quality. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
supports the following voice compression algorithms:

• 32 kb/s ADPCM
• 32 kb/s ADPCM G3 fax, which is a modified ADPCM algorithm that
passes 9600 b/s G3 fax signals
• 16 kb/s HCV, which is a proprietary compression algorithm adapted from
the CELP coding that provides equivalent quality to 32 kb/s ADPCM with
reduced bandwidth requirements
• 8 kb/s HCV, which is a bandwidth-optimized version of 16 kb/s HCV
that provides exceptionally high quality
• 8 and 16 kb/s bulk HCV (supported on DSP5 and DSP5H cards), which
multiplexes two compressed voice circuits onto a single aggregate circuit
before transmission. Up to 20 compressed voice circuits can be
multiplexed onto the 10-circuit card
• HCVwith G3 fax (supported on the DSP4 and DSP5H cards), which
monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV or G3
fax. Voice channels can originate from an analog voice card or a digital
aggregate link
• HCV with G3 fax and V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards),
which monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV,
G3 fax, or V.32 bis modem relay
• CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729 Annex A) with V.32 bis modem relay
(supported on DSP5 cards), which monitors PCM voice channel content
and dynamically invokes 8 kb/s A-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis
modem relay

72
 2. Applications

• LD-CELP with V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards),

which monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes
16 kb/s LD-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis modem relay
• super-tandem operation (supported on the DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards),
which eliminates the voice degradation resulting from the compression and
decompression of tandem-switched calls

Table 2-5 summarizes the capabilities of ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-

CELP, G3 fax, V.32 bis modem relay, and super-tandem.

73
 Table 2-5: 3600/3600+ MainStreet system voice compression algorithms
7

Product
Digital voice Transport G3 fax V.32 Super- Signaling type (1) Voice DSP capacity (voice circuits for each card or
compression bandwidth (max modem tandem channels for module)
algorithm and format rate in relay each
kb/s) (max aggregate
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
T1 E1 T1 E1 DSP3 DSP4 DSP5 DSP5H VCM3 (2)
PCM 64 kb/s – – – RBS (Inband) CAS 24 30 – – – – –
TS24 (3) CCS 23 30

ADPCM 32 kb/s I.460 – – – M44 M55 44 55 – – – – 44/48 T1

(G.721) M48 (Inband) M60 (Inband) 48 60 55/60 E1
ADPCM 32 kb/s I.460 9.6 – – M44 M55 44 55 – – – – 44/48 T1
(G3 fax)
M48 (Inband) M60 (Inband) 48 60 55/60 E1
CS-A-CELP HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 10 – –
(G.729)
14.4, 15.2, or 9.6 7.2
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4

CS-A-CELP HCM: 8, 9.6,

10.4, 12.8,
4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 20 – –
(G.729A) 9.6 7.2
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4

HCV 8 kb/s 8 kb/s HCM – – – Inband Inband 192 240 6 – – – –

or I.460
HCV 16 kb/s 16 kb/s HCM – – – Inband Inband 96 120 6 – – – –
or I.460
 Digital voice Transport G3 fax V.32 Super- Signaling type (1) Voice DSP capacity (voice circuits for each card or
compression bandwidth (max modem tandem channels for module)
algorithm and format rate in relay each
kb/s) (max aggregate
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
T1 E1 T1 E1 DSP3 DSP4 DSP5 DSP5H VCM3 (2)
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6
or 16 kb/s
4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – 6 – – –
9.6
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 9.6 – ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – 6 – – –
I.460: 16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 20 – –
9.6 7.2
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – – 20 – –
I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6 7.2
14.4 9.6
12
14.4
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6,
10.4, 12.8,
4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – – 20 –
9.6
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – – – 20 –
I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6
LD-CELP HCM: 9.6, 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –
9.6 kb/s 10.4, 12,
9.6 7.2
12.8, 14.4,

2
15.2, or 14.4 9.6
16 kb/s 12
I.460: 16 kb/s 14.4

Applicatio
7
 Digital voice Transport G3 fax V.32 Super- Signaling type (1) Voice DSP capacity (voice circuits for each card or
7

Product
compression bandwidth (max modem tandem channels for module)
algorithm and format rate in relay each
kb/s) (max aggregate
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
T1 E1 T1 E1 DSP3 DSP4 DSP5 DSP5H VCM3 (2)
LD-CELP HCM: 12.8, 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –
12.8 kb/s 14.4, 15.2, or
9.6 7.2
16 kb/s
14.4 9.6
16 kb/s HCM
or I.460 12
14.4
LD-CELP HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –
16 kb/s
I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6 7.2
14.4 9.6
12
14.4

Notes
1. If not otherwise indicated, the signaling type supports out-of-band signaling.
2. This module is supported on Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards.
3. To support this signaling type, Dual T1 cards require a TSM, and Dual T1-2 cards require a DRM.
 2. Applications

ADPCM voice compression ADPCM voice compression is based on bundles of six DS0s which
accommodate 1 signaling and 11 voice channels. In T1 environments, the M44
and M48 signaling formats are supported, giving 44 and 48 voice channels
(respectively) and four delta signaling channels (for M44 only) in 24 DS0s. In
E1 environments, the M55 and M60 signaling formats are supported, giving 55
and 60 voice channels (respectively) and five delta signaling channels (for M55
only) in 30 DS0s.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports ADPCM (ITU-T G.721, AT&T

Publication 54070 and Bellcore TR-TSY-000120) and ADPCM G3 fax in both
Mu-law and
A-law companding environments.

ADPCM is provided by the VCM3 on Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s
E1 cards. The VCM3 functions as a full M48 or M60 ADPCM or ADPCM/G3
fax transcoder. Typical applications include satellite or terrestrial links between
PBXs or COs (or both) at different locations.

Up to 48 (T1) and 60 (E1) voice circuits, received at the Dual T1 or Dual E1 line
interfaces, can be compressed by the VCM3 and cross-connected to another
aggregate card. All 48 T1 channels can be compressed.

Unused DS0s within a bundle can be used by other voice and/or data circuits.
Uncompressed voice circuits that occupy one of these unused DS0s transmit
signaling information in the normal way, for example, RBSfor T1 and TS16 for E1.

HCV voice compression HCV is a proprietary algorithm that reduces the voice and signaling bandwidth
of a regular 64 kb/s voice call to 8 or 16 kb/s. The use of inband signaling
eliminates all signaling bandwidth overhead, and facilitates bandwidth
management flexibility by supporting subrate multiplexing with other HCV
circuits and HCM or transparent data.

The following list highlights the specifications and features supported by HCV.

• The compressed output is configurable for HCM or transparent subrate data

formats, and is fully supported in subrate multiplexing and subrate
switching applications involving other subrate data.
• The signaling and companding law is configurable for each endpoint,
including different settings at opposite ends of the same channel, for
example, in an international voice channel (see Figure 2-35).
• An intelligent slip handling mechanism minimizes speech distortion when
aggregate frame slips occur, and maintains channel synchronization at
channel bit error rates up to 10 -3 (by comparison, T1 and E1 aggregate links
declare a severely errored second at bit error rates of 10-5).
• HCV passes 10 and 20 pps dialling, DTMF tones and AC15 call
initiation tones.
• The end-to-end speech delay of approximately 60 ms is compensated by
the HCV integral 8 ms echo cancellation facility.

75
Product overview
• The end-to-end delay for signaling ABCD bits is 5.75 to 9.0 ms.

76
 2. Applications

Using the internationally accepted MOS test in which listeners rate speech
quality on a scale of 1 to 5, 16 kb/s HCV was ranked slightly better than 32 kb/s
ADPCM (4.28 for HCV, 4.26 for ADPCM) while 8 kb/s HCV was ranked as
near toll-quality with a score of 3.56.

In addition, HCV provides an optional 8 ms of echo cancellation to support tail

circuit lengths to approximately 1200 km (800 mi). The echo clipper can be used
to remove residual echoes when strong echoes are present.

HCV is performed using DSP3, DSP4, DSP5 and DSP5H cards. On the DSP3 and
DSP4 cards, each DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or 16 kb/s HCV (voice
information and signaling) on one PCM voice channel. On the DSP5 and DSP5H
cards, each DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or 16 kb/s HCV on two PCM voice
channels.

The compressed output format isconfigurable for HCM or I.460 (transparent) rate
adaption (8 or 16 kb/s based on compression ratio). A 9.6 kb/s HCM format is also
supported by the HCV with G3 fax application. PCM (uncompressed) voice
channels can originate from any voice interface or aggregate card.

As shown in Figure 2-35, the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system provides full HCV
support for international networks. Each endpoint HCV compressor can select the
signaling type from one of the signaling groups designated in the figure as A,
B or C. For example, LGS-LS and LGE-RE can be used at opposite ends of the
same HCV channel, and Mu-law or A-law companding can also be selected for
each end of the HCV channel. Direct cross-connections between the HCV
compressor’s PCM side and T1 or E1 links or analog voice ports are supported.
International voice support is extended to include G3 fax data using the HCV
with G3 fax application. A typical G3 faxapplication would have the PBXs
(shown in the figure) programmed to switch G3 fax traffic to trunks, which the
3600 + MainStreet multiplexer cross-connects to a DSP4 card.

77
Product overview

Figure 2-35: HCV support for international networks

London
Tokyo
A-law
Mu-law companding
companding E1 (CAS, R2D)
T1 (RBS) A) E&M-Type V, LGS-PLAR
A) E&M-Type V B) LGS/LGE-RE
C) LGS/LGE-EC
3600/3600
+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet MainStreet
node node

HCV
HCV
PBX T1
FT1 E1 PBX
V.35 PRI X.21 PRI

Digital
network
HCV
HCV
E1 T1
X.21 PRI FT1
V.35 PRI

3600/3600
+
3600/3600 MainStreet PBX
+ node
PBX
MainStreet
Mexico City node New York

Mu-law Mu-law
companding companding
T1 (RBS)
E1 (CAS using T1 AB bits) A) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V,
A) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V, V with filter, LGS PLAR V with filter, LGS PLAR
B) LGS/LGE LS B) LGS/LGE LS
C) LGS/LGE GS C) LGS/LGE GS

1125

CS-A-CELP voice
CS-A-CELP complies with ITU-T Recommendations G.729 and G.729 Annex
compression
A. CS-A-CELP compresses voice to 8 kb/s and provides a low, constant end-to-
end compression/decompression delay of 45 to 55 ms. CS-A-CELP provides a
higher-quality compressed voice signal than HCV.

The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP

(G.729) compressed voice, and 20 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP
(G.729A) compressed voice.

78
 2. Applications

LD-CELP voice
LD-CELP, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.728, compresses
compression
voice to 9.6, 12.8, or 16 kb/s, and provides a low, constant end-to-end
compression/ decompression delay of 10 to 12.5 ms. LD-CELP provides a
higher-quality compressed voice signal than HCV.

The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of LD-CELP compressed

voice.

Super-tandem operation Super-tandem operation provides improved voice quality, additional bandwidth
savings, and simplified network design with HCV and CS-A-CELP (G.729 and
G.729A) voice compression.

Super-tandem operation is recommended for use in large networks where

engineering many point-to-point paths is difficult and usually results in a network
configuration that consists primarily of multihop paths.

Typically, three to five links are assigned to a path. With standard voice
compression, the voice signal is compressed and decompressed at each link,
reducing voice quality. To offset this, the voice paths are engineered for higher
bandwidth, which counteracts the benefits of voice compression.

Furthermore, during the voice compression stage, an encoding and decoding delay
occurs. This delay accumulates at each tandem node in a multihop network.

With super-tandem operation, calls pass transparently through any digital-

connected PBX without loss of voice quality, because they are cross-connected
through the PBXas compressed voice circuits. By eliminating the need to
compress and decompress the voice signal each time the calls pass through a
PBX, voice quality remains high, regardless of how many hops are required to
route the calls.

In addition, super-tandem greatly simplifies network design. To minimize the

number of multihop calls in networks that use standard voice compression,
network designers must determine not only the estimated voice traffic between
adjacent PBX sites, but also the traffic between PBXs, whether they are or are
not adjacent.

Figure 2-36 showsa network configuration usingstandard voice compression.

This configuration is required to provide single compression and decompression
between any two PBXs. Additional trunks are required between PBX-A and
PBX-C, whether the traffic levels do or do not warrant the additional bandwidth.
This network configuration preserves voice quality, but is an expensive solution for
bandwidth usage.

79
Product overview

Figure 2-36: Standard voice compression network

A
B C
3600/3600+
MainStreet node 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet node MainStreet node

HCV trunks HCV trunks

PBX PBX PBX

Phone Phone Phone

11240

Figure 2-37 shows a network configuration using super-tandem. Using

super-tandem eliminates the need to determine voice traffic levels between all
PBXs and to install additional trunks. In addition to allowing for a simpler
network design, using super-tandem provides significant bandwidth savings.

Figure 2-37: Super-tandem network configuration

A
B C
3600/3600+
MainStreet node 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet node MainStreet node

Super-tandem trunks Super-tandem trunks

PBX PBX PBX

Phone Phone Phone

11241

80
 2. Applications

Voice over frame relay Voice over frame relay (VoFR) is a method of compressing voice calls and
transporting them over a frame relay network. The statistical multiplexing
capability of frame relay allows bandwidth to be shared between voice and data
virtual circuits, which improves bandwidth utilization. For example, a voice call
only uses bandwidth when a call is in progress, which means that other data
traffic or voice calls can occupy the bandwidth when a call is not being made.

The Alcatel implementation of VoFR focuses on transporting voice using

compression and circuit-switching techniques to deliver predictable and consistent
quality of voice, even at low bit rates. This is made possible by:

• adopting the Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement

(FRF.11), which ensures vendor interoperability for VoFR technology
• using advanced DSP technology
• providing enhancements to frame relay technology and standards that
guarantee quality of service for delay-sensitive packet traffic

The VoFR application uses the CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression algorithm
selected by the Frame Relay Forum for voice communications over frame relay.
The CS-A-CELP (G.729A) 8 kb/s voice compression is performed by the DSP5
card. Voice calls are compressed and packetized by the DSP5 card for transport
within the payload of a frame relay frame. Including the frame relay overhead, this
equates to approximately 9.6 kb/s for each voice channel.

Silence suppression
VoFR offers the potential for significant savings in bandwidth and cost. With the
Alcatel solution, further savings are achieved with silence suppression, a
technique that disables the transmission of voice frames when a caller is not
speaking. When CS-A-CELP is used in conjunction with silence suppression,
acceptable quality voice is delivered over frame relay at approximately 6 kb/s.

The Alcatel approach to VoFR takes advantage of the characteristics of voice to

increase bandwidth availability. Advanced voice processing techniques are used
to detect silent periods, and halt the transmission of packets during these silent
periods. The extra bandwidth saved from the silent period of one voice channel
can be used by another voice or data channel. This technique can improve
bandwidth utilization by 40% or more since conversations are half-duplex.
Silence suppression can be enabled or disabled for each channel, depending on
the bandwidth requirements of the network applications.

81
Product overview

To create a natural-sounding conversation, sample background noise is

transmitted to the far end, where it is played back for the listener. This is
particularly beneficial when the background noise level is high or variable, as the
listener perceives more natural-sounding speech.

Quality of service
To provide a measurable quality of service, it is essential to determine frame
transfer delay and frame loss ratios. With the use of these parameters, the Alcatel
5620 NM can specify and guarantee support for real-time voice traffic, without
significantly affecting data traffic that is not real-time.

Quality of service techniques used with the Alcatel VoFR solution address:

• end-to-end delay
• jitter control
• distortion and noise
• frame loss
• echo

As voice is transmitted over a frame relay network, frames encounter slight

delays across each link and through each switch. The end-to-end delay has an
impact on the perceived quality of speech. To provide the best possible speech
quality over a frame relay network, voice traffic must be given priority over data
passing through the same frame relay infrastructure. This is achieved by
transmitting the frames from queues with different priority levels, and servicing
the high-priority queue first.

The bursty nature and variable frame sizes of frame relay networks may result in
variable delays between consecutive packets. The time difference between each
arriving packet is known as jitter. Jitter occurs in packet networks when an
intermediate switch is already busy with a packet and another packet arrives.
The second packet is held in a buffer at the switch until transmission of the first
packet is complete. The resulting delay is dependent on the length of the first
packet.

If the jitter exceeds the buffering capacity of the receiving device, it can interfere
with the smooth regeneration of voice at the receiving end. A large gap in
regenerated voice packets results in distorted sound. Extreme jitter can cause
voice frames to be dropped. If a voice frame arrives too late, it may be discarded.

82
 2. Applications

To avoid speech distortions and dropped frames, frames are buffered at the
speech decoder. The buffer must be large enough to accommodate the worst case
of jitter through the network. The Alcatel VoFR algorithm uses a unique, state-
of-the-art technique called Adaptive Delay Equalization, which provides efficient
equalization of delay jitter end to end in the network. The size of the jitter buffer
can be adapted according to the delay profile of received speech frames. The
result is low end-to-end delay during low congestion periods, and no jitter buffer
overflow during congested periods.

The proprietary super-tandem algorithm has been extended to the Alcatel VoFR
implementation. In addition to rendering the compression and decompression
cycle unnecessary, the implementation of super-tandem VoFR eliminates the
need for voice packets to be queued in the playback jitter buffer. The jitter buffer
is used to compensate for variation in network delays, and is normally active in
the conversion from VoFR back to PCM. By eliminating the need for playback
buffer at the tandem switching node, the end-to-end delay across the network
can be significantly reduced, and a high-quality speech path can be maintained.

Figure 2-38 illustrates the implementation of super-tandem VoFR.

Figure 2-38: VoFR with super-tandem operation

Leased line Frame relay

3600/3600+ MainStreet node 3608 MainStreet Packet Access Mux

PBX 3612 MainStreet node PBX
T1/E1 VoFR
with
super-tandem

Router Router

Router
Tandem PBX
12604

83
Product overview

Echo cancellation
Echo is a phenomenon in which transmitted voice is reflected back to the
transmission point. Depending on its severity, echo can disrupt the normal flow
of conversation. Frame relay networks have no capacity to handle echo, so the
problem must be resolved by the equipment at the network edge. The Alcatel
VoFR algorithm provides integral G.165 echo cancellation (no tone disabling)
with up to 16 ms tail circuit length, a convergence time of 500 ms, and a
software-configurable minimum echo return loss with optional nonlinear
suppressor.

Interoperability
VoFR is interoperable across multiple MainStreet platforms (see Figure 2-39),
providing an integrated end-to-end solution for small remote offices right
through to high-capacity backbone switches, all of them managed from a single
network management platform. VoFR technology is supported on the 3608 and
3609 MainStreet packet access multiplexers for smaller remote or branch office
access; it is supported on the 3612 MainStreet Narrow-band Multiplexer for
access at larger branch sites. For backbone locations, the integration of VoFR
technology directly into the 3600 and 3600/3600+ MainStreet series bandwidth
managers provides a unique, scalable central-site solution.

84
 2. Applications

Figure 2-39: End-to-end VoFR solution

Remote office

LGS

Phone 3609 MainStreet Packet Access Mux (with integral router)

E&M

Phone

PBX
Fax
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager
Remote office

Router Central site office

Phone E&M Public frame relay

E1 Phone
3608 MainStreet Packet Access Mux
PBX
Fax
Up to 256 kb/s PBX
Fax
Branch office 3600/3600+ MainStreet node
frame relay with QoS
Router

V.35
SBRI
Phone analog Up to 512 kb/s
Router
Fractional E1 Private backbone network
3612 MainStreet node
PBX
Fax

Regional office
Router

Phone T1/E1 n x T1/E1

PBX 3600 MainStreet node

Fax

15161

85
Product overview

G3 fax G3 fax modulation and demodulation is supported in conjunction with both

ADPCM, HCV, LD-CELP (G.728) and CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A).

ADPCM with G3 fax

The VCM3, in conjunction with the Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards, provides
ADPCM voice compression or ADPCM-based G3 fax capability in both Mu-law
and A-law companding environments. The VCM3 can provide up to 44 or 48
(T1) or up to 55 or 60 (E1) ADPCM G3 fax channels, each running at 32 kb/s.

HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP and VoFR with G3 fax

HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP and VoFR with G3 fax is a special DSP
application that provides optimum transport bandwidth efficiency for shared
voice and G3 fax channels. Six channels are supported using the 6-circuit DSP4
or 10-circuit DSP5 and DSP5H cards.

Each channel is independently monitored for activity. When G3 fax tones are
present, the DSP resource dynamically invokes G3 fax demodulation to extract
the digital fax data. When G3 fax tones are not present, voice compression is
applied. At the far end, the digital signal is either remodulated or uncompressed
for fax and voice respectively. Figure 2-40 shows a sample application.

The demodulated fax and compressed voice information can be formatted as

HCM or transparent data. Various transport bandwidths are supported (see
Table 2-5). The G3 fax feature is fully compatible with the G3 fax capabilities of all
other Alcatel products, such as the 3608, 3809, and 3612 MainStreet nodes.

86
 2. Applications

Figure 2-40: HCV with G3 fax support

3600/3600 3600
+ MainStreet
MainStreet node
node

3600/3600+ MainStreet
node
DSP-n or
DPM
G3 fax LGS Digital
DSP4 network
with SRM T1/
E&M T1/E1
fax E1
modu

SRM used to subrate multiplex HCV,

PBX HCV with G3 fax, CPSS and
G3 fax other HCM/transparent data channels
3612
MainStreet
node
15538

In addition, international companding and voice signaling support is extended to

allow international fax connections. For example, the PBXs in Figure 2-35 could
be programmed to route fax traffic over a specific trunk; the multiplexer would
apply the voice compression algorithm with G3 fax application to it. This would
result in transparent, international support for voice/fax calls using optimum
transport bandwidth.

V.32 modem relay V.32 modem relay on the DSP5 card complies with V.32 and V.32 bis ITU
standards. When the DSP5 card detects V.32 modem signals, it
automatically switches from voice to data mode.

Echo cancellation Echo cancellation removes voice echoes caused by reflections from a far-end
2- to 4-wire analog conversion hybrid and telephone set. Echoes become
annoying when voice circuits are transmitted through a network with long delays
(for example, networks with satellite links). Generally, a maximum delay of 25 to
30 ms can be tolerated before echo cancellation is required. The echo return loss
is also a factor in determining the need for echo cancellation; loud echoes are
more annoying than quiet ones. The echo cancellation resources on the
3600/3600+ MainStreet can be used to remove up to 26 ms of tail circuit
echoes (tail circuit lengths of approximately 4000 km [2500 mi]). This
feature is shown in Figure 2-41.

87
Product overview

Figure 2-41: Echo cancellation, tail circuit lengths and transit delays
Tail circuit
length (1) Tail circuit length (1)

Echo (2) Echo (3) Echo (2)

2- or 4-wire conversion hybrid Echo

and echo cancellation (4) cancellation (5) 2- or 4-wire
conversion hybrid

Digital
network
2-wire 4-wire 4-wire 4-wire 2-wire
T1/E1 T1/E1 T1/E1
PBX
3600/3 3600/3
600+ 600+
MainStreet MainStreet
node A node B
Network transit time

Notes
1. Negligible tail circuit length at node A: 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid and echo cancellation at
same physical location, consequently the tail circuit length consists of just the local loop. For the echo
cancellation circuit in node B, the tail circuit length consists primarily of the distance between node B
and the PBX.

2. On-hook (worst case) and off-hook echoes introduced by telephone set.

3. Echo introduced by 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid.

4. Echo cancellation at node A prevents echoes from returning to node B. Though not shown, the 2-
and 4-wire conversion hybrid at node A also produces an echo.

5. Echo cancellation at node B prevents echoes from returning to node A.

11235

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system uses an ITU-T G.165-compliant echo

cancellation algorithm. The minimum ERL is 6 dB while the residual echo level
is –48 dBm0. Any DSP resource located on DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 cards can
be configured for echo cancellation, with one PCM channel for each resource.
Alternatively, all voice compression algorithms provide an optional 8 ms of echo
cancellation.

By default, the minimum ERL is 6 dB, but you can configure the ERL for 3 dB.
The 3 dB ERL feature should be used for tail circuits with severe impedance
mismatches.

For specialized applications requiring particularly long echo cancellation, Alcatel

offers the 3901 and 3902 MainStreet Digital Echo Canceller products.

88
 2. Applications

International signaling
and companding The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports the international PCM voice
conversion signaling and companding conversions necessary in networks using both T1 and
E1 and multinational telephone equipment, including:

• conversion of RBS, used in D4 and ESF T1, to ITU-T G.732 signaling, used
in CAS E1
• conversion of analog voice signaling, such as North American LGS LS
to European LGE RE signaling
• conversion of Mu-law companding to A-law
• transport of T1 AB signaling bits over E1 links

Figure 2-42 shows how the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can be used in
international voice networks. The T1 link (a) and/or the E1 link (b), can be used
to interconnect the North American and European nodes. Note that one of the
T1/E1 cards terminating the transatlantic link must have a CCM.

For the T1 link (a), companding and signaling conversion is performed at the
European node (the T1 link carries Mu-law and T1 AB signaling channels). For
the E1 link (b), companding conversion occurs at the North American node.
Signaling conversion is performed at the European node, when T1 signaling is
used on the E1 link, or at the North American node, when the E1 CAS timeslots
are
cross-connected to T1 timeslots.

Figure 2-42: International PCM voice conversion

North America Europe

3600/3600+ MainStreet node 3600/3600+ MainStreet node

(a)
T

T1 CCM
R
R

T1
P

1
1

I
I

E1 CCM(b)
E1

Mu-law port side A-law port side

• T1 (RBS) • E1 (CAS)
• PRI (TS0) • PRI (TS0)
• Analog • Analog
Endpoint signaling pairs

E&M (type I, II, III) E&M (type IV, V, V with

LGS PLAR LGS PLAR
E&M (type I, II, III)R2D (E-1)
LGS LS LGE RE
LGS GS LGE EC
LGE LS LGS RE
11253
LGE GS LGS EC

89
Product overview

The conversion or translation of T1 RBS (AB bits) to E1 CAS (ABCD bits) is

performed when T1 timeslots are directly cross-connected to E1 timeslots
through the 3600/3600+ MainStreet multiplexer. For example, conversion is
used when a T1 timeslot transporting an LGS LS channel is cross-connected to
an E1 timeslot transporting an LGE RE channel.

The use of a CCM on either the T1 or E1 card provides Mu-law to A-law

companding conversion. Conversion is applied when T1 signaling devices are
used in networks that have E1 aggregate links (for example, in Mexico and
Latin America).

With the ability to program A-law voice cards for either T1 or E1 signaling, it is
possible to provide PCM voice conversion by directly cross-connecting an A-law
voice port to a T1 link. In addition, the ability of the 3600 + MainStreet
multiplexer to support T1 signaling on E1 links enables direct cross-connection
of Mu-law voice ports to E1 links. Companding conversion will be performed in
both cases when the T1 or E1 cards have CCMs.

HCV can also be used for international voice signaling and companding
conversion applications. The Application Note, International Voice Signaling
Applications (01NCN353), available from your Alcatel representative, provides
detailed configuration information on both PCM and HCV usage in international
networks.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system can also convert between the ITU-T ADI
A-law PCM output code format (generally used on 2.048 Mb/s E1 links) and
the AT&T Mu-law true-sign inverted magnitude PCM output code format
(generally used on
1.544 Mb/s T1 links).

Analog interface
conversion In addition to international voice signaling conversion, the 3600 + MainStreet
system can provide signaling and interface conversion to enable cross-connections
within the following groups of voice circuits:

• LGS Loop Start – LGS PLAR – E&M

• LGS Ground Start – LGS PLAR – E&M

Voice conference bridging The VCB application provides a simultaneous communication path between two
or more PCM voice channels (Hoot ‘n’ Holler service). It is intended for nailed-
up or long-duration applications, such as brokerage dealer board applications.
The VCB application does not support signaling. It can be used to provide an
organization-wide voice conference facility. The VCB is a single DSP resource
application and is supported on DSP3 cards. A sample configuration is shown in
Figure 2-43.

90
 2. Applications

Figure 2-43: Voice conference bridging

PSTN
E&M, LGS, PLAR

T1/E1
E&M/LGE

3600/3600
T1/E1 +
E&M/LGE MainStreet T1 (PCM)
node

VC
HCV 3624
PBX MainStreet
T1/E1 Channel Bank
V.35/X.21 (PCM) 3600/3600
(HCV) +
MainStreet
node

VC

to other equipment including:

3612 • VCBs
MainStreet • PBXs
node • other 3600/3600+ MainStreet series nodes
• telephone sets
11227

Key features of VCB

are:

• up to 4 VCBs and 14 PCM conferees for each DSP resource; up to 5 VCBs

can be cascaded to form large bridges (see Figure 2-44)
• compandingconversion for conferees using different companding laws (A-
law and Mu-law)
• input and output gains of –16 to +9 dB in 0.1-dB increments, configurable
for each conferee
• listen-only and broadcast-only modes
• optional side tone generation (–16 to 0 dB in 0.1-dB increments, or none)
• low processing delay (500 s)
• support for 2-wire voice channels with echo cancellation or terminating
devices that do not present an open circuit when the VCB is active, and 4-
wire voice channels (4-wire voice channels are recommended)

91
Product overview

Figure 2-44: Cascading VCBs to form large voice conference bridges

Daisy chain

3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet node MainStreet node

VCB VCB VCB

City A

Hierarchic
T1/E1 (PCM)

City B
3600/3600+ 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet node MainStreet node MainStreet node

VCB VCB VCB

City C City D City E

11236

PCM connectivity is recommended between large, cascaded VCBs, particularly

when HCV is used to transport conferee channels. The distortion caused by
multiple voice compression/decompression hops may be acceptable for listen-
only conferees, but may prove unsatisfactory for actively broadcasting conferees.
Compressed voice channels must be converted to PCM before being connected
to a VCB.

Frame relay Frame relay is a service that statistically multiplexes individually addressed frames
switching onto a digital link. It differs from traditional packet services, such as X.25, by its
delegation of error correction and flow control responsibilities to the attached user
devices. (With X.25, these are network node-to-node responsibilities; with frame
relay, they are end-to-end user device responsibilities.) With less network
overhead, frame relay can focus network resources on the transmission of frames
from one end of the network to the other, at much higher transmission rates than
legacy packet networks.

These characteristics have made frame relay ideal for its traditional role—the
interconnection of LANs where bursty, low-average bandwidth and high-
throughput usage is typical. But these same advantages have allowed frame relay
to evolve into the first truly universal packet WAN service offering data and voice
integration. Combining intrinsic statistical gains, low overhead, and its ability to
dynamically assign bandwidth, frame relay has become the protocol of choice for
transmitting packetized voice.

92
 2. Applications

Alcatel frame relay On the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system, frame relay services are supported by the
FRS, FRE, and PE cards. Each card is an independent frame relay switch,
providing frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation, congestion control, and
frame error checking. Up to eight FRS cards, eight FRE cards, or six PE cards
can be installed in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf. The cards can be easily
upgraded through software to add new features and functionality without
affecting the operation of the
3600/3600+ MainStreet system.

For existing 3600/3600+ MainStreet networks, the frame relay cards are the key
elements of a seamless, cost-effective migration path from circuit switching to
advanced packet- and cell-switched networks. In addition to investment
protection, the benefits of the Alcatel frame relay solution include:

• integration of frame relay services into networks of any size or complexity

• full compliance with the broadest possible range of international frame
relay standards
• interoperability with the equipment of other vendors
• seamless, single-platform management of all network equipment and
services through the Alcatel 5620 NM
• integrated circuit and packet switching with guaranteed throughput and
advanced congestion management techniques
• advanced support for voice and data integration over frame relay,
including toll-quality voice and end-to-end quality-of-service guarantees
• RAPID protection for frame relay circuits

Frame relay features Frame relay features include:

• fully standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation,

congestion control, and frame error checking
• HDLC-based protocol encapsulation in frame relay using widely
accepted standards
• support for CPSS over frame relay
• advanced quality of service and frame fragmentation features for
effective switching of delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR
• frame relay-to-X.25 and frame relay-to-ATM network and
service interworking
• full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM, and comprehensive
node management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
• redundancy for frame relay circuits provided by RAPID protection
switching or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
• extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics, and loopbacks

93
Product overview

Integrated frame relay

– circuit-switching With the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, frame relay
hybrid technology can be easily phased into existing circuit-switched networks to create
an integrated, circuit- and packet-switched backbone network. Frame relay and
circuit-switched data can be cross-connected to, and transported by, the same T1
or E1 link. Frame relay is supported on any aggregate link.

On the 3600/3600+ MainStreet node, the switching shelf cross-connects frame

streams (from data, LAN and aggregate cards) to frame relay cards, as well as
circuit-switched information between ports, aggregates, and DSP resources. For
packet data, the switching matrix circuit switches DS0 and super-rate frame
streams from aggregate, data, and LAN interfaces to FRS, FRE, and PE cards. The
frame relay cards perform the frame switching.

Easy phase-in of frame

relay Figure 2-45 shows how a backbone network based solely on circuit switching
requires dedicated WAN channels for each LAN-to-LAN interconnection, and
dedicated LAN equipment to terminate each channel. With the addition of frame
relay cards, and the enabling of the LAN device FRAD capability, fewer WAN
channels and LAN devices are required.

In conventional circuit switching (without frame relay), each outlying LAN

router requires a dedicated channel and a dedicated router at the central site on
the right. With frame relay, the outlying LAN router traffic is funneled into fewer
links (only one connection is shown in Figure 2-45) which allocates the full
bandwidth of the link (or that portion of the DS1 that is configured as a frame
stream) to each router onlywhen needed. At the central site, fewer routers are
necessary because the frame relay cards provide the required frame switching.
The actual number of WAN channels (frame streams) and routers necessary will
depend on the required frame throughput and the number of frames generated.

Telephone companies and carriers can use frame relay cards to concentrate frame
relay traffic from multiple frame relay-compatible user devices in order to
achieve greater bandwidth utilization on gateways to public CSSNA and frame
relay networks.

94
 2. Applications

Figure 2-45: LAN interconnectivity with and without frame relay

Regional offices Corporate data centre

Without frame relay

3600/3600+ MainStreet
Router node

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Router

Dedicated channel for each LAN-WAN-LAN interconnection

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Router

Point-to-point LAN

With frame relay

2721 3600/3600+
MainStreet MainStreet
node

FRS

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

2721
MainStreet
Shared channel(s) for all LAN-WAN-LAN interconnections FRS

27213600/3600+ MainStreet MainStreetnode

Point-to-multipoint LAN

FRS

15215

95
Product overview

Figure 2-46 shows the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system as a gateway node to

circuit- and packet-switched networks, and as an element in a high-speed public
frame relay network. The integrated access loop supports both circuit- and
packet-switched data in the same aggregate. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system
can be applied as customer-premises equipment, both Telco and customer-
owned.

Figure 2-46: Gateway concentrator to frame relay networks

High-speed
public
frame relay
network PSTN

Central
office Integrated Customer Voice
access loop premises PBX
Circuit switched connections Video

LAN
Private/hybrid Bridges
FRS integrated and
card(s) networks routers
Frame relay connection
Packet- Low-speed
switched data
network (1) Third-party
frame relay
Metropolitan
area network (2) terminal adapters

Notes
1. Traditional low-speed (<64
kb/s) X.25 services with
frame relay interfaces
2. MAN with DS1 frame relay interfaces
7558

Upgrade to a
high-capacity frame
With a minimum of two FRE or PE cards and the addition of the FASTbus,
relay system a 3600/3600+ MainStreet node is upgraded to a high-capacity frame relay
switching system. The FASTbus is a fully redundant FDDI ring that
provides 100 Mb/s connectivity between up to 64 FRE or PE cards.

Subrate frame relay The SRIM is an optional module that can be installed on the FRS card to
process data at subrate speeds that are not limited to multiples of 8 kb/s.
Circuits that are not configured for the SRIM support only subrate speeds that
are multiples of
8 kb/s.

Table 2-6 lists the subrate speeds and rate adaption protocols supported by the
SRIM.

96
 2. Applications

Table 2-6: Subrate speeds and rate adaption supported by the SRIM

Rate adaption protocols Subrate speeds supported (kb/s)

DDS (DS0-A and DS0-B) 2.4
4.8
9.6
19.2
56 (DS0-A only)

HCM 1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
14.4
19.2
38.4

X.50 (Div. 2, Div. 3 and Div. 5) 2.4

4.8
9.6
19.2
48 (X.50 bis)

Link management
protocols Link management protocols are used to communicate PVC status information
and configuration changes between end-user devices, such as routers, and
network devices, such as the FRE and FRS cards. The frame relay cards support
the three accepted protocols for communicating frame relay link status
information.

• LMI
• Annex D of ANSI T1.617
• Annex A of ITU-T Q.933

Congestion management
and recovery The frame relay cards provide congestion management and recovery facilities that
detect the onset of congestion, limit the extent of congestion, and expedite the
recovery from severe congestion. Congestion is monitored at several levels,
including:

• frame switch
• processor
• frame stream

User-configurable MCT, SCT, and ACT levels are used to limit and expedite the
recovery from congestion.

97
Product overview

Maintenance and
performance monitoring
The frame relay cards offer a range of maintenance and performance monitoring
functions.

• alarms
The cards maintain separate alarm queues that are categorized according to
severity. Alarms can be read, acknowledged, logged, deleted, and monitored
through theAlcatel 5620 NM and NMTI. Remote alarm logging through
CPSS is supported.
• statistics
The cards collect a range of frame relay switch, frame stream and data
link connection statistics. Statistics are viewed using an Alcatel 5620 NM
or the NMTI.
• loopbacks
Loopbacks are supported on PVCs and frame streams.

For detailed information about the Alcatel’s frame relay service, refer to the
MainStreet Frame Relay General Information Book.

X.25 packet X.25 is an internationally accepted ITU-T standard that defines a communication
switching protocol between data terminal devices and packet-switched data networks. The
X.25 protocol facilitates the interworking of packet-switched data services
across geographically dispersed public and private networks.

X.25 is a virtual call service that allows network users to set up calls using standard
X.121 and E.164 addresses. The network establishes calls over virtual circuits,
which are logical connections between the originating and destination addresses.
Through the use of statistical multiplexing methods, X.25 can support multiple
virtual circuits over a single physical circuit, thus providing port sharing and
dynamic bandwidth allocation.

The X.25 protocol implements various error correction and flow control
techniques to ensure the reliable transfer of data across the network. Call
subscription options and facilities allow network users to individually customize
their service based on the application requirements.

MainStreet X.25 service With the addition of a single PE or X.25 FRE card, a 3600/3600+ MainStreet
node supports the MainStreet X.25 service, a complete X.25 switching product
suitable for public switched data networks, large service provider networks and
corporate data networks. The MainStreet X.25 service addresses the
requirements for
high-speed access and the need for integrated, cost-effective migration paths to
advanced packet and cell switching technologies.

98
 2. Applications

The X.25 FRE and PE cards can be installed in any UCS in a 3600/3600+
MainStreet system. An X.25 FRE is a standard FRE card running X.25 software;
an X.25 FRE card can be ordered with the X.25 software pre-installed, or
existing FRE cards can be upgraded to support the MainStreet X.25 service.
While the X.25 features are almost identical on both cards, the PE card offers
greater fan-out capacity, delivers higher packet throughput performance, and has
more memory, making it more suitable for networks that require high-capacity
accounting.

The PE and X.25 FRE cards provide a small footprint, high-performance X.25
switching platform. Functioning as independent packet and frame switches on
the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system, the cards can be easily upgraded through
software to add new features and functionality without affecting the operation of
the
3600/3600+ MainStreet system. Moreover, the cards support X.25 and frame
relay services simultaneously, and offer both network interworking and service
interworking between X.25 and frame relay.

While the MainStreet X.25 service is a key component of a multiservice

3600/3600+ MainStreet system, it also takes advantage of the multiservices
nature of the system, supporting both subrate and super-rate X.25 access lines
over TDM and/or frame relay circuits, and incorporating a high-speed internal
network using frame relay PVCs as backbone trunks.

Figure 2-47 shows an example of a MainStreet X.25 network using 36110 and
36111 MainStreet multiprotocol concentrators.

99
Product overview

Figure 2-47: Example of a MainStreet X.25 network

Subrate X.25 devices

(1.2 to 64 kb/s)

Public
X.25
network
DS0 or
ISDN 2B+D

IBM Private
X.75 X.75 X.25
DEC
BUL network
L
X.25 (up to 3600
E1 rate) MainStreet X.25
Subrate X.25 devices node gateway
(1.2 to 64 kb/s) 3600/3600
+
MainStreet
node

T1 E3
T1
Router Frame Frame E3
relay relay

36111
MainStreet E1 T3 IP IPX
node 3600
MainStreet NetBIOS SNA
node
IP
IPX
NetBIOS 36110
SNA
Frame MainStreet
3600 relay node
Frame
3600/3600+ Alcatel MainStreet relay
MainStreet 5620 NM node
node

36111 X.25
MainStreet 36110
node
X.25 MainStreet node
ISDN

Frame
relay BSC
Async. HDLC
X.25 36110 SDLC
36110 MainStreet
MainStreet node
node 36110
MainStreet node

IP
IPX IP
NetBIOS IPX
SNA NetBIOS
SNA

15162
100
 2. Applications

MainStreet X.25 features MainStreet X.25 features include:

• access speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 1984 kb/s using existing MainStreet family
access devices and interface cards
• X.25 access over frame relay based on widely accepted encapsulation standards
• optimized X.25 performance in the network backbone using Alcatel
frame relay technology operating at up to T3/E3 speeds
• dynamic routing and load balancing on a per-packet basis
• full support for X.75 and X.35 gateways
• full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM
• comprehensive node management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
• redundancy for access lines and backbone trunks provided by
RAPID protection switching or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
• extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics and diagnostics

Standards-compliant X.25
and X.75 The MainStreet X.25 service fully supports the 1984, 1988, 1992, and 1996
versions of ITU-T Recommendations X.25 and X.75. The link layer supports
modulo 8 and modulo 128 frame sequencing, and supports both direct LAPB
access and access over frame relay encapsulation circuits.

The network layer offers a choice of DCE or DTE modes and fully supports:

• network-wide call redirection

• switch-wide and network-wide hunt groups
• CUGs and ICUGs
• X.25 PVCs and X.75 IPVCs
• PVC and SVC accounting
• NUI validation

MainStreet X.25 network

components The MainStreet X.25 service features a flexible and scalable architecture suitable
for compact and large networks. The modular design provides interfaces to
external systems and allows rapid development and delivery of future features
and enhancements.

Figure 2-48 shows the various components that make up the MainStreet X.25
network. The PE and X.25 FRE cards are the key components. To support the
full range of X.25 network services, Alcatel offers the following optional
subsystems:

• Alcatel Data Collector for accounting record collection and processing

• NexusPASS NUI validation servers
• NexusTRACE remote protocol monitoring software

101
Product overview

Figure 2-48: MainStreet X.25 network architecture

X.25
Maintenance tools access device
CPSS over X.25

Accounting and statistics

data collection
X.75
MainStreet internetwork gateways
X.25 network
NUI database and
user interface
PE/X.25 FRE
cards
NMTI and Alcatel 5620 Network Manager
X.25
frame relay service internetworking

7320

X.25-to-frame relay
X.25-to-frame relay service interworking allows X.25 devices to communicate with
service interworking
frame relay devices by converting X.25 data packets to frame relay frames.

For detailed information about the MainStreet X.25 service, refer to the
MainStreet X.25 Service General Information Book.

102
2. Applications

103
A closer view
3
Design
The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports interface
and application cards that are common to all MainStreet large multiplexer
systems. This reduces excess inventory and simplifies craft training across the
whole 3600 MainStreet series bandwidth manager family. The 3600/3600+
MainStreet system components are field-upgradeable to provide a designed-in
migration path as networking applications evolve.

This chapter provides a detailed architectural view of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet

Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. It describes:

• shelf architecture
• alarm panel
• power supplies
• ringing generators
• cooling equipment
• distribution panels
• data termination units
• site requirements
• system integrity
• CPSS
• SONET and SDH data communications channels
• node and network synchronization and the ANS protocol

105
A closer
view

Shelf architecture The shelf is the basic metalwork (or frame) that houses the physical components
of a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system. There are two variants of the shelf: a 23-
inch variant and a 19-inch variant. The shelves meet Class A EMC requirements
when equipped with Class B cards and a front cover. The 19-inch shelf can be
installed in a 19-inch rack, or in a 23-inch rack using rack-adapter brackets.

The shelves are divided as follows:

• UCS sections
• HSA and common control sections
• power section
• backplane and bulkhead/equipment interface areas

Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show the major divisions of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet
shelves and how the slots are numbered. (The backplane and
bulkhead/equipment interface areas are located at the rear of the shelves, and are
not visible in the figures.)

Figure 3-1: 23-inch shelf layout

3600/3600+ MainStreet Power

ACO
Major Alarm
Critical Alarm
PowerPower
AB
Minor Alarm
H3
LA
CT

CT
LB

Po
U

U
C

C
S

wer
sup
ply
1
TI

UCS
sections A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
Power
supply Power
section
2
U

A
C

C
S

Power
supply
3
B B B B B B B B

Frame

HSA and
common control
sections
12551

106
 3. Design

Figure 3-2: 19-inch shelf layout

3600/3600+ MainStreet Power

ACO
Minor Alarm
Critical Alarm Major Alarm

UCS
sections HSA and
common control
sections

U
C

H3
LA
S

CT

CT
LB

TI
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

A
C

C
S

1
B B B B B B B B

PowerPowerPower supplysupplysupply Power

Frame
1 2 3

Power section
11833

UCS sections The UCS sections contain slots A1 to A8 and B1 to B8, which are reserved for
the interface (aggregate, data, and voice) and application cards listed in Table 3-
1, and the MTA slot, which is reserved for the Test card. For more information
about these cards, see chapters 7 through 10.

107
A closer
view

Table 3-1: 3600/3600+ MainStreet interface and application

cards

Card type Card name

Aggregate 4 Mb/s ATM Services E1 card 4
Mb/s ATM Services T1 card 16
Mb/s ATM Services E1 card 16
Mb/s ATM Services T1 card
1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1-2 card
Octal T1 card
2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2 card
Octal E1 card
Single Optical Extension card
Dual Optical Extension card
Multiport Aggregate card
TTC2M
X.21 PRI card
X.21 ESI PRI card
V.35 PRI card

Voice 4WTO line card

E&M card
LGE card
LGS card
4WDX channel unit
E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit LGS
channel unit 2WMRD
channel unit MRD
channel unit

Data BRI S/T card

RS-232 DCC
X.21 DCC
V.35 DCC
RS-422 DCC
DNIC line card
2B1Q line card
27LC2 line card
27LC3 line card
28LC line card
64 kb/s Codirectional card
2B1Q channel unit
DS0-DP channel unit
OCU-DP channel unit
4WTO channel unit

108
 3. Design

Card type Card name

Application CPC
DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards IMC
DCP card
FRS card
FRE card
X.25 FRE card
PE card

Common control
and HSA sections The common control section contains slots CTLA, CTLB, TIMA, and TIMB. The
CTLA and CTLB slots are reserved for Control cards, and the TIMA and TIMB
slots are reserved for Timing cards. For more information, see chapter 5.

The HSA section contains slots H1A and H1B, H2A and H2B, and H3A and
H3B, which are reserved for HSA cards (HSA DS3, OC-3, STM-1, TU-12
mapper and VT-1.5 mapper cards). For more information about HSA cards, see
chapter 6.

Power section The power section contains slots PS1, PS2, and PS3, which are reserved for
Power Supply cards. For more information about the Power Supply cards, see
“Power supplies” in this chapter.

Backplane and
bulkhead/equipment The backplane electrically interconnects card slots and external connectors in the
interface area equipment interface area, and distributes power and ground potentials. Equipment
interface area connectors protrude through the shelf bulkhead. The bulkhead
provides mechanical support and EMI shielding for the shelf components.

Alarm panel The alarm panel is an integrated component of 3600 + MainStreet shelves. It
is located at the top of the shelf. The alarm panel monitors and controls the
alarm inputs and outputs for shelf alarms and user-defined external alarms.

The alarm panel features are:

• support for standard and TEP-1(E) operating modes

• circuit breaker and power supply alarm reporting
• blower unit and ringing generator alarm reporting
• visual indicators
• an ACO push-button switch for alarm acknowledgment and lamp testing
• six user-configurable alarm inputs
• three user-configurable outputs for driving external equipment
• a voltage test strip for testing 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf voltage rails (5
V, 12 V and –48 V)
• remote voltage measurement through NMTI
• over-current protection of the Ethernet port
109
A closer
view

Figure 3-3 shows the alarm panel visual indicators and ACO push-button.

Figure 3-3: Alarm panel visual indicators

PowerACOCritical Alarm
Major Alarm Minor Alarm

3600/3600+ MainStreet Power

ACO
Minor Alarm
Critical Alarm Major Alarm
3600/3600+ MainStreet Power ACO Critical Alarm
Major AlarmAB
PowerPower

Minor Alarm

Power Power Feed A Feed B

23-inch 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf

19-inch 3600/3600+
MainStreet
shelf 15163

Power supplies The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports –48 V dc Power Supply cards.
Although each shelf requires two Power Supply cards to operate, a third Power
Supply card can be installed in a shelf to provide redundancy. Redundant Power
Supply cards operate together in load-sharing mode, each one ready to power the
shelf alone should the others fail. For quick field replacement, these Power
Supply cards are immediately accessible from the front of the shelf and can be
independently installed and removed while the shelf power is on. In a shelf with
two Power Supply cards, a third Power Supply card can be installed without
interrupting service.

The –48 V dc Power Supply cards, which support single- or dual-input feed
configurations, are designed to operate from CO or exchange station batteries. For
Power Supply card input specifications, see chapter 13.

110
 3. Design

Ringing generators The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses a ringing
generator to supply high-power alternating current to an LGS or MRD interface.
This informs a connected device (telephone, PBX, or key system) of an
incoming call, and drives the ringer on the destination telephone.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports a variety of LGS and MRD

interfaces (see chapter 8 for a description), and provides two connectors on the
shelf bulkhead to support external ringing generators. One connector provides
ringing voltage to UCSs A1 to A8; the other provides ringing voltage to UCSs
B1 to B8. Ringing voltage can be supplied by an Alcatel ringing generator or by
a non-Alcatel CO or customer-premises ringing generator.

The Alcatel ringing generator unit supplies 71 to 79 V rms (75 V rms, nominal)
ringingvoltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable). Typically, one unit can
provide ringingvoltage for all theLGS and MRD interfaces installed in one shelf
(up to eight 12-circuit LGS cards, 32 single-circuit LGS channel units or 32
MRD channel units). LGS and MRD interfaces are designed to accommodate a
customer-premises ringing voltage of 65 to 110 V rms from 15 to 25 Hz.

The Alcatel external ringing generator is a 19-inch rack mount assembly that
consists of up to four ringing generators (for use in redundant or nonredundant
configurations) installed in a rack-mounted enclosure complete with power
distribution, external connectors, and status LEDs. The Alcatel external
ringing generator provides:

• input voltage operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

• dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
• customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
• pull-out tray from the front panel for easy access to ringing units

Figure 3-4 shows an Alcatel external ringing generator assembly, which can
accommodate up to four ringing generators.

Figure 3-4: Alcatel external ringing generator assembly

15164

111
A closer
view

Ringing voltage is usually applied in a specific on-and-off pattern called the

ringing cadence. LGS interfaces follow the cadence specified in the ABCD
signaling bits of the T1 link to which they are connected.

When configured for PLAR signaling, LGS interface cadence is controlled by

system software and is set for 2 seconds on, 3 seconds off. MRD interfaces do
not have a set cadence because cadence is controlled by the calling party by
adjusting a button on the telephone set of the calling party. MRD interfaces
incorporate a safety feature that limits continuous ringing to 5 seconds; after 5
seconds of continuous ringing, the MRD interface forces ringing off for 1
second.

LGS interfaces provide a ringing timeout to protect against link failures while in the
ringing state. The LGS interface terminates ringing after 10 seconds if there is no
change in the ringing signaling bits.

Cooling equipment For optimum performance and reliability, the 3600 + MainStreet system must
operate within a certain temperature range (see “Site requirements”). To ensure
that a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit operates within the acceptable temperature
range, a blower unit must be installed below the shelf to provide forced air
cooling. The blower unit draws cool air in from the front of the shelf and forces
it up through the shelf.

Power to the blower unit is provided by a connector on the shelf bulkhead.

Distribution panels Distribution panels are optional rack-mounted units used to manage the physical
connection of external equipment to 3600 + MainStreet shelves. Alcatel offers
distribution panels for DCCs, ATM Services, Dual T1-2, Dual E1, Dual E1-2,
Octal E1, and BRI S/T cards.

DCC distribution panels Each UCS has a 25-pair connector in the shelf bulkhead/equipment interface
area. Its pin and signal assignment is determined by the type of card installed in
the UCS. When a multi circuit DCC is installed, each circuit is assigned to
certain wire pairs on this connector (and sometimes to a DCC faceplate
connector as well). DCC distribution panels are used to break out individual
circuits from the 25-pair equipment interface connector (or DCC faceplate
connector) and deliver these circuits to separate connectors of the type specified
by the external data interface. For example, the RS-422 DCC uses the UDP (see
Figure 3-5), which accommodates any combination of up to four RS-530, RS-
449/V.36, V.35, and
X.21 interface modules.

112
 3. Design

Figure 3-5: RS-422 DCC and Universal Distribution Panel

Equipment interface connector: circuits 1 to 2

RS-422

RS-422 DCC Card

Ready 1
2
3
4

Status

Faceplate connector: circuits 3 to 4

RS-422 DCC UDP

RS-530RS-449X.21V.35
circuitcircuitcircuitcircuit 1234

6809

Table 3-2 lists the DCC distribution panels available. Installation instructions
and pin and signal information are included with each distribution panel.

Table 3-2: DCC distribution panels

Interface Number of Connector type Part number

type circuits
RS-232 6 Female DB25 90-0350-01
X.21 8 Female DB15 90-0348-01
V.35 6 Female DB25 90-0349-01
6 Female M34 90-1066-01
RS-422 4 Male/female DB15, DB25, DB37, 90-1615-01
and/or M34 90-1615-02

PRI RJ45
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels provide a means to connect NT devices to Dual T1-2,
Distribution Panels
Dual E1, Dual E1-2, Octal E1, and ATM Services cards (T1, 100  or E1, 120 ).

Figures 3-6 and 3-7 show the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels. All connectors are
located on the rear of the distribution panels.

113
A closer
view

One PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variant has one 25-pair I/O connector and eight
RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-6). The other variants have two 25-pair I/O
connectors and eight RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-7).

Each RJ45 connector corresponds to one T1 or E1 link and provides one transmit
and receive pair. The 25-pair I/O connectors connect the RJ45 connectors to
UCSs.

Figure 3-6: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with one 25-pair connector

PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel

Front

Chassis Ground I/O Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Rear
15053

Figure 3-7: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with two 25-pair connectors

PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel

Front

ChassisPort 1 Port 2 Configuration A - Not Connected

GroundConfiguration A - 8 Port I/O (A1 - A8) A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (A1 - A4) Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (B1 - B4) A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4

Port 1 Port 2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/

(A1-A8/A1-A4) (N.C./B1-B4) B1 B2 B3 B4
Rear
15054

Table 3-3 lists the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variants, and the cards and
number of NT devices they support.

Table 3-3: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels

Distribution panel Cards supported Number of NT

variant devices supported
90-2635-01 Dual T1-2 2
Dual E1, Dual E1-2
90-4698-01 Octal E1 8
90-6464-01 ATM Services 4 or 8 (2  4)
(T1, 100  or E1, 120 )

114
 3. Design

PRI BNC
PRI BNC Distribution Panels provide a means to connect NT devices to Octal
Distribution Panels
E1 and ATM Services cards (E1, 75 ).

Figure 3-8 shows the PRI BNC Distribution Panel. All connectors are located on
the rear of the distribution panel.

There are two PRI BNC Distribution Panel variants. One variant is used with the
Octal E1 card; the other is used with the ATM Services card.

The rear of the panel has the following components:

• two DB78 I/O connectors

• eight pairs of BNC connectors
• panel configuration switch
• ground choice switch
• shield ground switches

Each pair of BNC connectors connects to one E1 link, providing one transmit
and one receive connector. The DB78 connectors connect BNC connectors to
UCSs.

Figure 3-8: PRI BNC Distribution

Panel

PRI BNC
Distribution Panel

Front

Chassis Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Chassis A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/B1 A6/B2 A7/B3 A8/B4

Ground 1 x Octal - Port 1 (A1-A8) 2 x Quad - Port 1 (A1-A4), Port 2 (B1-B4) Ground
Port 1 Port 2 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd
Signal
Ground Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd

Port 1
Port 2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/
(A1-A8/A1-A4)
(N.C./B1-B4) B1 B2 B3 B4
Chassis
ground Panel Ground Shield
stud configuration choice ground
switch switch switches
Rear
15055

Table 3-4 lists the PRI BNC Distribution Panel variants, and the cards and
number of NT devices they support.

Table 3-4: PRI BNC Distribution Panels

Distribution panel variant Cards supported Number of NT devices

supported
90-4698-02 Octal E1 8

115
A closer
view 90-6465-01 ATM Services (E1, 75 ) 4 or 8 (2  4)

116
 3. Design

S/T BRI Distribution Panel The S/T BRI Distribution Panel provides connection for up to eight TE or NT
devices (or a combination of both) to one BRI S/T card. The S/T BRI
Distribution Panel has one 25-pair I/O connector and eight circuits (each with
two RJ45 connectors) at the rear of the panel. Figure 3-9 shows the S/T BRI
Distribution Panel.

S/T BRI Distribution Panel

S/T BRI
Distribution Panel

Front

1234 5678
15056
Chassis Ground I/O Connector TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NTTE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT

Rear

Each of the eight circuits on the distribution panel is broken out to a pair
of
RJ45 connectors to accommodate the two operational modes (TE and NT
modes), which are configurable for each of the eight circuits on the BRI S/T
card. The
25-pair I/O connector connects all eight circuits to one UCS in a shelf.

Data termination DTUs provide desktop connectivity for data devices such as personal computers,
units terminals, and modems. DTUs, together with DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, or
28LC line cards or 2B1Q channel units, provide an interface between these data
devices and the 3600/3600+ MainStreet node. The line cards or channel units are
installed in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf, which can be located in a service-
provider’s equipment building, while the DTUs can be installed at the data device
site.
Figure 3-10 shows data devices connected to DTU device ports.

Data termination unit installation

25-pair
connector
Line To data devices
connector
Building
wiring

3600/3600+
MainStreet node Punch-down Wall jack DTU
(DNIC or 2B1Q block (6-pin, RJ-series
interface) (cross-connect female connector)
wiring)
11228

117
A closer
view

The DTU multiplexes the device ports onto an aggregate link (or line) that
provides:

• a 2B+D (two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16 kb/s D channel) interface to

the DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2, or 27LC3 line card or the 2B1Q channel unit
over a standard twisted-pair
• a multirate HDSL interface to the 28LC line card over a single
standard twisted-pair or two standard twisted-pairs

The line cards or channel unit demultiplexes the aggregate link into individual
circuits corresponding to each data device.

There are three DTU types:

• 2600 MainStreet series DTUs

• 2700 MainStreet series DTUs
• 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTUs
For 2600 and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, the maximum loop length
supported depends on the type of copper cable used and its associated resistance
factors. For example, the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of
up to 3.3 km (2.1 mi) using 24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84.14
/km; the
2700 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of up to 7.2 km (4.5 mi)
using 24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84.14 /km.

For the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the maximum loop length supported
depends on variations in cable characteristics, impedance variations, impulse
noise, electrical noise and crosstalk, and the presence of bridge taps. For
example, the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to 4.0
km (2.5 mi) using 26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s.

Parameters for the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs are configured through the
DNIC line card. Parameters for the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are configured
through the 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or 2B1Q channel unit.
Parameters for the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU are configured through the 28LC
line card.

When a data device circuit is configured at the 3600/3600+ MainStreet node, the
configuration is automatically downloaded to the DTU. (For more information
about DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2 and 27LC3 line cards, and the 2B1Q channel unit,
see chapter 9.)

DTUs can be installed on a hard, flat, horizontal surface (such as a table top), on
a wall, or in a rack.

118
 3. Design

2600 MainStreet series

The 2600 MainStreet series DTUs are intended for on-premises applications that
DTUs
connect data devices to a DNIC line card installed in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet
system.

The 2600 MainStreet series DTUs provide:

• mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

• formatting of data traffic and of the control leads to the B-channel
buses (rate adaption)
• echo cancellation for the 2B+D signal
• D-channel CPSS message linking for control and status signals
• collecting and reporting basic data traffic and error
statistics Table 3-5 lists the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs
available.

Table 3-5: 2600 MainStreet series DTUs

DTU Type Device ports

No. Interface type
2601 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
V.24/RS-232
2602 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous X.21/V.11
2603 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous V.35

The 2601, 2602, and 2603 MainStreet DTUs are available in ANM versions.
These units are equipped with serial communications controllers used to monitor
and collect more network management traffic statistics than the standard DTUs.

DTU statistics are:

• the number of user transmit and receive data bytes/data frame

• the number of CRC errors and frame aborts
• the number of link resets
• the number of receive buffer overflows and
underflows ANM statistics are displayed from an Alcatel
5620 NM.

119
A closer
view

2700 MainStreet series

DTUs
The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are designed for off-premises applications
that connect data devices to a 2B1Q line card, a 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or a
2B1Q channel unit installed in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system.

The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs provide:

• mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

• formatting of data traffic and of the control leads to the B
channels (rate adaption)
• echo cancellation for the 2B1Q signal
• D-channel CPSS message linking for control and status signals
• data traffic and error statistics collection and reporting
• line protectors on the 2B1Q transmission line for lightning and
surge protection
• maintenance of sealing current (also known as a wet circuit) on the
2B1Q transmission line

In addition, the 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs provide:

• H-bit signaling
• dual ports and port redundancy
• power fail detection
• software downloading
• integral DTU NMTI (maintenance of DTU system)
• integral BERT

The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs (connected to a 2B1Q, 27LC2, or 27LC3

line card) support ANSI T1.601 Loop Tests 2 through 15, and the Null Loop
Test.

Table 3-6 lists the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs available.

Table 3-6: 2700 MainStreet series DTUs

DTU Type Device ports

No. Interface type
2701 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
V.24/RS-232
2702 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous X.21/V.11
2703 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous V.35
2704 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous with
V.110 rate adaption V.24/RS-232

120
 3. Design

DTU Type Device ports

No. Interface type
2720 MainStreet DTU Fixed-link FRAD 4 Ethernet-attached IP
2721 MainStreet DTU Fixed-link FRAD Unlimited Ethernet-attached IP and/or IPX
2751 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data port 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
redundancy V.24/RS-232
2752 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data port 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
redundancy X.21/RS-449
2753 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data port 2 Synchronous or asynchronous V.35
redundancy

2801 MainStreet
The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU is designed for off-premises applications that
HDSL DTU
connect a data device to a 28LC line card installed in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet
shelf. The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides one user-configurable V.35,
V.36/RS-449, or X.21 serial interface for either 2- or 4-wire connection.

The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides:

• mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

• multirate HDSL frame format (data traffic)
• echo cancellation for the multirate HDSL signal
• software-configurable speed-for-distance option for the multirate HDSL line
• V.13 signaling
• integral BERT
• software downloading
• integral DTU NMTI (configuration and maintenance of DTU system and
data ports)
• data port control leads handling

Site requirements The following site requirements must be observed when installing a
3600/3600+ MainStreetsystem, to ensure adequate room to access equipment, fault-
free operation, and personal safety.

Location and working

space Although the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system has been designed and tested to all
relevant standards of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference, it may
be affected by strong sources of electromagnetic radiation in the near field, such
as elevators, air conditioners, photocopiers and facsimile machines.

Make sure that the location can accommodate the planned type of installation
including shelves, interfaces, terminals, modems, CSUs, NTIs, and cabling.

Sufficient working space for installation and maintenance should be provided.

A minimum distance of 1.25 m (4 ft) at the front of the shelf is suggested.

121
A closer
view

Temperature and humidity A 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is intended for indoor use. During
shipping and storage it can withstand temperatures ranging from –40 C to
+66C
(–40F to +150F) and a relative humidity of 5% to 95%. Operating
temperatures can range from 0C to +40C (32F to +100F) with a relative
humidity of 5% to 95%, noncondensing.

When ventilation or air conditioning is provided, sensors connected to an alarm

system should be provided to monitor for excessive temperatures. These
sensors can also be connected to user-configurable external alarm inputs on the
3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf, so that sensor relay closures can be logged in
theshelf alarm queues and to an Alcatel 5620 NM.

Altitude A 3600/3600+ MainStreet system must be installed at an altitude in the

range of 60 m (197 ft) below sea level to 1800 m (5905 ft) above sea
level.

Power The dc power source used to supply the 3600 + MainStreet system must
comply with the mandatory regulations applicable to the country in which the
system is installed.

Grounding The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system requires separate signal and chassis ground
points.
Provision must be made at the installation site for access to the appropriate
building ground points.

Electrostatic discharge
precautions When installing a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit, installers must wear an antistatic
strap when handling cards and modules to prevent ESD. Provision must be made
at the installation site for thegrounding ofantistatic straps. The 3600 + MainStreet
shelves provide a ground strap connection point at the front of the shelf frame.

System integrity The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports a comprehensive array of

redundancy options, from common control redundancy to the protection of
individual circuit paths. Options designed to protect against events that could
lead to link, ring, and/or node failures are:

• control redundancy
• power supply redundancy
• HSA card traffic protection
• circuit path protection at the node level (RAPID)
• circuit path protection at the network level (Alcatel 5620 NM AAR)
• ISDN leased-line protection (ISDN leased-line backup)
• aggregate interface and access redundancy
• aggregate power-loss bypass

In addition, trunk conditioning and fault signaling are supported to prevent

122
 3. Design
endpoint devices such as PBXs and cross-connect switches from using a failed
link.

123
A closer
view

Control redundancy The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system has a control complex, consisting of a
Control card and an associated Timing card. Control redundancy is the
duplication of the control complex to provide service protection against single-
component failures. Control redundancy in a 3600 + MainStreet system requires
both an active and inactive Control card and Timing card.

With control redundancy, the active control complex is responsible for the
operation of the system. The inactive control complex is always powered up, so
that it is ready to assume control if necessary. Control-redundant operation can
be configured to operate in either hot-standby mode or partitioned mode.

In hot-standby mode, the configuration databases of the two Control cards are
identical. Any change to the database of the active Control card is automatically
reconciled with (copied to) the database of the inactive card. When an activity
switch occurs (the act of transferring control from one control complex to the
other), calls in progress are not dropped. The output timing of the system can
experience some disturbance, and there can be a short period of corrupted data or
a burst of noise on voice circuits. These events typically persist for no longer
than 125 s. Maintenance operations and configuration changes that are in
progress could be lost. After a hot-standby activity switch occurs, the newly
inactive Control card restarts itself and reconciles its database with the database
of the newly active Control card.

Partitioned mode permits the replacing or upgrading of system software and

hardware of the control complex cards with minimal interruption to service.
Partitioned mode redundancy is for maintenance purposes only and is not
recommended as an operational mode. In partitioned mode, the active Control
card does not report any changes in the configuration database to the inactive
Control card, and the inactive Control card does not monitor the status of the
system. Since the configuration databases of the two Control cards can differ,
database synchronization cannot be guaranteed in partitioned mode. If an
activity switch occurs, calls in progress are dropped, all interface cards are reset,
and maintenance operations and configuration changes in progress are lost.
Changes made to the configuration database after the system is placed in
partitioned mode are also lost.

Activity switches can be triggered manually by an Alcatel 5620 NM or through the

NMTI, or triggered automatically on a daily or weekly basis.

Power supply redundancy Shelves can be configured with three Power Supply cards, which operate in
load-sharing mode. Individual Power Supply cards can be replaced with no service
disruption. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system also supports dual dc power feeds.

124
 3. Design

HSA card traffic protection Traffic protection provides an alternate line or path if the working line or circuit
fails or is highly errored.

The OC-3 and STM-1 cards support three modes of traffic protection:

• simplex
• 1+1
• ring
Mapper cards support two modes of traffic protection:

• simplex
• 1+1

The HSA DS3 card supports three modes of traffic protection:

• simplex (default)
• access
• interface

Simplex mode
Simplex mode does not provide traffic protection. To support simplex traffic
protection, the HSA card must be installed in subslot Aof an HSA card slot.
Subslot B registers as empty.

1+1 mode
1+1 mode provides line protection for OC-3 and STM-1 cards and requires fiber
optic lines connected between each subslot in each node, subslot A to subslot A
and subslot B to subslot B. Mapper cards do not require any special physical
connections because their circuits connect to other card circuits via the backplane.

Ring mode
Ring mode provides path protection on OC-3 and STM-1 cards. This mode
requires fiber optic cables connected from subslot A on one node to subslot B on
the other node, and so on throughout the ring.

Access and interface modes

Access mode provides line protection in 1+1 mode for two HSA DS3 cards.
Interface mode provides card protection, and requires two HSA DS3 cards
connected to one common far-end DS3 transmission facility.

125
A closer
view

RAPID protection
switching
RAPID is a node level response to an out-of-service aggregate link or a resource
failure. RAPID allows a second alternate cross-connection to be programmed into
the switching database of the node for use when the preferred path (DS0 or
super-rate channel) is unavailable. The Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI can be
used to configure RAPID.

When configured, use of the alternate path is automatic and continues until the
preferred path returns to service; intervention by a network manager is not
required at the time of failure. When alternate path bandwidth is routed over
leased lines, it can be used for low-priority connections during normal operation.
When RAPID is invoked, the low-priority connection is interrupted (bumped).

RAPID can also use ISDN as its alternate path. For more information, see “ISDN
bandwidth on demand” in chapter 2.

RAPID is intended for essential circuits that require immediate reconnection upon
link or resource failure. For circuits that require rerouting but not pre-assigned
alternate bandwidth, use of the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR is recommended.

Figure 3-11 shows RAPID protection for a typical network. An n  56

kb/s super-rate data connection between San Francisco and New York is
RAPID protected by an alternate path through Dallas.

Figure 3-11: RAPID path protection using an alternate leased line

path

Red Alarm
Preferred path declared

Fault
T1

OOS OOS OOS

3600/3600+ 3600/3600+ 3600/3600+

MainStreet node T1 MainStreet node ChicagoT1 MainStreet node
San Francisco New York

Alternate path Alternate path

3600/3600
+
MainStreet
node
Dallas 11229

126
 3. Design

At both the San Francisco and New York nodes, the data channel is
cross-connected to the aggregate link that travels through Chicago. To ensure
availability of service should a fault occur anywhere along this preferred route,
the San Francisco and New York nodes are programmed with a second network
cross-connection which, in this example, travels through Dallas (note that the
Dallas node must nail up this alternate path's cross-connection). If the
Chicago-New York link is completely severed, the New York and Chicago
nodes raise local alarms. Because the Chicago interface towards the San
Francisco node has been configured to invoke trunk conditioning when the link
to which it is cross-connected declares a Red Alarm, fault signaling codes are
transmitted; in this case, the code selected is the OOS code. When the San
Francisco node detects the incoming OOS codes, RAPID is invoked and the
super-rate data channel now travels end-to-end along the alternate path. RAPID
would still work if the link between the Chicago and New York node had only
been severed in the New York to Chicago direction. In this case, the Chicago
node would raise a Red Alarm while the New York node would detect OOS
codes.

Note that while T1 links are shown, a mixture of E1, T1, V.35 PRI, and X.21
PRI aggregates can also be used. In addition, had the end device been a PBX that
did not require RAPID, the San Francisco and New York nodes could be
programmed to transmit the seized signaling code towards their PBXs. This
would prevent each PBX from using the out-of-service aggregate link.
Furthermore, if ISDN were used for the alternate path, the San Francisco and
New York nodes would establish a call directly between them.

Two conditions must be satisfied to ensure a proper RAPID configuration.

First, the switching matrix must support a second cross-connection destination
for the channel being protected. Second, the destination must be capable of
raising an alarm upon which RAPID can be invoked.

RAPID is not limited to voice or data ports connected to an aggregate link.

RAPID can also be applied to tandem aggregate connections such as T1-to-T1,
or
E1-to-X.21 PRI aggregates.

When a link failure occurs on a remote span, knowledge of the event can be
propagated through multiple tandem connections by special OOS signaling codes.
OOS codes are a user-selectable trunk conditioning option.

Single T1 and E1 cards and the Dual E1-2 card support a loopback detect feature
that prevents the use of a failed link when an external loopback is applied; this
feature is also supported on the TSM and DRM of Dual T1 and Dual T1-2 cards,
respectively. All aggregate cards support two-way trunk conditioning. T1, E1,
and
X.21 and V.35 PRI aggregate cards also support one-way trunk conditioning.

127
A closer
view

Alcatel 5620 Network

Manager AAR
AAR is a comprehensive network level rerouting algorithm that uses the network
database in the Alcatel 5620 NM to dynamically reroute paths during network
failures. AAR reroutes paths first by locating idle bandwidth within the network,
and second by bumping paths of lower priority.

If a fault occurs along any path, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically reroutes paths
by scanning its network-wide database for idle bandwidth, including
noncontiguous 800 b/s HCM elements.

An example of AAR in a network is shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12: Alcatel 5620 NM Automatic Alternate

Routing

3600/3600
3600/3
+
600+
MainStreet
node MainStreet
node

Alternate path

Alternate path

3600/3600+ 3600/3600+
MainStreet node MainStreet node

Alcatel 5620 PBX

Network Manager
15165

ISDN leased-line
protection The ISDN backup application provides RAPID-like protection of leased lines using
nondedicated connections through the PSTN. In situations in which out-of-band
signaling is not needed and the backup connection does not need to be extremely
fast, ISDN B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.

The leased lines can be protected by either 2B+D lines terminating on BRI S/T
cards, 23B+D lines terminating on Dual T1-cards, or 30B+D lines terminating on
Dual E1 cards.

128
 3. Design

In these backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a

leased line uses a BRI interface as its alternative path. A one-to-one mapping of
channels from preferred to alternative paths is normally used. If a particular
application needs one ISDN interface to back up many channels, the network
manager can program ISDN backup using AAR. In these cases, the ISDN
backup connection is programmed as a preferred connection.

If a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches the
leased circuits to a BRI with the appropriate pre-programmed dialing
information. The answering node disconnects the specified channel from its
preferred path and connects it to the B channel specified by the network.

Octal T1 and Octal E1

card redundancy Octal T1 and Octal E1 card redundancy allows a connected Octal T1 or Octal
E1 card to be protected by a mate card, which provides interface redundancy. A
master and a slave card are connected with a Y-cable to a distribution panel
through
25- pair connectors located on the bulkhead behind each card. The physical lines
that connect two pairs of redundant Octal T1 or Octal E1 cards are made
between the distribution panels on both nodes.

An activity switch normally occurs when one card is able to give a higher level
of service than the mate card. The following conditions can contribute to a
situation that triggers an activity switch:

• protection switching commands

• card status
• port status and majority vote
• protection switching parameters

Other aggregate
interface card In addition to RAPID and AAR, the following aggregate interface cards can be
redundancy duplicated within the same shelf to protect against card failure:

• Single 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards

• Single 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards using the T1 LIM
• X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI aggregate cards (both 56 kb/s and n  64
kb/s variants)
• V.35 PRI aggregate cards (both 56 kb/s and n  64 kb/s variants)

Figure 3-13 shows two aggregate cards configured for interface redundancy.
When the cards disagree on the severity of an alarm and the active card declares a
more severe error for at least 2 seconds, an activity switch occurs (that is, the
backup card takes over). After an activity switch, the faulty card continues to
monitor the incoming data. If after 3 minutes the faulty card continues to raise
alarms, it is effectively taken out of service and aggregate redundancy for the link
is unavailable until a replacement card is provided. If the faulty card
demonstrates normal operation, fault processing terminates and the card resumes
its backup role.
129
A closer
view

Figure 3-13: Aggregate interface redundancy

DS3 LAC

Central
Aggregate I/F (a) Regular LAC office
Aggregate I/F (b)
E/O I/F
Protection LAC

3600/3600+
PBX MainStreet node
Central office Customer premises
Transmission facilities Public network

1125

2.048 Mb/s E1 card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards
configured for interface redundancy include:

• Severity 1 (highest)
• loss of framing alignment on the E1 link
• loss of incoming signal
• the received data stream is all binary ones, indicating that the far-
end E1 device has lost framing alignment
• Severity 2
• loss of multiframe alignment on the E1 link
• an all ones alarm appears on the signaling channel, indicating an alarm
at the far end of the link
• Severity 3
• severely errored data is received for 10 consecutive seconds, indicating
that the far end may have been taken out of service
• the tolerable framing error rate has been exceeded
• Severity 4
• the far end raises an alarm (other than an all-ones alarm)

130
 3. Design

1.544 Mb/s T1 card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards
configured for interface redundancy include:

• Severity 1 (highest)
• loss of T1 framing synchronization (Red Alarm)
• loss of incoming signal
• Severity 2
• severely errored data is received for 10 consecutive seconds, indicating
that the far end may have been taken out of service
• the tolerable framing error rate has been exceeded
• Severity 3
• the far end cannot synchronize to the framing of the local
T1 (Yellow Alarm)

X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two X.21 or V.35 PRI aggregate
cards (56 kb/s and n  64 kb/s variants) configured for interface redundancy
include:

• Severity 1 (highest)
• loss of framing alignment
• Severity 2
• the far-end link has raised an alarm

Aggregate power-loss
bypass In the event of power loss, the 1.544 Mb/s T1 (with a T1 LIM) and 2.048 Mb/s E1
cards provide a link bypass relay that routes traffic around the faulty node to
prevent the total loss of traffic in drop and insert or tandem node configurations.
Aggregate card power-loss bypass and interface redundancy are mutually
exclusive.

Fault signaling and trunk

conditioning Fault signaling is used to transmit predefined signaling and data information
from voice ports, OCU-DP channel units, 64 kb/s Codirectional card ports, and
aggregate and high-speed aggregate links. Transmission of these codes occurs
when the interface is not cross-connected to anything, or when the UCS card to
which it is cross-connected is unavailable (for example, the UCS card is
missing).

Fault signaling is also applied by trunk conditioning when a port or aggregate

timeslot is cross-connected to an aggregate or high-speed aggregate card
whoselink is experiencing alarms and/or high error rates. When trunk
conditioning is invoked, the node breaks the cross-connection between the
interface and the faulty aggregate link in both directions and inserts fault
signaling and data codes. In addition, ATM Services, T1, E1, Optical Extension,
MPA, TTC2M, and X.21 and
V.35 aggregate cards support an optional one-way trunk conditioning mode. In
131
A closer
view
this case, a link is
viewed as two
unidirectional links and
trunk conditioning is
applied only to the link
indicating a problem.

132
 3. Design

The events that invoke trunk conditioning on a port or tandem aggregate channel
depend on the type of aggregate to which the channel is cross-connected. For
example, the following fault conditions can be enabled to trigger trunk
conditioning:

• T1 Red Alarms, Yellow Alarms, Failed State conditions, Framing Error

State conditions, and CSU loopbacks
• E1, V.35 PRI, and X.21 PRI aggregate Frame Alignment alarms,
Multiframe Alignment alarms, Distant alarms, Failed State conditions, and
framing errors (E1 only)

Signaling information is transmitted by CAS (TS16) for E1 links and the

supervisory channel for X.21 and V.35 PRI links. For Dual T1 cards equipped
with a TSM, signaling is transmitted in timeslot 24. Signaling codes are
propagated through tandem nodes, including cross-connections between different
aggregate types (for example, T1-to-V.35 PRI, T1-to-E1, E1-to-X.21 PRI).

Signaling codes are selectable on a port or timeslot basis. For analog voice ports, the
signaling options include:

• idle, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is a
PBX connected over an incoming trunk
• seized, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is
a PBX connected over a two-way or outgoing trunk

Aggregate and 64 kb/s codirectional links also support idle and seized signaling
codes along with the following:

• OOS-A, OOS-B or OOS-C

These are normally used at tandem nodes to inform remote-end node ports
that an aggregate link on which they have been carried has failed. Ports
that receive this signal and have RAPID functionality configured
automatically switch to their protecting path (see Figure 3-11).
• Custom
Custom allows the user to specify two codes: the first is transmitted for
approximately 2.5 seconds, then the second code is transmitted until the fault
condition clears.
• Hold
Hold continues to transmit the signaling code present when the fault occurred.

In the data stream, voice ports transmit no voice frequency information;

aggregate channels and 64 kb/s codirectional links transmit either all ones or a
user-defined value. For DDS, the ASC and MOS codes are transmitted upstream
and downstream respectively.

133
A closer
view

Control packet The CPSS protocol is a packet-switched system based on the confirmed
switching system datagram service known as Fast Select, which is described in the ITU-T Red
Book (1984), under X.25 specifications. CPSS has built-in link integrity
checking, and supports message retransmission on initial failure and automatic
rerouting on second failure.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses CPSS to

communicate:

• NCI messages (for example, status and control information) to and from the
Alcatel 5620 NM and node management terminal
• ANS information to and from other network nodes
• NCI messages between the control complex and those node elements
with on-card HDLC controllers (ATM Services, Dual T1, Dual T1-2,
Dual E1, Dual E1-2, FRS, X.25 FRE, FRE, and DCP cards, and DTUs)

CPSS channels can be designated in several ways to accommodate a wide range

of network configurations. For communications with a locally connected
Alcatel 5620 NM or the node management terminal, the 3600 + MainStreet
system designates an RS-232 link for CPSS that can terminate on Control card
serial ports or DCP card serial ports.

For communications with a remote Alcatel 5620 NM, and for the exchange of
ANS information with other nodes, CPSS channels can be designated on a variety
of links.

Valid links include any of the following:

• timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

• the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
• the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56
kb/s and n  64 kb/s variants)
• all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link
• Control card and DCP card serial ports over modems over the PSTN

NCI messages can also be communicated using CPSS over the UDP/IP. That is,
NCI messages can be transported inband by IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs.

For communications involving node elements with on-card HDLC controllers,

the 3600/3600+ MainStreet architecture automatically configures appropriate
CPSS channels that are transparent to the operation of the node. Other node
elements are controlled directly by the Control card. Should a node ever become
isolated from the network, a backup CPSS route can be provided using modems
and the PSTN.

134
 3. Design

The initial release of CPSS provided a distance vector routing algorithm (router
version 1) and basic CPSS messaging and link costing options. CPSS v2,
introduced with Release 5.0, better accommodates large, complex networks by
providing:

• an improved routing algorithm

This provides greater reliability, support for bigger networks, and a faster
healing time (the time required to update the routing tables in all CPSS routing
nodes after the failure of a CPSS link).
• enhanced network layer services
This allows for better error detection, larger-sized packets (for higher
throughput), and a new datagram service (for better performance).
• CPSS subnetworking (domains)
CPSS v2 nodes can be organized into groups called domains, allowing a
large CPSS network to be divided into smaller subnetworks. All
subnetworks can be controlled by the same network manager, but each node
need only know the topology of its own subnetwork, reducing routing
complexity and improving performance and reliability.

CPSS bandwidth
between nodes
CPSS channels between nodes or between a node and its locally connected
Alcatel 5620 NM or node management terminal, can be 4 kb/s or n  8 kb/s, up
to 64 kb/s. The bandwidth dedicated to CPSS varies according to node size and
network configuration.

Generally, 4 kb/s is sufficient between feeder nodes and hubs, while 16 kb/s is
sufficient between backbone nodes in medium-sized networks. Within the
3600/3600+ MainStreet unit, the Control card and DCP card provide routing,
sourcing, and termination of CPSS channels. These cards provide HDLC
controllers to support the following CPSS channels:

• CPSS channels supported by the Control card

• 24 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS
channel operating at 4, 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s
• CPSS channels supported by the DCP card
• 31 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS
channel operating at 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s
• 23 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS channel
operating at 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s, and 8 dedicated HDLC controllers,
each supporting one CPSS channel operating at 4 kb/s

Control card and DCP card CPSS channels at 4 kb/s use a special 4 kb/s
transparent subrate data format. These channels are converted to an HCM format
when they are multiplexed by an HCM or transparent SRM (located on a DPM2,
a DSP2 card or a DSP3 card), or switched by an SRS DS0 port. Alternatively, a 4
kb/s CPSS channel can be cross-connected to the FDL channel on a T1 link.
Larger networks can employ several DCP cards. Consult your Alcatel
representative for the configuration information appropriate to your network
135
A closer
view
application.

136
 3. Design

SONET and SDH Data communications channels are used to provide level 1 intermediate system
data OSI routing in accordance with GR-255-CORE SONET and ITU-T G.784 SDH
communications standards. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system uses data communications channels
channels to route OSI messages from other SONET or SDH networks to appropriate
destination nodes.

Node and network This section describes the range of synchronization options supported by the
synchronization 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. Both the eligible
timing sources and the algorithms used to select them are discussed.

Node timing sources The task of synchronizing a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit to a network is
performed by the Timing card. The timing source that drives the Timing card is
selected from the programmable timing sources available to the system (or the
Stratum-3 system clock can be allowed to free-run). Timing sources can be
configured as either external or derived.

If configured as external, the timing source is an external device connected to a

bulkhead BNC or DB25 connector. Only one external timing source can be
configured for each node, but redundant timing sources can be provisioned. If
configured as derived, the timingsource is any of the following HSA, aggregate, and
data interfaces:

• HSA interfaces
• OC-3 cards
• STM-1 cards
• aggregate interfaces
• ATM Services cards
• Single E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, Octal E1 cards
• Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards
• Optical Extension cards
• MPA cards
• X.21 PRI cards
• X.21 ESI PRI cards
• V.35 PRI cards
• data interfaces
• 64 kb/s Codirectional cards
• BRI S/T cards
• DCCs

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit can be configured to select the current source of
synchronization based on a hierarchy of preferred synchronization sources.
Preferred synchronization sources can be predefined using a class system method
(class mode) or by using a quality level method (status message mode).

137
A closer
view

In class mode, the node is assigned a class number of 1 to 14. The source class is
a measure of how desirable a source is: the lower the class number, the more
desirable the source.

In status message mode, a synchronization status message received by the

3600/3600+ MainStreet node from the source defines the quality level of the
source. The current source of synchronization is selected based on the source
offering the best quality level.

In both class and status message mode, if two or more sources have the same
class number or quality level (respectively), the source with the highest priority
is selected. Priority is dictated by a source number assigned to the source (lower
source numbers have a higher priority). Up to four synchronization sources can
be prioritized.

Synchronization methods The programmable timing source that drives the Timing card can be chosen
using one of two methods: standalone synchronization or Automatic Network
Synchronization.

Standalone synchronization
Normally, standalone synchronization is used when a node is used in a
single-ended or point-to-point application. When operating in standalone mode,
the node uses only those timing sources that have been configured at that node.
Preferred standalone synchronization sources are defined using either the class or
synchronization status messaging method.

Synchronization status messages are used to determine the current

synchronization source when status message mode is enabled. The timing source
offering the best quality, as indicated by its status message, is selected to be the
current source.

Status messages are defined for SONET and SDH interfaces and for external
timing input and output DS1 signals in ESF format. Table 3-7 lists the status
messages and their SONET, SDH, and DS1 descriptions.

A source is initially defined as having a quality level of STU until a valid

synchronization status message is received. This means sources that do not
support or are not enabled for status message reception always have a quality
level of STU.

Sources having a current quality level below a configured quality threshold are
treated as unavailable and are not used for synchronization. For example, a
source with a quality level of DUS cannot become the current synchronization
source for the node.

138
 3. Design

Table 3-7: Synchronization status messages

Status Quality level SONET description SDH description DS1 description

message
PRS 1 Primary reference source is Primary reference source Primary reference source
traceable traceable (as defined in ITU-T traceable
G.811)
STU 2 Synchronized – Synchronized – traceability Synchronized –
traceability unknown unknown traceability unknown
ST2 3 Traceable Stratum 2 Traceable to SDH Traceable Stratum 2
holdover synchronization unit (as holdover
defined in ITU-T G.812T)
ST3 4 Traceable Stratum 3 Traceable to SDH element Traceable Stratum 3
holdover clock (as defined in ITU-T holdover
G.812L)
SIC 5 Traceable SONET clock Traceable to synchronous Traceable SONET clock
self-timed equipment timing source (as self-timed
defined in ITU-T G.81s)
ST4 6 – – Traceable Stratum 4
free run
DUS 7 Do not use for Do not use for synchronization Do not use for
synchronization synchronization

The default value for the quality level threshold is ST3, and the range of valid
messages is PRSto ST3. The Timing card internal Stratum 3 clock has a quality
level of ST3 and is always available regardless of the quality level threshold. The
quality level threshold cannot be set to SIC, ST4, or DUS because the Timing
card internal Stratum 3 clock would be selected as the current source before any
source having these quality levels.

If both ANS and status message modes are used for 3600 + MainStreet node
synchronization, there is no direct method to compare class and quality levels;
therefore, a translation table is used to select the best source of timing. The
translation table is configurable through NMTI. Table 3-8 lists the default values
for the translation table.

Table 3-8: Translation table default values

Quality level Status message Class

1 PRS 5
2 STU 8
3 ST2 11
4 ST3 14
5 SIC –
6 ST4 –
7 DUS –

139
A closer
view

As an example, assume the best standalone synchronization source has a quality

level of PRS and the best ANS source has a class rating of 3. Using the default
values listed in Table 3-8, PRS maps to class 5, so the selected source of
synchronization would be the ANS source that has a class 3 rating.

For definitions of the status messages listed in Table 3-8, see Table 3-7.

Automatic network synchronization

ANS is a mechanism that ensures all nodes in a network are using the same
timing source, whether the source is local or remote. Key features of ANS are its
ability to prioritize up to 16 timing sources, tolerate plesiochronous network
configurations, and eliminate timing loops in large networks.

ANS v2 better accommodates large complex networks. ANS v2 features are:

• independence from the CPSS network

ANS v2 uses CPSS to transport synchronization information between ANS
nodes. However, changes in the CPSS network are transparent to the ANS
network. When the CPSS network heals itself after the failure of a CPSS
link, there is no change in synchronization sources.
• flexible ANS link options
Previously, all ANS links had to be configured with exactly one CPSS
channel. With CPSSv2 and ANS v2, the user is free to configure anyvalid
link as an ANS link regardless of the link’s CPSS configuration. Avalid
ANS link may carry no CPSS channels, one CPSS channel, or more than one
CPSS channel.
• enhanced network layer services
ANS v2 can take advantage of all the improved network layer CPSS packet
transmission services provided by CPSS v2, including better error detection,
larger-sized packets (for higher throughput), and a new datagram service
(for better performance).
• ANS subnetworking (zones)
ANS v2 nodes can be organized into independently synchronized groups
called zones, allowing a large ANS network to be divided into smaller
subnetworks to improve performance and reliability and to better support
plesiochronous networks.

In a network of Alcatel products running ANS v2, any number of timing sources
can be identified, but only one timing source provides network timing at any
instant within a sector. This timing source is referred to as the sector’s current
timing source.

The key to implementing ANS v2 is to specify which timing source is preferred

as the current source. Next, determine which source should take over in case the
first source fails, which source should take over in case both the first and second
sources fail, and so on. Several failure scenarios should be considered.

140
 3. Design

Once the network source preferences are identified, a class number (1 to 14) is
assigned to each: the higher the preference, the lower the class number.
Preference may be determined by a source’s accuracy or its reliability, or by
some other factor or combination of factors, depending upon the network and the
timing sources available.

Timing sources can be assigned the same class number provided they can be traced
back to the same source along identical paths (that is, paths that provide no or
equivalent degradation of the timing signal).

When the timing sources have been configured and ANSv2 has been enabled,
each multi-aggregate Alcatel product running ANS v2 in the network
automatically generates a map of all network timing sources. Each time a
configuration change occurs, the map is updated (for example, when a new 3600
+
MainStreet multiplexer is brought online or when a timing source is
reconfigured).

From this map, nodes automatically select the synchronization source with the
lowest class number as their timing source. If the best timing source is accessible
from a number of nodes, the node selects the source that is the fewest number of
hops away (a hop is a link between two pieces of network equipment). ANS v2
information is communicated between nodes using CPSS.

Plesiochronous networks It may be desirable or necessary to define network sectors that have
independent timing hierarchies. For example, an international network may
have a
North American sector synchronized to the Bell System Reference Frequency, a
European sector synchronized to the British Standard Clock, and an
Asia/Pacific sector synchronized to the local PTT clock. Networks designed
with this configuration are called plesiochronous networks.

Because two or more synchronization sources are in use at the same time, frame
slips can occur on aggregate links joining different sectors. With this in mind,
3600/3600+ MainStreet nodes have been designed to behave in a controlled and
predictable manner when used in plesiochronous networks. For example, all
aggregate cards contain slip buffers, and when a slip occurs, the disruption is
limited to the loss or duplication of a single frame at only one node. Frame
synchronization is also maintained during a controlled slip.

Table 3-9 provides information on ITU-T plesiochronous network performance

categories. Table 3-10 providesstatistical information on the expected rate of
frame slips based on various node/network synchronization timing sources. It
shows the acceptable slip performance for an international network.

The performance categories have been recommended for both voice and data
connections. These values cover all sources of slips, such as temporary loss of
timing control at an intermediate node and slips due to plesiochronous operation.

141
A closer
view

Comparing Tables 3-9 and 3-10, it is evident that only the Stratum-1 and British
Clock Tolerance would meet the ITU-T performance objectives for an end-to-
end connection involving one plesiochronously operated link (that is, a link
between two Stratum-1 clocks provides an MSR of one slip every 72.3 days,
while a link between Stratum-1 and British Standard clocks provides an MSR of
one slip every
34.4 hours). If more links were used in the connection involving further
subnetworks, slip performance would be reduced.

Table 3-9: ITU-T performance category for international networks

Performance Mean slip rate (1) Percentage of time

category stated MSR is achieved
a < 5 slips in 24 hours > 98.9%
b > 5 slips in 24 hours and < 30 slips in 1 < 1.0%
hour
c > 30 slips in 1 hour < 0.1%

Note
1. Averaged over one or more years.

Table 3-10: Probability of slips in plesiochronous networks

Clock Stratum-1 Stratum-2 Stratum-3 Stratum-4 British ITU-T SCC3

tolerance standard G.703 free
run

Stratum-1 (1) 72.3 d 2.2 h 27.2 s 3.9 s 34.4 h 2.5 s 5.0 s

Stratum-2 (2) 2.2 h 65.1 min 27.1 s 3.9 s 2.0 h 2.5 s 5.0 s

Stratum-3 (3) 27.2 s 27.1 s 13.6 s 3.4 s 27.2 s 2.3 s 4.2 s

Stratum-4 (4) 3.9 s 3.9 s 3.4 s 2.0 s 3.9 s 1.5 s 2.2 s

British 34.4 h 2.0 h 27.2 s 3.9 s 17.4 h 2.5 s 5.0 s

Standard (5)
ITU-T 2.5 s 2.5 s 2.3 s 1.5 s 2.5 s 1.2 s 1.7 s
G.703 (6)
SCC3 Free 5.0 s 5.0 s 4.2 s 2.2 s 5.0 s 1.7 s 2.5 s
Run (7)

Legend d
= days
h = hours
min = minutes
s = seconds

Notes
1. Stratum-1 clock tolerance 1.0 x 10-11
2. Stratum-2 clock tolerance 1.6 x 10-8
3. Stratum-3 clock tolerance 4.6 x 10-6
4. Stratum-4 clock tolerance 3.2 x 10-5
5. British Standard clock tolerance 1.0 x 10-9
6. ITU-T G.703 clock tolerance 5.0 x 10-5
7. Control card free run clock tolerance 2.5 x 10-5

142
 4
Connections
This chapter describes the network and external equipment connections of the
3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager

Network The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system connectors provide the interfaces between
connections voice and data communications equipment, and to the aggregate (public or
private) network.

Table 4-1 lists the location and type of voice interface connectors.

Table 4-1: Voice interface connectors

Interface type Card and/or channel unit (1) Connector location (2)
4WTO 4WTO line card Bulkhead
4WDX channel unit Bulkhead
E&M E&M card and E&M channel unit Bulkhead
LGE LGE card and LGE channel unit Bulkhead
LGS LGS card and LGS channel unit Bulkhead
MRD MRD channel unit Bulkhead
2WMRD channel unit Bulkhead

Notes
1. All channel units are installed in a Common Carrier card; the connector location and type listed are those
of the Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.

139
A closer
view

Table 4-2 lists the location and type of data interface connectors.

Table 4-2: Data interface connectors

Interface type Card and/or Connector location (2)

channel unit (1)
2B+D 27LC2 line card Backplane or bulkhead
27LC3 line card Backplane or bulkhead
2B1Q line card Backplane or bulkhead
DNIC line card Backplane or bulkhead
2B1Q channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
BRI S/T card Backplane or bulkhead
4-wire DSU/CSU OCU-DP channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
4-wire no signaling 4WTO channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
DSX-0 DS0-DP Backplane or bulkhead
Full duplex synchronous (G.703) 64 kb/s Codirectional card Backplane or bulkhead
Multi-rate HDSL 28LC line card Backplane or bulkhead
RS-232/V.24 RS-232 DCC Faceplate
Backplane or bulkhead
RS-449/V.36 RS-422 DCC Faceplate
Backplane or bulkhead
RS-449 /X.21 RS-422 DCC Faceplate
Backplane or bulkhead
X.21 DCC Faceplate (3)
Backplane or bulkhead
RS-530-A RS-422 DCC Faceplate
Backplane or bulkhead
V.35 RS-422 DCC Faceplate
Backplane or bulkhead
V.35 DCC Faceplate (3)
Backplane or bulkhead

Notes
1. All channel units are installed in a Common Carrier card; the connector location and type listed are those
of the Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.
3. Available on the 6-circuit version only.

140
4. Connections

Table 4-3 lists the location and type of HSA interface connectors.

Table 4-3: HSA interface connectors

Interface type Card Connector Connector type

location
DS3 coaxial HSA DS3 card Faceplate BNC (on MAU)
OC-3 optical OC-3 card, Long reach Faceplate FC/PC pair
OC-3 card, Intermediate reach Faceplate Duplex SC
STM-1 optical STM-1 card, Long haul Faceplate FC/PC pair
STM-1 card, Short haul Faceplate Duplex SC
STM-1 electrical STM-1 card, Electrical Faceplate BNC

Table 4-4 lists the location and type of aggregate interface connectors.

Table 4-4: Aggregate interface connectors

Interface type Card Connector Connector type

location
E1 Dual Optical Extension Faceplate Single mode FC optical
Bulkhead DB25
Single Optical Extension Faceplate Single mode FC optical
Bulkhead DB25
Dual E1-2 Faceplate BNC
Bulkhead DB25
Dual E1 Faceplate BNC
Bulkhead DB25
Single E1 Faceplate BNC
Bulkhead DB25
Octal E1 Bulkhead DB25
ATM Services Bulkhead DB25
RS-530A MPA Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
RS-449 MPA Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
T1 Dual T1-2 Faceplate RJ48C
Bulkhead DB25
Dual T1 Faceplate RJ48C
Bulkhead DB25
Single T1 Faceplate RJ48C DB25
Bulkhead
Octal T1 Bulkhead DB25
ATM Services Bulkhead DB25

141
A closer
view

Interface type Card Connector Connector type

location
TTC2M TTC2M Faceplate DB15
Bulkhead DB25
V.35 MPA Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
V.35 PRI Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
X.21/V.11 MPA Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
X.21 PRI Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25
X.21 ESI PRI Faceplate DB25
Bulkhead DB25

External Table 4-5 lists the shelf connectors that provide access to power supplies or
equipment external equipment.
connections
Table 4-5: Power supply and external equipment connectors

Power supply or external Location Connector type

equipment
Power supply 1 to 3 Power Supply cards in reserved Terminal block
power slots (for 1 or 2 dc feeds)
External alarm source Bulkhead DB25
Node management Bulkhead, Control card faceplate RJ45
Ringing generator Bulkhead DB25
Timing inputs and outputs Bulkhead 75  BNC
120  DB25

142
5
System cards
System cards perform high-level functions, such as:

• DS0-based switching for all circuits

• broadband switching at the VT or TU level
• maintaining a nonvolatile database of all system connections
and configurations
• generation, termination, and routing of CPSS management protocol messages
• routing of OSI messages through the SONET/SDH section DCC
• NMTI or a node management station interfacing
• maintenance and diagnostic functions
• system timing and synchronization
System card faceplates are shown in Figure 5-
1.

143
A closer
view

Figure 5-1: System cards

Test Card

Control
Fac. Equip
AB
C

Tx
Rx
Tx Rx

D
S
Display S1
Serial Port 1 Status

Activity Status
Active Status
Timing

DCE

Control Test Timing

card card card
11332

Control card The Control card provides all common control and node management facilities
for the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager.

The Control card:

• interfaces with the node or network manager

• controls the configuration database and system clocks
• coordinates the network synchronization signals
• runs the system software
• controls all narrowband and broadband interfaces and connections

A Control card must be installed in the shelf for the 3600 + MainStreet unit to
operate. The Control card needs a Timing card to bring interface cards into
service, and Timing card activity is coupled to the activity of the Control card.

Modules installed on the Control card allow the 3600 + MainStreet unit to
access the full range of narrowband and broadband slots and to maintain an
extra bank of Flash memory.

With no module installed, the Control card provides access to the upper eight
UCS slots (A1 to A8) in the shelf.

144
 5. System cards

The Narrowband Switching module provides extended DS0 switching

capabilities to the 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf, and enables the system to
communicate with the lower eight UCS slots (B1 to B8) in the shelf. The module
is used to supply nonblocking 64 kb/s switching for all the UCS and HSA slots.

The Broadband Switching module allows the Control card to interface with the
upper eight UCS slots (A1 to A8), VT-1.5 or TU-12 mapper cards installed in
slot H3, and OC-3 or STM-1 cards installed in slots H1, H2, and H3. The
module provides 155 Mb/s broadband switching at the VT or TU level for each
HSA slot in the shelf.

With both the Narrowband and Broadband modules installed, the Control card
provides access to all 16 UCS slots and the VT-1.5 or TU-12 mapper cards or
the OC-3 or STM-1 cards installed in slots H1, H2, and H3.

The Bank-B Memory module provides the Control card with an extra bank of
Flash memory and SRAM, enabling Class I software upgrading. If a software
generic upgradefails, you can downgrade to the previous generic immediately
since the previous software generic and configuration database are not lost.

Configuration of narrowband and broadband connections is performed through

the Control card using either the NMTI, Craft Interface, or Alcatel 5620 NM.

In a nonredundant configuration, you can install the Control card in either of

two dedicated card slots, CTL-A or CTL-B. These slots are linked to the TIM-
A and TIM-B (Timing card) slots, respectively. Therefore, you must install the
Control card in the slot that is linked to the slot containing the Timing card. In a
redundant configuration, you install Control cards in both CTL-A and CTL-B
slots.

Timing card The Timing card generates timing for all cards in a 3600/3600+ MainStreet
shelf. The Timing card allows a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system to synchronize
its timing to any interface in a shelf, and has access to input and output
connectors that allow the card to derive timing from, or generate timing for,
external devices.

The Timing card is an integral part of the control complex. The Control card
needs a Timing card to bring interface cards into service. Timing card activity is
coupled to the activity of the Control card. Each Timing card performs
diagnostics on its own hardware and reports the results to the Control card.

In a nonredundant configuration, you can install the Timing card in either of two
dedicated card slots, TIM-A or TIM-B. These slots are linked to the CTL-A and
CTL-B slots, respectively. Therefore, you must install the Timing card in the
slot that is linked to the slot containing the Control card. In a redundant
configuration, you install Timing cards in both TIM-A and TIM-B slots.

145
A closer
view

Test card The Test card provides test access to voice and data circuits through:

• digital access (at the DS0 level) between digital test equipment and any
aggregate card, the 64 kb/s Codirectional card or the OCU-DP channel
unit
• metallic access to the tip and ring pairs of the voice channel units and
the signaling leads of the E&M channel unit

The Test card can be installed only in the MTA slot.

Test module The Test module, which is installed on the Test card, provides analog and digital
tone tests. The module generates an analog or digital sinusoidal test tone which
has a configurable frequency and output level.

The Test module monitors the quality of digital data links, and can be used to
conduct frequency and amplitude tests on cabling connections, external
equipment, channel units, and local digital components.

Common The Common Carrier card acts like an extension of a shelf backplane, enabling the
Carrier card installation of up to four single-circuit channel units. The Common Carrier card is
transparent to the operation of the system and the channel units, and can be
installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs. The signals are passed over two control
serial buses and one data serial bus.

Figure 5-2 shows the four channel unit positions on a Common Carrier card.

Figure 5-2: Common Carrier

card

Common
Carrier card
(has four channel
unit positions)

15037

146
 5. System cards

Control card Tables 5-1 to 5-6 list the Control card configurable features.
configurable
features Table 5-1: Timing and synchronization configurable features

Feature Options
ANS
ANS operation Enabled
Disabled
ANS zones 1 to 255
Link failure recovery time 1 to 255
Link failure threshold 0 to 10
SSU failure recovery time 1 to 255
SSU failure threshold 1 to 5
Standalone timing source
Derived and external timing sources External
Derived
External timing input 8 kHz
2 MHz
1.544 MHz
Composite clock

External timing output 8 kHz

2 MHz
1.544 MHz
No clock

Node class number 1 to 14

Source failure recovery method Auto
30 s 1
min
10 min
30 min
Manual

Source failure threshold 0 to 30

Unlimited
Timing source class number 1 to 14
Timing source External
Derived
Undefined

Timing source enable/disable Enabled

Disabled
Timing source selection Selected Deselected

147
A closer
view

Table 5-2: Node configurable features

Feature Options
Date <dd-MMM-yyyy>
Node name Up to 12 alphanumeric characters (no
spaces, no underscores)
Time <hh:mmA or <hh:mmP or <hh:mmH>

Table 5-3: Access level and password configurable features

Feature Options
Access level 0 Level 0
No level 0
Access level 5 Level 5 + password
Access levels 1 to 4 Level 1 + password
Level 2 + password
Level 3 + password
Level 4 + password

Access level definition Read and write

Read only
No access

Passwords 8 to 12 characters, no spaces

Table 5-4: CPSS configurable features

Feature Options
4 kb/s CPSS 4 kb/s
8 kb/s
16 kb/s
Cost of dedicated CPSS Normal Bias
against
Bias towards

Cost of shared CPSS Normal

Bias against
Bias towards
CPSS node number 1 to 999

148
 5. System cards

Feature Options
Domain number 1 to 32000
Interface speed 4 kb/s
8 kb/s
16 kb/s
48 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
NOC number Up to 30 characters
Router version Version 1
Version 2
Satellite delay Satellite
Normal

Table 5-5: Control redundancy configurable features

Feature Options
Activity switch (forced) Release control
Activity switch (programmed) Name of the day
Daily
Time (hh:mmA or <hh:mmP or <hh:mmH)

Automatic activity switch disable Enable

Disable
Control complex redundancy Simplex
Redundant
Standby mode Hot
Warm

149
A closer
view

Table 5-6: Serial port configurable features

Feature Options
Baud rate 300 b/s
600 b/s
1200 b/s
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
38400 b/s
Auto baud
CPSS cost Normal
Bias against
Bias toward
Device type VT100
Printer
CPSS
CPSS modem
Call logger

Flow control Software

Hardware
None

Test card and Tables 5-7 and 5-8 list the Test card and Test module configurable features,
Test module respectively.
configurable
Table 5-7: Test card configurable features
features
Feature Options
Card operation
Card slot Test card
Digital DS0 circuit
25-pair connector Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)
Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Error correction Enabled
Disabled
Fault signaling code A hexadecimal number: 00 to FF
Interface speed 2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s

150
 5. System cards

Feature Options
Metallic test access connections
25-pair connector Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)
Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Metallic test access Direct monitor
High-impedance monitor
Split access
4-wire loopback

Table 5-8: Test module configurable features

Feature Options
Card operation
Card modules Test module
No module
Tone tester
Companding law Mu-law
A-law
Line impedance 600 
900 
Transmission mode 2-wire
4-wire
BERT
Data position F0-B6 to F7-B0
Rate adaption method HCM
Transparent
DDS
Signaling Enabled
Disabled
Transport position B0 to B7
Transport bandwidth 1 to 8
Tone tester maintenance
Analog tone test amplitude –40 to +10 dBm in 1 dB increments
Analog tone test direction Equipment
Facility
Digital tone test amplitude –40 to 0 dBm in 1 dBm increments
Loopback Loopback C
Tone frequency 200 to 3400 Hz in 1 Hz increments
Tone tester test Enabled
Disabled

151
A closer
view

Feature Options
Tone type Single tone
White noise
Quiet tone

BERT maintenance
Audible error bell
BERT pattern
BERT statistics
BER test
DDS control code
DDS control code parameters
Enable
Disable
n, where n is an integer corresponding to a
BERT pattern
Clear statistics
Enable
Disable
n, where n is an integer corresponding to a
DDS control code
Show status of last eight MJUs
Show last eight Tx DDS codes
Show last eight Rx DDS codes

Inject BER None

1.00E-1
1.00E-2
1.00E-3
1.00E-4
1.00E-5
1.00E-6
1.00E-7
Inject ERR Inject an error
Loopback Loopback C
Round trip delay measurement Run a round trip delay measurement

152
6
High-speed aggregate cards

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports the

following HSA cards:

• HSA DS3 cards

• OC-3 cards
• STM-1 cards
• TU-12 mapper cards (16-port and 32-port)
• VT-1.5 mapper cards (16-port and 32-port)

The HSA DS3 card provides a high-speed narrowband aggregate interface. The
other HSA cards operate in pairs to map narrowband data onto broadband
circuits. The VT-1.5 mapper and OC-3 cards are used in SONET applications,
and the TU-12 mapper and STM-1 cards are used in SDH applications.

HSA card faceplates are shown in Figure 6-1.

153
A closer
view

Figure 6-1: HSA cards

OC-3 IR OC-3 LR
OC

Local Alarm
DS3 Card
Local Alarm

Remote Alarm

Remote Alarm

Local Alarm

Active Status
Active Active Remote Alarm

Status Status

HSA DS3
OC-3 card OC-3 card
Intermediate reach Long reach

STM-1 LH STM-1 SH STM-1 Elec. TU 12 VT1.5

Local Alarm Local Alarm

Local Alarm Local Alarm Local Alarm

Remote Alarm Remote Alarm
Active Status Active Status
Active
Remote Alarm ActiveAlarm
Remote ActiveAlarm
Remote

Status Status Status

STM-1
STM-1 STM-1 TU-12 mapper VT-1.5 mapper card
Long haul
Short haul Electrical card (16-port or (16-port or 32-port)
32-port)

15286

154
 6. High-speed aggregate
cards

HSA DS3 card The HSA DS3 card transports data between a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit and
other DS3-compatible equipment via a single, 44.736 Mb/s DS3 line interface.
The HSA DS3 card terminates the DS3 rate signal, multiplexes and
demultiplexes the constituent DS1 signals asynchronously, and cross-connects
constituent DS0s to different outgoing signals.

The HSA DS3 card supports a total of 28 T1 line interfaces. If the HSA DS3 card is
installed in either HSA slot 1 or HSA slot 2, a Narrowband Switching module is
required on the Control card.

The HSA DS3 card receives data from a MAU on the 3600/3600+ MainStreet shelf
backplane. BNC connectors on the MAU enable connection to other
DS3-compatible equipment via 75  coaxial cable. The maximum cable length is
137 m (450 ft).

OC-3 card The OC-3 card transports data between a 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit and a
SONET network. The OC-3 card receives VT structured data over a backplane
connection with the VT-1.5 mapper card. The OC-3 card then combines the data
onto broadband STS-1 SONET links.

The OC-3 card is compliant with ANSI and Bellcore standards. It provides
termination of SONET section, line, and STS path overhead layers, and monitors
the VT path overhead layer without signal termination.

STM-1 card The STM-1 card transports data between a 3600 + MainStreet unit and an
SDH network. The STM-1 card receives TU structured data from a backplane
connection with the TU-12 mapper card. The STM-1 card then combines the
data onto broadband AU-3 or AU-4 SDH links.

The STM-1 card is compliant with ITU-T standards. The card provides
termination of the regenerator section, multiplexer section, and high order path
overhead layers. The STM-1 card monitors the LO path overhead layer without
termination.

TU-12 mapper card The TU-12 mapper card is available in 16-port or 32-port variants, and supports:

• 16 or 32 narrowband E1 ports
• 16 or 32 TU-12 broadband circuits

Each narrowband E1 port has the same channelized DS0 bandwidth and
connectivity as an E1 link (2.048 Mb/s).

Each narrowband E1 port has a fixed connection to an associated TU-12

broadband circuit on the TU-12 card. Primary rate links or DS0 circuits
connected to a narrowband E1 port are mapped onto the associated broadband
circuit.

155
A closer
view

VT-1.5 mapper The VT-1.5 mapper card is available in 16-port or 32-port variants, and supports:
card
• 16 or 32 narrowband T1 ports
• 16 or 32 VT-1.5 broadband circuits

Each narrowband T1 port has the same channelized DS0 bandwidth and
connectivity as a standard T1 link (1.544 Mb/s).

Each narrowband T1 port has a fixed connection to an associated broadband

circuit on the VT-1.5 card. Primary rate links or DS0 circuits connected to a
narrowband T1 port are mapped onto the associated broadband circuit.

Configurable Table 6-1 lists the OC-3, STM-1, TU-12, and VT-1.5 card configurable
parameters parameters. Table 6-2 lists the HSA DS3 card configurable parameters. Table 6-3
lists TCA thresholds and default settings.

Table 6-1: OC-3, STM-1, TU-12, and VT-1.5 card configurable parameters

Parameter Option Card

Slot

1+1 operating mode (1) Unidirectional OC-3

Bidirectional STM-1

1+1 switching type (1) Nonrevertive OC-3

Revertive STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

1+1 working card (1) Subslot A or B OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

1+1 WTR timer (1) 0 to 60 min, in 1-min increments OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

Card name 0 to 8 characters OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

Card type OC-3 OC-3

STM-1 STM-1
TU-12 TU-12
VT-1.5 VT-1.5

Traffic protection mode 1+1 OC-3

Simplex STM-1
Ring TU-12
VT-1.5

156
 6. High-speed aggregate
cards

Parameter Option Card

Broadband port
AIS insertion on EBER response Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
AIS local alarm Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments OC-3
STM-1
APS remote alarm Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1

DCC (2) Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
Near- and far-end TCA thresholds See Table 6-3. OC-3
STM-1
OC-3 outgoing section trace message 0 to 255 OC-3
RFI remote alarm Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
SDH format AU-3 STM-1
AU-4
Section trace Trace OC-3
Section ID STM-1
SES threshold 1 to 65535 OC-3
STM-1
Signal degrade threshold 1 E-5 OC-3
1 E-6 STM-1
1 E-7
1 E-8
1 E-9
Disabled
STM-1 section trace expected As present STM-1
received message 16 or 64 alphanumeric
characters
STM-1 section trace message length 16 byte STM-1
64 byte
STM-1 section trace Tx message 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1
characters
Synchronization System OC-3
Self STM-1
Through

157
A closer
view

Parameter Option Card

Broadband circuit
AIS insertion on EBER Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
AIS local alarm Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s OC-3

STM-1
AU-3 function TUG-2 STM-1
C3

AU-3 or AU-4 signal label (3) Nonspecific STM-1

TU group structured
Broadband circuit SES threshold 0 to 65535 OC-3
STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

Circuit name 0 to 8 characters OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

Circuit provisioning Enabled TU-12

Disabled VT-1.5
Near- and far-end TCA thresholds See Table 6-3. OC-3
STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

OC-3 path trace Tx message (3) 0 to 62 alphanumeric characters OC-3

Path protection hold-off timer (4) 0 to 10 s, in 0.1-s increments OC-3

STM-1

Path protection WTR timer (4) 0 to 60 min, in 0.1-s increments OC-3

STM-1

Path trace message change alarm (3) Enabled OC-3

Disabled
RFI remote alarm Enabled OC-3
Disabled STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5

158
 6. High-speed aggregate
cards

Parameter Option Card

Broadband circuit (continued)
Signal degrade threshold 1 E-5 OC-3
1 E-6 STM-1
1 E-7 TU-12
1 E-8 VT-1.5
1 E-9
Disabled
STM-1 path trace expected receive As present STM-1
message (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric
characters

STM-1 path trace message length (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1

characters

STM-1 path trace Tx message (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1

characters
STS-1 function VT group STM-1
Bulk payload

STS-1 signal label (3) Nonspecific STM-1

VT structured

STS-1 VT group configuration (5) VT-1.5 OC-3

VT-2
VT-3
VT-6

TIM local alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
TU-12 signal label Equipped nonspecific TU-12
Asynchronously mapped E1

TUG-2 configuration (6) TU-11 STM-1

TU-12
TU-2

TUG-3 function TUG-2 STM-1

TU3
VT-1.5 signal label Equipped nonspecific VT-1.5
Asynchronously mapped DS-1

Working circuit (4) Subslot A circuit OC-3

Subslot B circuit STM-1

Narrowband DS1 or E1 ports

Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s TU-12
VT-1.5
CRC reframing Enabled TU-12
Disabled
CRC stats collection CRC errors TU-12
Framing bit errors

159
A closer
view

Parameter Option Card

Narrowband DS1 or E1 ports (continued)
DS1 framing D4 VT-1.5
ESF
E1 framing CAS TU-12
CCS
31 channels
Fault classes Red/frame off or on TU-12
Yellow/distant off or on VT-1.5
Failed off or on
Error off or on

Loopback detection None TU-12

Through CPSS VT-1.5
NU bits 0000 to 1111 TU-12
Trunk conditioning One-way TU-12
Two-way VT-1.5
Zero code suppression Transparent VT-1.5
Jam bit 7
Narrowband DS0 circuits
Clear channels NOSIG VT-1.5
RBS OFF
Custom trunk conditioning, ABCD bits 2- or 4-digit code, E&M TU-12
(idle=0000; seized=1111) VT-1.5
Custom trunk conditioning, data 8-digit code, primary rate TU-12
(00000000 to 11111111)
VT-1.5
E1 signaling types Transparent TU-12
Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE RE
LGE EC

Fault signaling Seized TU-12

Idle VT-1.5
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None

Inversion Inverted (voice) Not TU-12

inverted (data) VT-1.5

160
 6. High-speed aggregate
cards

Parameter Option Card

Narrowband DS0 circuits (continued)
Robbed bit signaling Enabled VT-1.5
Disabled
Super-rate formats Contiguous TU-12
Noncontiguous VT-1.5
Equidistant

T1 signaling types Transparent TU-12

Clear channel VT-1.5
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate (7)

Notes
1. The card must be configured for 1+1 traffic protection.
2. The 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit NET address must be configured before the DCC can be enabled.
3. This option is only available for STS-1, AU-3, and TUG-3 links.
4. This option is only available for STS-1, AU-3, TUG-3, VT, and TU circuits in ring mode.
5. This option is only available for STS-1 links.
6. This option is only available for AU-3 and TUG-3 links.
7. This option is only available for VT-1.5 mapper cards.

Table 6-2: HSA DS3 card configurable parameters

Parameter Options
Slot
Card name 0 to 8 characters
Card type Tertiary

Protection switching options (1) Non-revertive

Revertive

Traffic protection mode Simplex

Access
Interface

Working card (1) Subslot A or B

WTR timer length (1) 0 to 60 min, in 1-min increments

DS3 port
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments

161
A closer
view

Parameter Options
DS3 port (continued)
Application M13
C-bit parity
automatic
DS# performance thresholds Line
Path
Line length Short
Long
Local alarm handling Enable AIS alarm
Disable AIS alarm
Protection switching on BER Disable
Error rate
Remote alarm handling Enable RAI alarm
Disable RAI alarm
X-bit monitoring Enable Disable

DS2 port
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments
Local alarm Enable AIS alarm
Disable AIS alarm
Port name 0 to 8 characters
Remote alarm Enable RAI alarm
Disable RAI alarm
X-bit monitoring Enable Disable

DS1 port
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments
DS1 framing D4
ESF
DS1 performance monitoring SES threshold
TCA thresholds
Fault classes Red off or on
Yellow off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on

Loopback detection None

Through CPSS
Trunk conditioning One-way
Two-way
Zero code suppression Transparent
Jam bit 7

162
 6. High-speed aggregate
cards

Parameter Options
DS0 port
Clear channels NOSIG
RBS OFF
Custom trunk conditioning, ABCD bits 2- or 4-digit code, E&M (idle=0000;
seized=1111)
Custom trunk conditioning, data 8-digit code, primary rate (00000000 to
11111111)
Fault signaling Seized
Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B (ESF only)
OOS-C
None

Inversion Inverted (voice) Not

inverted (data)
Robbed bit signaling Enabled
Disabled
Super-rate formats Contiguous
Noncontiguous
T1 signaling types Transparent
Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate

Note
1. The card must be configured for access or interface traffic protection.

163
A closer
view

Table 6-3: TCA thresholds and default settings

Card Port or circuit Thresholds 15-minute 24-hour

default (1) default (2)
OC-3 OC-3 and STM-1 port CV 25 200
STM-1 ES 20 200
SES 3 7
UAS 10 10

OFS (2) 1 10

SEFS (3) 1 10

OC-3 STS-1, AU-3, or AU-4 link CV 15 125

STM-1 VT or TU circuit ES 12 100
VT-1.5 SES 3 7
TU-12 UAS 10 10

Notes
1. ES, SES, SEFS, UAS, and OFS can be configured with 15-minute thresholds from 0 to 900, and 24-
hour thresholds from 0 to 65535. CV can be configured with 15-minute thresholds from 0 to 16383, and
24-hour thresholds from 0 to 1048575.
2. Applies only to the STM-1 card.
3. Applies only to the OC-3 card.

164
7
Aggregate cards
Aggregate cards provide an interface for aggregate links that can be leased from
service providers in n  64 kb/s increments. The following aggregate cards are
offered to support these interfaces:

• ATM Services card

• E1 cards (Single E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, and Octal T1)
• Multiport Aggregate card
• T1 cards (Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, Octal T1)
• TTC2M
• V.35 PRI
• X.21 PRI
• X.21 ESI PRI
• Optical Extension cards (single and dual)

Figure 7-1 shows the faceplate of each aggregate card.

165
A closer
view

Dual E1 Dual E1 Card 2

Octal E1 Card 2.048 Card X.21 ESI PRI
ATM SC Mbps E1 Card
Card

Line 1
Port 1 TX
Port 2 TX Line 1
Out Out TX
Port 3
Port 4 Out

Port 1 RX RX
Line
Port 2 In In RX
Port 3 In
Port 4 Losync Error
Port 5 BP TX Losync Error Line 2
Port 6 TX Line 2 TX
Port 7 Out Out
Port 8
BP RX
LoSync
RX RX
Activity Status In In
Losync Error Status
Losync Error
Status Losync Error
Activity
Status
Status
Status

X.21/ PRI
Card

Line

Losync

Status

Figure 7-1: Aggregate cards

Multiport Aggregate Card

Port 1

166
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
 Status

7. Aggregate cards
Octal E1 ATM Services E1 card Dual Dual E1-2 X.21 ESI X.21 PRI MPA
card card E1 card card PRI card card card

Dual 1.544 TTC-2M

Dual Optical Extension Card 1.544 Octal T1 Card Mb/s T1 Dual T1 Card 2 V.35 PRI Card
Optical Extension Card Mb/s T1 Card Card
Card

Line 1
Line In Out
Mon LN F.Sync M.Sync LIS
EQ
Red Alarm Ylw Alarm Losync Red Yel Losync Error SAI
Li Error Line 2
Monitor Port 1 In Out
Mon LN
Port 2 EQ
Port 3 Red Yel Losync Error
Line 1 LoSync Port 4
RX TX
Error LoSync Port 5
Error Port 6 Status
Port 7 Losync
Port 8
Bypass
Red Alarm Ylw Alarm Losync Error Status
Red Alarm Ylw Alarm Losync Error
Activity Status
Li

Status
Line
Line

LoSync Error LoSync

Status Error Status

Status Status

90-3541-02

Single
Optical Dual T1 card Octal Dual Dual T1-2 V.35 PRI TTC2M
Extension Optical T1 card T1 card card card card
card Extension
card
15304
Li

167
 7. Aggregate cards

ATM Services card The ATM Services card is a 4-port card that adapts n  64 kb/s circuit-switched and
m  n  8 kb/s packet-switched data for transmission over aggregate links. The
ATM Services card provides three main functions:

• inverse multiplexing over ATM

• circuit emulation service using AAL1 adaptation (including
signaling conversion between E1 and T1)
• HDLC service using AAL5 adaptation (UBR and nrt-VBR)

For more information about these functions and how the ATM Services card
uses and distributes bandwidth, see chapter 2.

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports 4 and 16

Mb/s E1 AAL1 and AAL1/5 variants, and 4 and 16 Mb/s T1 AAL1 and AAL1/5
variants. Each variant:

• supports software downloading (two Flash banks)

• allows link quality monitoring
• supports up to 1024 AAL5 connections per slot
• supports up to 250 AAL5 connections per FSC
• supports network and service (both translated and transparent) interworking
for AAL5
• supports signaling multiframe lengths of 16 and 24 frames, when
AAL1- adapting E1 and T1 circuits, respectively
• complies with relevant sections of ITU-T Q.933 Annex A and ANSI
T1.617 Annex D

The E1 ATM Services card variants:

• provide four 2.048 Mb/s digital trunk interfaces

• provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical
E1 interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
• support R2D for E&M
• provide a software-configurable E1 termination impedance (75 
asymmetrical and 120  symmetrical), which provides a high-
impedance monitoring function

The T1 ATM Services card variants:

• provide four DS1 digital trunk interfaces, with D4 or ESF formats

• provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical
T1 interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
• provide software-configurable line length (DSX-1 or DS1 options)

167
A closer
view

E1 cards This section describes Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards. These cards can
be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.

Single E1 card The Single E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704, and G.732 specifications.
The card:

• provides one channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s DS1 digital trunk

interface with CAS, CCS, or 31-channel formats
• supports R2D for E&M
• accesses both network services and CPE such as digital
PBXs The Single E1 card supports these modules:

• E1 LIM (75  asymmetrical and 120  symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• NTI module, which provides a short-distance E1 interface
• CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding
conversion The Single E1 card supports the following connections:

• bidirectional
• straight-through transparent
• bypass

Dual E1 card The Dual E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at
2.048 Mb/s. The card:

• provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk

interfaces with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats
• connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
• supports R2D for E&M
• accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
• supports unidirectional (one-way and broadcast) and bidirectional
connections

The Dual E1 card supports these modules:

• E1 LIM (75  asymmetrical and 120  symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• E1 HDSL LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level,
and increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA

168
 7. Aggregate cards

The Dual E1 card supports these optional application modules:

• VCM3, which has a full M60 ADPCM transcoder with bundled, delta
signaling channel
• IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary
to conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard

The Dual E1 card supports the following connections:

• simple and broadcast unidirectional

• bidirectional
• straight-through transparent
• bypass
• compressed voice channels, when equipped with a VCM3

Dual E1-2 card The Dual E1-2 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at
2.048 Mb/s. The card:

• provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk

interfaces with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats
• connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
• supports loopback detection
• supports R2D for E&M
• accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
• supports software downloading
• provides errored second and performance threshold alarms
• allows link availability monitoring
• supports a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS
• supports unidirectional (one-way and broadcast) and bidirectional
connections
• supports the E1 LIM (75  asymmetrical and 120  symmetrical),
which provides a short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance
monitoring function that supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• supports the optional FAM, which provides F-AIS detection on the E1 link

169
A closer
view

Octal E1 card The Octal E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704, and G.706 specifications at
2.048 Mb/s. The card:

• provides eight channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk

interfaces with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats
• connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
• provides 1+1 card redundancy
• supports loopback detection
• supports R2D for E&M
• accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
• supports software downloading
• provides errored second and performance threshold alarms
• allows link availability monitoring
• supports a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS
• supports bidirectional connections

Multiport The MPA card provides four primary rate circuits that can be configured
Aggregate card through software to be DCE or DTE, and to support either RS-530-A, RS-449,
X.21, or V.35 interfaces. The card has two alarm contacts that indicate an out-
of-sync condition on the X.21 interface, making it X.21 ESI-compatible.

The MPA card can connect to a total of 60 DS0s for data transport. Each
interface supports n  48, n  56, or n  64 kb/s channels (where n = 1 to 30).

A supervisory channel, TS0, is available on each circuit, and is used to carry

CPSS. Channelization (framing and signaling) is maintained by a proprietary
scheme which also handles alarm messaging and inter-node communications.

The MPA card can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.

T1 cards This section describes Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, and Octal T1 cards.
These cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.

Single T1 card The Single T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel
Bank specifications Pub 43801 and Pub 62411 at 1.544 Mb/s. The card:

• provides one channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interface with D4

or ESF formats
• accesses both fractional and full T1 network services, and CPE such as
digital PBXs and remote channel units
• provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks

170
 7. Aggregate cards

The Single T1 card supports these modules:

• T1 LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DSX-1 level

• DSX-1, CSU, or CSU-2, which provide a primary rate interface at the DS1
level
• T1 IHTU LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level,
and increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA
• CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding conversion

When equipped with a T1 LIM or CSU module, the card provides a

high-impedance monitoring function that supports one-to-one interface
redundancy.

Dual T1 card The Dual T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel
Bank specifications Pub 43801 and Pub 62411 at 1.544 Mb/s. The card:

• provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4

or ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable
SES definition
• accesses both fractional and full T1 network services, and CPE such as
digital PBXs and remote channel units
• cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at
the DS0 level

The Dual T1 card supports these modules:

• T1 LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DSX-1 level

• CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
• T1 IHTU LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level,
and increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA

The Dual T1 card supports these optional modules:

• VCM3, which has a full M48 ADPCM transcoder with bundled, delta
signaling channel
• TSM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits
on the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels

171
A closer
view

Dual T1-2 card The Dual T1-2 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel
Bank specifications Pub 43801 and Pub 62411 at 1.544 Mb/s. The card:

• provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4

or ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable
SES definition
• accesses both fractional and full T1 network services, and CPE such as
digital PBXs and remote channel units
• cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at
the DS0 level
• provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks
• supports ANSI TI.403 and AT&T 54016 performance monitoring
and loopbacks
• is used for customer-premises leased-line and 23B+D ISDN
applications The Dual T1-2 cards support these modules:

• T1 LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DSX-1 level

• CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
• T1 IHTU LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level,
and increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA

The Dual T1-2 card supports these optional modules:

• DRM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits
on the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels; supports loopback
detection on timeslot 24; provides RAPID protection for 24 DS0 super-rate
circuits
• FT1 module, which generates and detects fractional T1 loopback
activation and detection codes according to Annex B ANSI T1.403

172
 7. Aggregate cards

Octal T1 card The Octal T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of ANSI T1.403, GR-
499, AT&T Pub 62411, and ITU-T G.704. The Octal T1 card can be used in
similar situations as the T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards. The Octal T1
card:

• provides eight channelized 1.544 Mb/s DSX-1 T1 interfaces

• supports card redundancy with switch times of less than 50 ms
• accesses full T1 network services and CPE such as digital PBXs and
remote channel units
• cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at
the DS0 level
• supports ANSI TI.403 and AT&T 54016 performance monitoring
and loopbacks
• is used for customer-premises leased-line and 23B+D ISDN applications
• provides a higher port density per UCS position than the DualT1-2 card
• provides circuit loopback C for unconnected units

The Octal T1 card does not support the following functionality provided on the
Dual T1-2 card:

• circuit loopback A
• companding conversion
• fractional T1 access
• fault signaling for 24 DS-0 RAPID connections
• timeslot 24 signaling and TS 24 loopback detection
• LIMs
• voice compression

Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter

The Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter provides wire-wrap access to each port on
the Octal T1 card. This adapter is a PCB comprising a 50-position Telco
connector, wire-wrap posts for transmit and receive, and tip-and-ring signals for
eight T1/E1 ports.

TTC2M card The TTC2M card conforms to TTC Vol. 4 JJ-20.11 specifications. The card:

• provides one channelized 2.048 Mb/s interface

• converts CMI data for processing by PBX equipment
• provides thirty 64 kb/s channels for voice signaling
• carries all framingand channel-associated signaling in thesupervisory
channel, TS0

173
A closer
view

The TTC2M card supports the following cross-connections:

• T1 or E1 card channels (including DS0s on a T3 or E3 interface)

• MPA, V.35 PRI, or X.21 PRI channels
• E&M card channels
• 64 kb/s Codirectional card circuits
• HCV, LD-CELP (G.728), or CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A)
voice compressor inputs
• BRI S/T card channels
• LGS PLAR channels
• channels on another TTC2M card

Super-rate speeds are not supported on the TTC2M card.

The TTC2M card can be installed in any of the 16 shelf

UCSs.

V.35 PRI card The V.35 PRI card presents a V.35 interface at the customer premises that provides
n  64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30) or 56 kb/s. Channelization (framing and signaling)
is maintained by a proprietary scheme that also handles alarm messaging and
internode communications.

There are two V.35 PRI card variants:

• V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-01), which provides 1 to 30 circuits

and an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s
• V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-03), which provides a single 56
kb/s circuit and provides RAPID support between MainStreet nodes

X.21 PRI and The X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards present an X.21/V.11 interface at the
X.21 ESI PRI customer premises that provides n  64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30) or 56 kb/s.
cards Channelization (framing and signaling) is maintained by a proprietary scheme that
also handles alarm messaging and internode communications.

The X.21 ESI PRI card is an X.21 PRI card with an interface lead directly
connected to the card’s supervisory channel HCM synchronization status. This
can be used to provide synchronization loss information to the external devices.

The X.21 PRI card and the X.21 ESI PRI card each provide 1 to 30 circuits and
accommodate an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s.

174
 7. Aggregate cards

Optical Extension Single and Dual Optical Extension cards:

cards
• provide two channelized 2.048 Mb/s E1 interfaces, which conform to ITU-
T G.703 and G.732 specifications, and are used for connecting 64 kb/s data
or voice circuits
• provide one or two factory-installed IOTUs, which convert electrical signals
to optical signals for transmission over long distances (up to 18 km [11 mi])
• support a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS

The Optical Extension cards support the E1 HDSL LIM, an interface module that
provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level, and increases the distance
allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA. The cards must have two installed,
working LIMs to operate properly.

The Optical Extension cards support these optional application modules:

• VCM3, which has a full M60 ADPCM transcoder with bundled, delta
signaling channel
• IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary
to conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard

There are four Optical Extension card variants:

• Single Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-09)

• Single Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-11)
• Dual Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-10)
• Dual Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-12)

Configurable Table 7-1 lists the ATMServices card configurable parameters, and indicates which
parameters card variant supports the parameter. Table 7-2 lists the Octal E1 card configurable
parameters. Table 7-3 lists the Octal T1 card configurable parameters. Table 7-4
lists the configurable parameters of all the other aggregate cards, and indicates
which card supports the parameter and (if necessary) which module is required.

Table 7-1: ATM Services card configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
ACT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓
IMA group (logical port) 1 to 2000 kbytes ✓
Physical port 1 to 2000 kbytes ✓
Activation timeout IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000 ms ✓ ✓
Alarm clear time Physical port 1 to 60 s ✓ ✓

175
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
Alarm declare time Physical port 1 to 60 s ✓ ✓
ASC circuit assignment FSC Assign ✓
Unassign
Bc PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 4294 kb ✓
Be PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 4294 kb ✓
CAC level IMA group (logical port) Static ✓ ✓
Dynamic
Card adaption type Slot AAL1 ✓ ✓
AAL1/5
Card backplane Slot 16 Mb/s ✓ ✓
4 Mb/s
Card type Slot ATM SC ✓ ✓
Card variant Slot E1 ✓ ✓
T1
Cell delay variation tolerance Circuit (ATM parameter) 0.1 to 32.0 ms (for signaling ✓ ✓
multiframe length = 16)
0.1 to 24.0 ms (for signaling
multiframe length = 24)
Cell fill level Circuit (ATM parameter) 2 to 47 bytes ✓ ✓
Cell payload scrambling Physical port Enabled (T1 default) ✓ ✓
Disabled (E1 default)
CIR PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 1984 kb/s ✓
CIR rate enforcement PVC (frame relay parameter) Enabled ✓
Disabled
CLP mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM
interworking parameter)
CLP=DE ✓
CLP=0
CLP=1

Congestion clear time Slot 1 to 255 s ✓

Congestion raise time Slot 1 to 255 s ✓
CRC4 reframing (E1 only) Physical port Enabled ✓ ✓
Disabled
Custom trunk conditioning, Circuit (TDM parameter) 4-digit code, E&M ✓ ✓
ABCD bits (For T1: idle = 0000; seized = 1111)
(For E1: idle = 1101; seized = 0101)

Custom trunk conditioning, data Circuit (TDM parameter) 8-digit code, primary rate (00000000 to ✓ ✓
11111111)
Deactivation timeout IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000 ms ✓ ✓

176
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
DE mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM DE=CLP ✓
interworking parameter) DE=FR-SCCS
DE=0
DE=1

E1 signaling types Circuit (TDM parameter) Transparent (SIG) Clear ✓ ✓

channel (NoSIG) E&M
Continuous E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC

EFCI mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM

interworking parameter)
EFCI=FECN ✓
EFCI=0
Fault class Physical port Red/frame off or on ✓ ✓
Yellow/distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on

Fault signaling Circuit (TDM parameter) Seized ✓ ✓

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
None

Flags between frames FSC 1 to 10 ✓

Framing (T1 only) Physical port ESF ✓ ✓
D4
FSC application FSC Transparent HDLC ✓
Frame relay
Heartbeat polling interval FSC 5 to 30 s ✓
HEC correction Physical port Enabled ✓ ✓
Disabled
Interworking mode PVC (frame relay and ATM Network ✓
interworking parameter) Service (transparent)
Service (translated)

Inversion Circuit (TDM parameter) None ✓ ✓

All bits
Alternate bits

Line build-out (T1 only) Physical port DS1: 0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15.0 dB or
–22.5 dB
✓ ✓
DSX-1: 0.6 dB, 1.2 dB, 1.8 dB, 2.4 dB
or 3.0 dB

177
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
Line length (T1 only) Physical port DS1 ✓ ✓
DSX-1
Link quality monitoring (E1 only) Physical port HDB3 ✓ ✓
CRC4
Maximum differential delay IMA group (logical port) 0 to 50 ms ✓ ✓
Maximum frame size FSC 16 to 4472 octets ✓
Minimum number of active links IMA group (logical port) 1 to 4 ✓ ✓
in an IMA group
MCT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓
IMA group (logical port) 0 to 100% ✓
Physical port 0 to 100% ✓
Slot 0 to 100% ✓
MIR PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 2147483 kb/s ✓
Network DLCI PVC (frame relay parameter) 16 to 1023 ✓
NU bits (E1 only) Physical port Default bit patterns (Tx = 11111) ✓ ✓
Custom
Number of CAC links IMA group (logical port) 1 to 4 ✓ ✓
PIR PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 2147483 kb/s ✓
Port selection Circuit (ATM parameter) Physical port (P1 to P4) Logical ✓ ✓
port (IMA group) (L1) None

Protocol type FSC LMI: User, Network or Network ✓

Extended
Annex A: User, Network or
Bidirectional
Annex D: User, Network or
Bidirectional
No protocol
Auto discovery (1)
PVC management PVC (frame relay and ATM Enabled ✓
interworking parameter) Disabled
R2 signaling type Circuit (TDM parameter) R2 digital signaling ✓ ✓
Scaling factor IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000% ✓
Physical port 1 to 10000% ✓

178
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
SCT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓
IMA group (logical port) 0 to 100% ✓
Physical port 0 to 100% ✓
Slot 0 to 100% ✓
Service category PVC (ATM parameter) Nonreal-time variable bit rate ✓
Unspecified bit rate
Signaling multiframe length Slot 16 frame signaling (default for E1) ✓ ✓
24 frame signaling (default for T1)
Signaling transport Circuit group Enabled ✓ ✓
Disabled
SIR PVC (ATM parameter) 96 to 2147483 kb/s (T1) ✓
120 to 2147483 kb/s (E1)
Status enquiry message timeout FSC 5 to 35 s ✓
Status message rate FSC 1 to 255 ✓
Structured 64 kb/s mode Circuit (ATM parameter) Unstructured 64 kb/s ✓ ✓
Structured 64 kb/s
Super-rate formats Circuit (TDM parameter) Contiguous ✓ ✓
Noncontiguous
Equidistant

T1 signaling types Circuit (TDM parameter) Transparent (SIG) Clear ✓ ✓

channel (NoSiG) E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS

Termination impedance (E1

only)
Slot 75  ✓ ✓
120 
Transmit clock IMA group (logical port) Common transmit clock ✓ ✓
Independent transmit clock
Transmit timing Physical port Loop ✓ ✓
System
Transport bandwidth FSC n  8 kb/s, n = 1 to 8 ✓
Transport position FSC Bn, n = 0 to 7 ✓
Trunk conditioning Physical port One-way or two-way ✓ ✓

179
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
Virtual channel Circuit (ATM parameter) vpi/vci (vpi = 0 to 31, vci = 32 to ✓ ✓
65535)
Maximum burst size PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 65535 cells ✓
VP shaping PVC (ATM parameter) Enabled ✓
Disabled
Zero code suppression (T1 only) Physical port Transparent ✓ ✓
B8ZS

Note
1. This option is not configurable when the auto-discovery protocol is used.

Table 7-2: Octal E1 card configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options

Alarm time Link
Declare 0.1 to 60 s
Clear 0.1 to 60 s
BER alarm option Link Enabled
Disabled
Card redundancy Slot Redundant
Simplex
Card type Slot Octal E1
CPSS pipe Link Enabled
Disabled
CRC4 reframing Link Enabled
Disabled
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 4-digit code, E&M
ABCD bits
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 8-digit code, primary rate
data (00000000 to 11111111)
E1 framing Link CAS
CCS
31 channels

180
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options

E1 signaling types Circuit Transparent
Clear channel
E&M
Continuous E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE RE
LGE EC

E-bit Link Enabled

Disabled
Fault classes Link Frame off or on
Distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback off or on

Fault signaling Circuit Seized

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None

Inversion Circuit Inverted (voice) Not

inverted (data)
ISDN Link Non-ISDN
ISDN
Link monitoring DM Link Enable
threshold Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring ES Link Enable
threshold Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring SES Link Enable
threshold Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring UAS Link Enable
threshold Disable
0 - 900
Local BER alarm Link SA4 bit on or off
indication over TS0 SA4
bit

181
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options

Loopback detection Link None
VIA CPSS
On fault
NU bit Link Enabled
Disabled
Port majority vote Slot All
Include
Exclude

R2 signaling type Circuit R2 digital signaling

RAI transmission Link On BER enable
On BER disable
Severely errored Link 5 x 10-6
seconds
10-5

10-4
10-3
Statistics type Link CRC4
HDB3
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous
Noncontiguous
Equidistant

Switching type Slot Revertive

Nonrevertive
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent
Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS

Trunk conditioning Link One-way

Two-way
Working card Slot Master
Slave
WTR timer Slot 0 to 60 min

182
 7. Aggregate cards

Table 7-3: Octal T1 card configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options

Alarm time Link
Declare 0.1 to 60 s
Clear 0.1 to 60 s
Card type Slot Octal T1
Card redundancy Slot Redundant
Simplex
Clear channels Circuit NOSIG
RBS OFF
DS1 framing Link D4 framing format
ESF
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 4-digit code, E&M (idle =0000;
ABCD bits seized=1111)
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 8-digit code, primary rate
data (00000000 to 11111111)
Fault classes Link Red/frame off or on
Yellow/distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback off or on

Fault signaling Circuit Seized

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None

Inversion Circuit Inverted (voice) Not

inverted (data)
ISDN Link Non-ISDN
ISDN
Line length Link 0 to 40 m (0 to 133 ft)
40 to 81 m (133 to 266 ft)
81 to 121m (266 to 399 ft)
121 to 162 m (399 to 533 ft)
162 to 199 m (533 to 655 ft)
Messaging mode Link 54016 on
54016 off
T1.403 on
T1.403 off
Performance monitoring Link Enable
ES threshold Disable
1 to 900 (in 15-minute intervals)
1 to 65535 (in 24-hour period)

183
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options

Performance monitoring Link Enable
SES threshold Disable
1 to 900 (in 15-minute intervals)
1 to 65535 (in 24-hour period)
Performance monitoring Link Enable
UAS threshold Disable
1 to 900 (in 15-minute intervals)
1 to 32767 (in 24-hour period)

Loopback detection Link None

Via CPSS
On fault
Port majority vote Slot All
Include
Exclude

Robbed bit signaling Circuit Enabled

Disabled
Severely errored Link 10-3
seconds limit
10-4

10-5
5 x 10-6

10-6

10-7
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous
Noncontiguous
Equidistant

Switching type Slot Revertive

Nonrevertive
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent
Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate

Trunk conditioning Link One-way

Two-way
Working card Slot Master
Slave
WTR timer Slot 0 to 60 min

184
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options

Yellow alarm clearing Link On red clearing
On synchronization
Zero code suppression Link Transparent
Binary 8-zero suppression
Jam bit 7

Table 7-4: Other aggregate cards configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

Alarm time Slot or Declare: 0.1 to 60 s E1
circuit
Clear: 0.1 to 60 s MPA
T1
TTC2M
OEC
V.35
X.21
Application Slot Non-ISDN Dual E1-2
ISDN Dual E1
Dual T1-2
OEC

Application module Slot No module Dual E1-2

FAM (2) Dual E1
Voice compression Dual T1
ISDN frame (3) Dual T1-2
OEC
Bandwidth Slot 1 to 30 (64 to 1920 kb/s) V.35
X.21
Bit error rate Link Enabled Dual E1-2
Disabled Dual E1
OEC

Bit error rate alarm Link Enabled Dual E1

Disabled Dual E1-2
SA4 bit on OEC
SA4 bit off
Buffering for jitter Slot 0.5 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth V.35
and wander
1.0 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth X.21

185
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

Card type Card Dual E1-2 E1
Dual E1 OEC
E1

Dual T1 T1
Dual T1-2
Single T1

MPA MPA
TTC2M TTC2M
CCM Card Enabled Single E1
Disabled Single T1
Channel type Circuit Voice MPA
Data
Circuit inversion Circuit None TTC2M
ADI
Magnitude inversion

Clock inversion Slot Invert X.21

Normal
Clocking source Slot Service provider V.35
MainStreet node X.21
Code suppression Link or Transparent T1
types Slot Binary 8-zero suppression
Jam bit 7
Companding Circuit Conversion No Single E1
conversion conversion Single T1
Circuit None TTC2M
A-law
Mu-law
Compressed voice Link 32 kb/s ADPCM Dual E1-2
subframe type 32 kb/s ADPCM for G3 fax Dual E1
Dual T1
Dual T1-2
OEC

Control leads Circuit Forced on MPA

(RS-530-A, RS-449, Forced off
X.21, V.35)
Control lead Circuit On MPA
conditioning OOS Off
None
Control lead initiated Circuit Enable MPA
local loopback Disable
CPSS Circuit Disable MPA
8 kb/s
16 kb/s

186
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

CRC4 reframing Link Enabled Dual E1-2
Disabled Dual E1
OEC

CSU loopback Slot Enabled Disabled Dual T1

detect (4) Single T1
None Dual T1-2
Through CPSS
Through TS24
On fault
Custom trunk Circuit 4-digit code (0000 to 1111) E1
conditioning, ABCD T1
bits
MPA
V.35
X.21
OEC

Custom trunk Circuit 8-digit code (00000000 to 11111111) E1

conditioning, data MPA
T1
TTC2M
V.35
X.21
OEC

DGM limit Circuit 1 to 60 MPA

Doppler buffer Circuit Enable MPA
Disable
E-bits option Link Enabled Dual E1-2
Disabled Dual E1
OEC

187
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

E1 signaling types Circuit Transparent Clear E1
channel E&M V.35
Continuous E&M X.21
LGS RE OEC
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3 (5)
LGE RE
LGE EC
R2 digital signaling

Transparent MPA
Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
LGE GS
LGE LS
R2 digital signaling

Errored seconds Circuit 1 to 255 Dual T1

Dual T1-2

F-AIS detection (6) Link or On Dual E1-2

Slot Off
Fault classes Slot Frame off or on V.35
Distant off or on X.21
Failed off or on
Link or Frame off or on E1
Slot Distant off or on OEC
Failed off or on
Error off or on

Red off or on Dual T1

Yellow off or on Dual T1-2
Failed off or on
Error off or on
CSU loopback off or on (7)

Circuit Frame off or on MPA

Distant off or on
Failed off or on
Loopback off or on

188
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

Fault classes, Slot Frame off or on TTC2M
continued SAI off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on

Fault signaling Circuit Seized E1

Idle MPA
OOS-A T1
OOS-B V.35
OOS-C X.21
Custom OEC
No trunk conditioning

In-use TTC2M
Idle
NIS
None

Framing Link or D4 framing format T1

Slot Extended superframe format
CAS E1
CCS OEC
31 channels
X.21 NTU

Circuit HCM1 MPA

HCM2
HCM3
HCM4
HCM5

Framing type Link or 1 X.21

Slot
2
Gender (clocking Circuit DCE MPA
source) DTE
HCM frame width Slot B1, B3, B5, B7 V.35
X.21
Interface type Circuit RS-530-A MPA
RS-449
X.21
X.21 ESI
V.35

Inversion Circuit Inverted Not E1

inverted MPA
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC

189
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

Line build-out with a Link or 15 dB T1
CSU module Slot 7.5 dB
0 dB

Line length Link or 0 to 46 m (0 to 150 ft) T1 (11)

Slot 46 to 137 m (150 to 450 ft)
137 to 200 m (450 to 655 ft)
Link availability Circuit Enabled Dual E1-2
monitoring Disabled Dual T1
Dual T1-2

Loopback detection Slot None E1

Through CPSS T1
Through TS24 OEC
On-fault

Circuit None MPA

CPSS
In-band
Nu bit Slot Enabled Dual E1
Disabled Dual E1-2
Number of circuits Circuit 1 to 30 (48 to 1920 kb/s) MPA
Number of signaling Slot 0 to 29 V.35
channels X.21
Protection switching Circuit Protected by TTC2M
Protecting
R2 signaling type Circuit R2 digital E&M MPA
RAI Slot On loss of frame alignment Dual E1-2
On BER enable
On BER disable

Robbed bit signaling Circuit Enabled T1

Disabled
SAM No module Single E1
Normal (installed, not used) Single T1
Circuit order
Timeslot order

Severely errored Circuit 10-7 Dual E1-2

seconds (8) Dual E1
10-6
Dual T1
5 x 10-6
Dual T1-2
10-5 OEC
10-4
10-3

190
 7. Aggregate cards

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

Severely errored Circuit 10-3 MPA
seconds limit
10-4

10-5
10-6
5  10-5
Shield grounding Link or Chassis E1
Slot Rx shield grounding
Rx shield floating Tx
shield grounding Tx
shield floating

For master operation, set card to Tx OEC

shield floating
For slave operation, set card to Tx shield
grounding
For maintenance, set card to Rx shield
grounding
Slip buffer Circuit 10 to 39 frames MPA
Slip by 10 to 39 frames
SRM HCM data in Circuit Unused bit positions to the right of MPA
TS0 framing bits in TS0
Statistics type Slot CRC4 E1
HDB3
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous E1
Noncontiguous MPA
Equidistant T1
V.35
X.21
OEC

Supervisory channel Circuit 0 to 29 MPA

number of circuits with
signaling
Supervisory channel Circuit Any unused bit position MPA
framing bit
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent E1
Clear channel T1
E&M V.35
LGS LS X.21
LGS GS OEC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
R2 digital signaling (9)
Terminate (10)

191
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card (1)

T1 signaling types, Circuit Transparent MPA
continued Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGE LS
LGE GS

Timeslot 24 Card Timeslot 24 signaling Dual T1-2

signaling No timeslot 24 signaling Dual T1
Transport Circuit 48 kb/s MPA
bandwidth 56 kb/s
64 kb/s
Trunk conditioning Slot Two-way E1
One-way MPA
T1
TTC2M
V.35
X.21
OEC

Voice compression Card Delta Dual E1-2

Delta G3 Fax Dual E1
Transitional Dual T1
Transitional G3 Fax Dual T1-2
OEC

Notes
1. E1 means Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards; OEC means Single and Dual Optical Extension
cards; T1 means Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards; X.21 means X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI
cards.
2. Applies to Dual E1-2 card only.
3. Applies to Dual E1 card only.
4. Requires a CSU or CSU-2 module for the Single T1 card. Requires a CSU-2 module for the Dual T1
card.
5. Does not apply to E1 cards.
6. Requires a FAM for the Dual E1-2 card.
7. Applies to Single T1 and Dual T1 cards only.
8. Options 10-7 and 10-6 do not apply to the Dual E1 card.
9. Does not apply to T1 cards.
10. Applies to E1 and T1 cards only.
11. Requires a DSX-1 module or T1 LIM

192
8
Voice interface cards and
channel units
Voice interface cards and channel units provide an interface between voice
circuits and a digital network. Voice interface cards are intended for on-
premises,
short-loop applications that require high-port densities. Voice interface
channel units are intended for off-premises, CO applications that require long-
loop and individual-circuit modularity.

Voice interface cards and channel units are offered that support 4WDX,
4WTO, E&M, LGE, LGS, and MRD interfaces.

The cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs. The channel units can be
installed on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or off. For more
information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.

Figure 8-1 shows the faceplate of each voice interface card and channel unit.

193
A closer
view

Figure 8-1: Voice interface cards and channel units

E & M Card LGE LGS

4WTO Card Card

Circuit
Line 1 Line 1 Line 1
1 Line 2 Line 2 Line 2
2 Line 3 Line 3 Line 3
3 Line 4 Line 4 Line 4
4 Line 5 Line 5 Line 5
5 Line 6 Line 6 Line 6
6 Line 7
7 Line 8
8 Line 9
9 Line 10
10 Line 11
11 Line 12 Status
Busy Status 12
4WDX
90-

Status Status
Status

4WDX channel unit

occupies two positions on
Common Carrier card 4WT0 card E&M card LGE card LGS card

LGE MRD
Busy Status Busy Status Busy Status Ringing Status Ringing Status
International International 2WMRD
E&M LGS
90-1755-
90-1228-
90-1230-

E&M channel unit LGE90-1229-01

channel unit LGS channel unit MRD90-1755-01
channel unit 2WMRD channel unit

7613

194
 8. Voice interface cards and channel
units

4WDX channel unit The 4WDX channel unit complies with signaling state requirements contained in
PUB 43801 and applicable sections in Bellcore TR-NWT-000057 Issue 2.
The channel unit:

• provides a 4-wire transmission line with bidirectional on- and off-

hook signaling
• provides an interface to devices that convert DX signaling to E&M signaling
• allows configuration of line impedance resistance (150, 600, or 1200 )

The 4WDX channel unit is a dual-height channel unit, which occupies two
positions on the Common Carrier card. It can be installed in any two of the first
three channel unit positions on the Common Carrier card.

4WTO line card The 4WTO line card complies with applicable sections in PUB 43801 and
in Bellcore TR-NWT-000057. The card:

• provides 12 circuits with bidirectional, 600  line impedance

• is designed for use in on-premises, 4-wire applications with no
signaling requirement

E&M interfaces E&M is a signaling arrangement characterized by the use of separate paths
for control and voice signals.

E&M card The E&M card:

• provides six short-loop E&M circuit interfaces

• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, 2- or 4-wire, Type I, II,
III, or V signaling, complex or resistive line impedances, and a wide range
of TLPs

E&M channel unit The E&M channel unit can be configured to function as an E&M trunk or a
PLR trunk. For both trunk types, signaling is performed on separate leads from
the audio transmission paths. The channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop E&M circuit interface

• supports a configurable 2- or 4-wire transmission line interface
• supports E&M Type I, II, III, IV, V, and V with filter signaling, or
PLR functionality with Type I or II signaling (SG and SB apply only
to E&M signaling types II, III, and IV, and PLR signaling type II)
• can be configured to support Mu-law companding
• offers a wide range of TLPs

195
A closer
view

LGE interfaces LGE interfaces are designed to interface to CO subscriber trunks or PBX lines. LGE
interfaces detect ringing current from the public exchange on an incoming call
and also provide outgoing calling conditions (loop/ground) to the public
exchange.

LGE card The LGE card:

• provides six short-loop, exchange-end, FXO-compatible circuit interfaces

• supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
• provides battery and tip supervision, ringing detection, and ring
ground capability
• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line or
resistive impedances, and a wide range of TLPs

LGE channel unit The LGE channel unit:

• provides one long-loop, exchange-end FXO-compatible circuit interface

• offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 600  complex impedances
• supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types

LGS interfaces LGS interfaces are designed to interface with PBX trunks or standard phones.
Each LGS subscriber interface separates the incoming analog signal into two
streams—one stream for the voice message (information) and another for the
signaling (control). When an LGS interface card is installed in a 3600/3600+
MainStreet shelf, a ringing generator also must be installed.

LGS card The LGS card:

• provides 12 subscriber-end, FXS-compatible circuit interfaces

• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line
impedances, and a wide range of TLPs
• supports LS to LGS conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types

LGS channel unit The LGS channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, FXS-compatible

circuit interface
• offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 600  complex impedances
• supports LS and GS to E&M conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1
signaling types

196
 8. Voice interface cards and channel
units

MRD interfaces The MRD channel units support permanent hard-wired connections between two
telephones over a T1 network. A conversion device, such as a PBX or a key
system, is the interface between a telephone and an MRD channel unit.

MRD channel unit The MRD channel unit is used in on -premises applications. The channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

• offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 1650  complex impedances
• neither sources nor sinks dc power
• supports T1 signaling

2WMRD channel unit The 2WMRD channel unit is used in on-pre mises or off-premises applications.
The channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

• offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 1650  complex impedances
• supports continuous adapt balance impedance
• neither sources nor sinks dc power
• supports T1 signaling

Configurable Table 8-1 lists all the voice interface card and channel unit configurable
parameters parameters, and indicates which card or channel unit (or both) supports each
parameter.

Table 8-1: Voice interface card and channel unit configurable parameters

Parameters Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Audio transmission Slot 2-wire E&M
mode 4-wire
Card type Slot On-premises 2-wire MRD channel unit
Off-premises 2-wire
Companding Card Mu-law E&
algorithm M
A-law (2)
LGE
LGS
E&M signaling Circuit Type I E&M channel unit
Type II (E&M trunks)

Type III
Type IV
Type V
Type V with filter

197
A closer
view

Parameters Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
E1 signaling Circuit CBW LGS card
EC LGE
LGS
LCDC LGE
LGS
PLAR LGS
RE LGE
LGS
RE with central battery working LGS channel unit
Fault signaling Circuit Seized 4WDX channel unit
Idle E&M
LGE
LGS
Line balance Circuit < 200  LGE card
> 200 
Nominal E&M card
< 220 
> 383 
Nominal LGS card
< 800  // (100  + 50 nF)
Adapt and freeze LGE channel unit
Continuous adapt MRD channel unit
Fixed, short loop
Fixed, long loop

Adapt and freeze E&M channel unit

Fixed, short loop (90-1230-01, 02, 03)
Fixed, long loop

Nominal Alternate (90-1230-04, 07)

Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze

Nominal
(90-1230-05, 06)

198
 8. Voice interface cards and channel
units

Parameters Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Line balance, Circuit Adapt and freeze LGS channel unit
continued Fixed, short loop (90-1228-02, 03)
Fixed, long loop

Nominal Alternate (90-1228-04, 07)

Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze

Nominal
(90-1228-05, 06)
Line impedance Slot See individual descriptions of E&
voice cards and channel units in M
chapter 14.
LGE
LGS
Loop balance Circuit Midpoint capacitor 4WDX channel unit
enable/disable
Build-out capacitance
Build-out resistance

On-hook Tx mute (3) Circuit Enabled Disabled 4WDX channel unit

E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit
LGS channel unit

PLR signaling Circuit Type I E&M channel unit

(PLR trunks)
Type II
Signaling for A-law Slot Type IV E&M card
cards Type V
Signaling for Mu-law Slot Type I E&M card
cards Type II
Type III

Signaling mode Circuit E&M E&M channel unit

Pulse link repeater
Transmission only
Normal polarity 4WDX channel unit
Reverse polarity
Fixed bias
Switched bias

199
A closer
view

Parameters Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
T1 signaling Circuit DPO LGS channel unit
DPT LGE card
LGS card
GS LGE
LGS
GS to E&M conversion LGS channel unit
LS LGE
LGS
LS to E&M conversion LGS channel unit
LS to LGS conversion LGS card
PLAR LGS
PLAR with D3 framing LGS channel unit
Reverse battery signaling LGE channel unit
Transmission level Circuit See individual descriptions of 4WDX channel unit
points voice cards and channel units in 4WTO card
chapter 14.
E&
M
LGE
LGS
MRD channel unit
Transmit path Circuit Enable/disable 4WDX channel unit
equalization Loaded/nonloaded
Slope
Height Bandwidth

Notes
1. E&M refers to both E&M cards and channel units; LGE to both LGE cards and channel units; LGS to
both LGS cards and channel units; and MRD to both MRD and 2WMRD channel units.
2. A-law companding is not supported on the LGE channel unit.
3. Restrictions:
- To prevent audio path singing, Tx mute must be enabled on the called circuit.
- While Tx mute is enabled, on-hook line up and test procedures cannot be performed (that is, on-
hook transmission is disabled).

200
9
Data interface cards and
channel units
Data interface cards and channel units provide an interface between local and
remote data devices and a digital network. Alcatel offers data interface cards and
channel units that support the following interfaces:

• 2B+D
• 4-wire DSU/CSU
• 4-wire no signaling
• DSX-0
• full-duplex synchronous (G.703)
• multirate HDSL
• RS-449/V.36
• RS-449/X.21
• RS-530-A
• V.24/RS-232
• V.35

The cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs. The channel units can be
installed in any position on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or
off. For more information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.

Data interface card and channel unit faceplates are shown in Figure 9-1.

201
A closer
view

Figure 9-1: Data interface cards and channel units

2B1Q 27LC2 27LC3 28LC 64 Kb/s DNIC

Basic Rate S/T Interface Card
Card Card Card Card Codirectional
Card
Line Card

Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1

Line 2 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 2
Line 3 Line 3 Line 2 Line 3 Line 3
Line 4 Line 4 Line 3 Line 4 Active Line 4
Line 5 Line 5 Line 4 Line 5 Line 2 Line 5
Line 1
Line 6 Line 6 Line 5 Line 6 Line 2 Line 6
Line 6 Line 3 Line 7
Line 7 Line 3 Line 4 Line 8
Line 8 1 Line 5 Line 9
Line 9 Line 6 Line 10
Line 10 Line 7 Line 11
Line 4 Line 12 Status
Line 11 2 Line 8
Line 12
Test Acc.
3
Status

Loop Back Status

Status
Status Status Status

2B1Q 27LC2 27LC3 28LC 64 kb/s BRI S/T DNIC

line card line card line card line card Codirectional card line card
card

V.24/ RS232 RS-422 V.35 X.21/ RS449

Card Card Card Card
4W TO

Active Status Status

2B1Q
Ready Ready 1 Ready 1
1 2 2
2 Ready 1 3 3
3 2 4 4
4 3 5
5 4 6
90-1452-01
6

2B1Q 4WTO
channel unit channel unit

OCU-DP
Synch
Status

Status
DS0-DP
Status
Status Status Status
90-

90-1231-01

OCU-DP DS0-DP
channel unit channel unit

RS-232 RS-422 V.35 X.21

DCC DCC DCC DCC
7610

202
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

DNIC line card The DNIC line card connects the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager to a data device through a 2600 MainStreet series DTU
using up to 5.8 km (3.6 mi) of standard twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a
DNIC line card supports one DTU, which provides either two or eight data
interfaces. The card:

• provides 3, 6, or 12 ISDN compatible circuits

• supports 2B+D format
• supports an optional DPM1 or DPM2, which performs subrate
multiplexing, multidrop data bridging, and DDS/X.50 rate adaption

2B1Q line card The 2B1Q line card connects the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device
through a 2700 MainStreet series DTU using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard
twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a 2B1Q line card supports one DTU, which
provides two data interfaces. The card:

• provides six 2-wire 2B+D interface terminations for extended

range, off-premises applications
• supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
• provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and
lightning protection
• supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform super-rate and
subrate multiplexing, transparent or HCM and DDS or X.50 rate adaption,
and multidrop data bridging
• supports ANSI T1.601-1992 compliant eoc functionality at the DSL level
• supports data port redundancy on 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs

2B1Q channel unit The 2B1Q channel unit provides an ISDN U-interface, which meets standards set
out in ANSI T1.601. The channel unit:

• provides a bidirectional BRI over STP for a distance of up to 5.5 km (3.4 mi)
• provides 2700 MainStreet series DTU termination
• supports ISDN loop extension applications

203
A closer
view

27LC2 line card The 27LC2 line card connects the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device
through a 2700 MainStreet series DTU using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard
twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a 27LC2 line card supports one DTU, which
provides two data interfaces. The 27LC2 line card:

• provides six 2-wire 2B+D interface terminations for extended

range, off-premises applications
• supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
• provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and
lightning protection
• supports super-rate speeds
• supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform subrate
multiplexing, transparent or HCM and DDS or X.50 rate adaption, and
multidrop data bridging
• supports ANSI T1.601-1992 compliant eoc functionality at the DSL level

27LC3 line card The 27LC3 line card provides 12 ports of 2B1Q connectivity for a 2700 MainStreet
series DTU. In addition to providing all the functionality of the 27LC2 line card,
the 27LC3 line card supports:

• subrate multiplexing for all 12 ports when the DPM3 module is added to
the card
• off-card multiplexing
• dedicated CPSS to DTUs that support CPSS

The DPM3 supports HCM and is orderable separately for customers requiring
subrate multiplexing.

28LC line card The 28LC line card connects the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device
through a 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU using standard twisted-pair wire.
Multirate HDSL connections allow the card to support various bandwidths for
different line lengths. Each circuit on a 28LC line card supports one DTU,
which provides one data interface.

The 28LC line card supports both the 2-wire (1 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL
DTU and the 4-wire (2 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU. The 4-wire version
of the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU can be configured to run in either 2-wire or
4-wire mode.

The 28LC line card has six multirate HDSL interfaces, which can support up to
six 2-wire or three 4-wire multirate HDSL interfaces, or a combination of both.
The 28LC line card is supported only in a double-bandwidth system.

In the 2-wire configuration, each multirate HDSL interface supports n  64 kb/s

data rates up to 1024 kb/s, where n  16 DS0s.

204
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

In the 4-wire configuration, three line speeds are supported (line speed in 4-wire
mode refers to the total speed of both lines):

• 512 kb/s (allowing n  64 kb/s, where n  8 DS0s)

• 1024 kb/s (allowing n  64 kb/s, where n  16 DS0s)
• 2048 kb/s (allowing n  64 kb/s, where n  31 DS0s)
There are two connection modes: 2-line mode and 6-line mode.

• When the 2-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports two lines at
any given time, with each line supporting up to 31 DS0s.
• When the 6-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports connections
on all six lines up to a total of 61 DS0s. The first four lines cannot exceed a
combined total of 32 DS0s, with no more than 31 DS0s allocated to each
line. The remaining 29 DS0s are available for allocation to the other two
lines.

4WTO channel unit The 4WTO channel unit can be used in any 4-wire application where there is no
signaling required. The audio line circuitry is configured to match a 600  line
impedance in both transmit and receive directions. The channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, 4-wire TO interface

• offers Mu-law companding and 7 mA sealing current (at maximum loop
length)

DS0-DP channel The DS0-DP channel unit complies with Bellcore recommendations
unit TA-TSY-000077 and TR-TSY-000458. The DS0-DP channel unit allows
communication between DS1 and DDS equipment. The channel unit:

• provides an on-premises 135  DSX-0 interface

• supports interface speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56, and 64 kb/s

BRI S/T card The BRI S/T card provides an ISDN S/T interface, which meets standards set
out in ITU-T I.430. The card:

• provides four or eight 4-wire BRIs

• supports 2B+D bandwidth – two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16
kb/s D channel
• provides both nailed-up and semi-permanent 64 kb/s channels for ISDN
bandwidth on demand applications

205
A closer
view

64 kb/s The 64 kb/s Codirectional card conforms to ITU-T specification G.703. The card:
Codirectional card
• provides four G.703 compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuit interfaces
with AIS detection
• supports unidirectional (one-way and broadcast) and bidirectional
connections

OCU-DP channel The OCU-DP channel unit provides a single user interface between an incoming
unit DS0-A stream to a 4-wire synchronous digital data customer loop. The OCU-
DP channel unit allows interconnection of customer-premises DSU/CSUs to the
switched network.

The OCU-DP channel unit is compatible with any DSU/CSU that meets
PUB 62310, ANSI T1.403, and is compliant with Bellcore
recommendations
TA-TSY-00077 and TA-TSY-00083. The channel unit is also compatible with any
switched 56 kb/s service provider-approved DSU/CSU.

The channel unit:

• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop OCU-DP interface

• supports standard DDS and Switched 56 Special Access

RS-232 DCC The RS-232 DCC meets or exceeds EIA RS-232C and ITU-T V.24
electrical specifications. The card:

• provides six EIA RS-232C and ITU-T V.24 interfaces

• supports data rates up to 64 kb/s

RS-422 DCC The RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces. Each interface can
be independently configured as RS-530-A, RS-449 (V.36), X.21, or V.35.

The RS-530-A and RS-449 interfaces meet or exceed RS-422-A (for category I
signals) and RS-423-A (for category II signals) electrical specifications and V.24
functional specifications. The X.21 interface meets or exceeds V.11 electrical
specifications and X.24 functional specifications. The V.35 interface meets or
exceeds V.11/V.10 electrical specifications and V.24 functional specifications.

The RS-422 DCC:

• can be connected to a UDP

• provides 3968 kb/s total bandwidth for each card with individual circuit
data rates up to 1984 kb/s

The RS-422 DCC can be provisioned with a Slip Buffer module, which provides
each RS-422 DCC interface with a bidirectional buffer. Each buffer can be
independently configured as 0, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bytes deep. The Slip Buffer module
206
 9. Data interface cards and channel
would typically be used for satellite units
tail circuits and plesiochronous applications.

207
A closer
view

V.35 DCC The V.35 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T V.35 electrical specifications. The card:

• provides three or six ITU-T V.35 interfaces

• supports data rates up to 1920 kb/s

X.21 DCC The X.21 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T X.21 electrical specifications and meets
a subset of EIA RS-449. The card:

• provides four or six ITU-T X.21/V.11 interfaces

• supports data rates up to 1920 kb/s

Configurable Table 9-1 lists the configurable parameters for data interface cards and channel
parameters units. A full range of options is listed for each parameter, although not all options
apply to every card or channel unit on which the parameter can be configured.

Tables 9-2 to 9-4 list the control signal classifications, interface speeds, and rate
adaption.

Table 9-1: Data interface card and channel unit configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
8 kHz timing Circuit Continuous 64 kb/s Codirectional
signal Interrupted (when circuit is
connected)
AIS signal Circuit Enabled (when circuit is not 64 kb/s Codirectional
connected)
Disabled
AQA Circuit Master V.35
Slave
Disabled
B-channel Circuit No inversion BRI S/T
inversion type (non- Mu-law
ISDN)
A-law

Bus type Slot (non- Point-to-point BRI S/T

ISDN) Point-to-multipoint
Short bus Extended
bus

Card operation Slot Super-rate operation V.35

SRM operation X.21
Channel unit Slot DTU 2B1Q channel unit
application Loop extension

208
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Character length Circuit 5 bits 2B1Q
(asynchronous 6 bits 27LC2
only)
7 bits 27LC3
8 bits DNIC
DCC
Circuit Circuit 0 to 31 DS0s (limited by line speed 28LC
bandwidth and backplane bandwidth)
Clocking Circuit Independent 2B1Q
source Locked 27LC2
dependence
(synchronous 27LC3
only) DNIC
DCC
Clocking Circuit Internal 2B1Q
source type External 27LC2
(synchronous
only) Slave 27LC3
Special (DCE external; slip buffer DNIC
not present) (2) DCC
Composite Circuit Composite Not 2B1Q
inputs (branch) composite 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Continuity Circuit Enabled 2B1Q
checking (SRM) Disabled 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Control signals Circuit High, low, end-to-end 2B1Q
(see Table 9-2) 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Custom trunk Circuit 4-digit code (0000 to 1111) 64 kb/s Codirectional
conditioning,
ABCD bits
Custom trunk Circuit 8-digit code (00000000 to 64 kb/s Codirectional
conditioning, 11111111)
data
D-channel Circuit 3DS0 enabled BRI S/T
transport mode 3DS0 disabled
B1 to B7
Circuit Low nibble 2B1Q channel unit
(5DS0) High nibble

209
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Data position Circuit F0-B7 to F9-B0 2B1Q
(HCM) (SRM) 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
DDS multidrop Circuit 0 to 4 2B1Q
slave branch ID (branch) 27LC2
DNIC
Device gender Circuit DCE 2B1Q
DTE 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

Device mode Circuit Asynchronous 2B1Q

Synchronous 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

Duplex method Circuit Full duplex 2B1Q

Half duplex 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

E1 signaling Circuit Transparent 64 kb/s Codirectional

Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
R2 digital signaling

Error correction Circuit Enabled OCU-DP

Disabled DS0-DP

210
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Fault signaling Circuit None 64 kb/s Codirectional
Idle 64 kb/s Codirectional
OCU-DP
OOS-A 64 kb/s Codirectional
OOS-B 64 kb/s Codirectional
Seized 64 kb/s Codirectional
OCU-DP
MOS DS0-DP
CMI
FRC active Slot Enabled BRI S/T
(ISDN) Disabled
HCM frame Circuit 1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s) 2B1Q
bandwidth (SRM)
27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
HCM frame Circuit B7 to B0 2B1Q
bandwidth (SRM) 27LC2
position
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

Hub ID Slot 2-digit octal number (00 to 77) 2B1Q

(branch) 27LC2
DNIC
Input Circuit System 2B1Q
specification (branch) User 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Interface Slot TE BRI S/T
mode (3) NT
LULT 2B1Q channel unit
LUNT

211
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Interface Circuit See Table 9-3 for individual data card 2B1Q
speeds (kb/s) and channel unit rate adaption interface 27LC2
speeds.
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

2.4 OCU-DP
4.8
9.6
19.2
56
64
Interface type Slot RS-499/V.36 RS-422
RS-530-A
X.21
V.35

ISDN BRI S/T

Non-ISDN
Inversion Circuit Enabled RS-422
Disabled
Layer 1 type Slot I.430/ANSI BRI S/T
(ISDN) ETSI
Line alarm Line Enabled 28LC
Disabled
Line impedance Line 600  4WTO
Line speed Line 4 DS0s (256 kb/s) 28LC
8 DS0s (512 kb/s)
16 DS0s (1024 kb/s)
31 DS0s (2048 kb/s)
Module type Slot None 2B1Q
DPM 27LC2
DPM2 27LC3
DPM3 DNIC
Multidrop data Circuit Master 2B1Q
bridges Slave 27LC2
Disabled DNIC
DCC
Number of Slot 4 BRI S/T
interfaces 8

212
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Number of Circuit B1 BRI S/T
tandem B2
super-rate
circuits B1 and B2
(preferred or B1 and D
level 2)
B2 and D
B1, B2, and D

OOS control Circuit Forced off RS-422

lead output Forced on
state
Maintains current state

OOS data lead Circuit Custom RS-422

output signal Mark
Space
Parity Circuit Even 2B1Q
(asynchronous Mark 27LC2
only)
No parity 27LC3
Odd DNIC
Space DCC
Performance Circuit Enabled 2B1Q channel unit
monitoring (3DS0) Disabled
Rate adaption See Table 9-4 for individual data card 2B1Q
and channel unit rate adaption methods. 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Receive clock Circuit Inverted RS-422
(synchronous Normal
only)
RTS/CTS delay Circuit 0 to 1250 ms 2B1Q
27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

Sealing current Circuit Enabled 4WTO

Disabled
Secondary Circuit Enabled OCU-DP
channel Disabled
operation

213
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Signaling Circuit Switched off 2B1Q (circuit or
Switched on branch)
27LC2 (circuit or
branch)
27LC3 (circuit or
branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Slip buffer Circuit 0 bytes (buffer disabled) 2 RS-422
depth bytes
4 bytes
8 bytes
16 bytes
Stop bits Circuit 1 bit 2B1Q
(asynchronous 2 bits 27LC2
only)
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Subframe Circuit 1 to 20 2B1Q (circuit or
position (for branch)
DDS or X.50 27LC2 (circuit or
rate adaption) branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Switched Circuit Enabled OCU-DP
56 kb/s Disabled
operation
T1 signaling Circuit Clear channel 64 kb/s Codirectional
E&M
LGE GS
LGE LS
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
R2 digital signaling
Transparent

T3 timer Slot 1 to 30 s BRI S/T

(ISDN)
Termination Slot Enabled BRI S/T
resistor (ISDN) Disabled
TLPs Circuit RX: –16.0 to +8.0 dB 4WTO
TX: –17.0 to +13.0 dB

214
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Transport Circuit 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) 2B1Q
bandwidth (SRM, 27LC2
branch)
27LC3
DNIC
DCC

Transport mode Slot 3DS0 2B1Q channel unit

5DS0
Transport Circuit B7 to B0 2B1Q (circuit or
position branch)
27LC2 (circuit or
branch)
27LC3 (circuit or
branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Trunk Slot One-way 64 kb/s Codirectional
conditioning Two-way
Zero byte Circuit Enabled 2B1Q channel unit
substitution (3DS0)
Disabled

Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422, X.21,
and V.35 DCCs.
2. This option applies to RS-422 DCCs only.
3. This feature applies only to non-ISDN applications (for example, loop extensions).

Table 9-2: Data interface card and channel unit control signals

Control DCE DTE Card or channel unit (1)

signal classification classification
ALB Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
C Input Output RS-422, X.21
CTS Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
DCD Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
DSR Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
DTR Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
I Output Input RS-422, X.21
LL Input Output RS-422

215
A closer
view

Control DCE DTE Card or channel unit (1)

signal classification classification
RDL Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
RI Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
RL Input Output RS-422
RTS Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,
V.35
TM Output Input RS-422

Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.

216
 9. Data interface cards and channel
units

Table 9-3: Data interface card and channel unit interface speeds

Rate adaption Interface speed (b/s) Card or channel unit (1)

method
HCM (sync) 800 1200 1600 2400 4000 RS-232
4800 7200 8000 9600 1200
14400 16000 16800 19200 24000
28800 32000 38400
800 1200 1600 2400 4000 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,
DNIC, RS-422, V.35,
4800 7200 8000 9600 1200
X.21
14400 16000 16800 19200 24000
28800 32000 38400 40000 48000
56000 57600
HCM (async) 150 300 600 1200 2400 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,
DNIC, RS-232, RS-422,
4800 7200 9600 14400 19200
X.21, V.35
38400

DDS (sync) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232

1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,
RS-422, V.35, X.21
56000

DDS (async) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232

1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,
RS-422, V.35, X.21
48000

X.50 (sync) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232

1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,
RS-422, V.35, X.21
48000
(2)
Super-rates n x m, where RS-422, V.35, X.21
(kb/s) n= 2 4 6 8
10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24
26 28 30
m= 8 16 24 32
40 48 56 64
n  64 kb/s up to 256, 512, 1024, or 2048, 28LC
depending on line speed

Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.
2. Odd super-rate speeds are available for the V.35, X.21, and RS-422 DCCs with gate array revision
2.

217
A closer
view

Table 9-4: Data interface card and channel unit rate adaption requirements

Level Rate adaption Card or channel Configuration requirements

method unit (1)
Slot HCM/Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, Requires DPM2 or DPM3
27LC3, DNIC
DDS
DDS Access
X.50
X.50 Telco

Circuit DDS 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

DNIC, DCC
Enhanced RS-422 None
transparent
Circuit HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, None
27LC3, DNIC, DCC
Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, None
27LC3, 28LC,
DNIC, DCC
X.50 2B1Q, 27LC2, None
DNIC, DCC
Branch DDS DS0-A 2B1Q, 27LC2, Composite inputs only
DNIC, DCC
DDS DS0-B 2B1Q, 27LC2, Composite inputs only
DNIC, DCC
HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, None
27LC3, DNIC, DCC

Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

27LC3, DNIC, DCC
SRM DDS DS0-A 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot
DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access
DDS DS0-B 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot
DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access
DDS-HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM
DNIC
With DPM2 and configured (slot
level) for HCM or transparent
DCC None
HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 or DPM3 and
27LC3, DNIC configured (slot level) for HCM
MJU 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot
DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access and
(SRM level) for DS0-A
Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, Requires DPM
27LC3, DNIC
With DPM2 or DPM3 and
configured (slot level) for HCM or
transparent
DCC None

Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422, X.21, and
V.35 DCCs.

218
9. Data interface cards and channel
units

219
10
Application and packet switching
cards
Application and packet switching cards are used in conjunction with the aggregate
cards, and with voice and data interface cards and channel units, to provide
additional specialized functionality.You can install these cards in any of the 16 shelf
UCSs.

Figure 10-1 shows the faceplate of each application and packet switching card.

219
A closer
view

Figure 10-1: Application and packet switching cards

Call Processing Data Com Proc'r Card DSP DSP4 DSP 5

Card Card Card Card

Serial Port 1 Circuit 1

Circuit 2 DSP 1
Serial Port 1 DSP 2
Circuit 3
Circuit 4 DSP 3
Circuit 5 DSP 4
Circuit 6 DSP 5
DSP 6
DSP 7
DSP 8
DSP 9
Serial Port 2 DSP 10
Serial Port 2

Mode

Data Processor
Activity Status
Status Status Status
Status

CPC DCP DSP, DSP2, DSP4 DSP5, DSP5H

card DSP3 card card card

IMC Frame Relay Engine FRS Packet Engine

Card

Serial Port Serial Port

Serial Port 1

FASTbus A Data Fault FASTbus A Data Fault

Serial Port 2
FASTbus B FASTbus B
Data Fault Data Fault

Processor Data Data Data

Status Status Status

Status

IMC
FRE FRS PE
card
card card card
7681

220
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Call Processing The CPC supports the ISDN backup application. The ISDN backup application
card provides RAPID protection for leased lines, using ISDN alternate paths. The CPC
provides backup for 2 (basic rate), 23 (T1 primary rate), or 30 (E1 primary rate)
64 kb/s B channels. The card:

• provides Layer 2 and 3 call processing functions for National

ISDN, EUROISDN and INS 64/1500 ISDN
• supports 2B+D, 23B+D, and 30B+D when used in conjunction with the
BRI S/T, Dual T1-2, and Dual E1 cards, respectively
• provides HDLC termination for up to 31 D channels
• supports software upgrading

Data The DCP card is a general-purpose platform that provides high-capacity HDLC
Communications switching capability. The DCP card is typically used in large networks, in nodes
Processor card with high CPSS traffic, in networks with large numbers of 3612 MainStreet
Narrow-band Multiplexers (using 4 kb/s CPSS), and for CPSS over satellite
links. The card:

• augments inherent CPSS routing facilities ofcommon control with

additional, high-speed CPSS routing for up to 31 channels
• supports CPSS channels with long transmission delays, for example,
CPSS links over satellite links

When used for high-speed CPSS routing, the DCP card maintains a separate
switching table and removes most of the CPSS messaging burden from the Control
card. When configured for 4 kb/s CPSS, eight circuits are set aside (circuits 23
through 31) for 4 kb/s use; the remaining 23 circuits are available for n  8 kb/s
CPSS, where n  8.

221
A closer
view

Digital Signal The DSP cards and the IMC process DSP-based applications for interface cards.
Processing cards The DSP-based applications are maintained in a library and are downloaded to the
and modules, and DSP circuits on DSP cards and on the IMC to process inputs from interface cards.
Inverse The Control card holds the library from which the DSP cards and the IMC
Multiplexing cards download the applications.

DSP modules provide additional DSP links for the cards on which they are
installed. The FAX/HCV module provides combined G3 fax and HCV voice
compression.

There are two DSP module variants, six DSP card variants, and one IMC variant,
each providing different levels of processing power. The cards and modules
support the following applications:

• subrate switching (DSP4 card)

• subrate multiplexing
• transparent rate adaption, HCM rate adaption and multidrop data
bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)
• X.50 rate adaption and DDS rate adaption – DDS, DDS Access
and DDS Core (DSP2 and DSP3 cards)
• PCM bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)
• voice conference bridging (DSP3 card)
• HCV voice compression (DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP (G.728) voice
compression (DSP5 card)
• G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• super-tandem operation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• voice over frame relay with CS-A-CELP voice compression
• inverse multiplexing (IMC)
• echo cancellation (DSP, DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• V.32 modem relay (DSP5 card)

FRE card The FRE card provides the ability to switch the output of the frame relay
interfaces offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The
FRE card switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an
outgoing logical
data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured DLCs.

There are two variants of the FRE card: standard and X.25.

222
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Standard FRE card The standard FRE card:

• provides industry standard-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth

allocation, congestion control and frame error checking for up to 62 DS0s,
and super-rate n  56 or n  64 kb/s frame streams
• supports 8500 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over
two 1536 kb/s frame streams), combined bandwidth of 3968 kb/s, 992 PVCs
for each frame stream with up to 1984 PVCs total for each card
• supports HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
• RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
• ANSI T1.617a Annex G
• transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame
format, including support for CPSS over frame relay
• offers QoS and fragmentation/defragmentation features to support delay-
sensitive traffic, such as VoFR
• supports software upgrading

X.25 FRE card The X.25 FRE card provides complete, standards-compliant X.25 switching
capabilities, and supports most of the features available on the standard FRE
card for frame relay switching. For more information about X.25 switching, see
chapter 2.

FRS card The FRS card provides the ability to switch the output of the frame relay
interfaces offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The
FRS card switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an
outgoing logical
data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured DLCs.

The FRS card:

• provides industry standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth

allocation, congestion control and frame error checking for up to 31 DS0s,
and super-rate n  56 or n  64 kb/s frame streams
• supports 2000 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over
one 1920 kb/s frame stream), combined bandwidth of 1920 kb/s, 992 PVCs
for each frame stream with up to 1024 PVCs total for each card
• supports an optional SRIM, which processes data at subrate speeds (in
HCM, DDS, or X.50 format) that are not limited to multiples of 8 kb/s
• supports HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
• RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
• ANSI T1.617a Annex G
• transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame
format, including support for CPSS over frame relay
• supports software upgrading

223
A closer
view

PE card The PE card provides complete, standards-compliant X.25 switching

capabilities, and supports most of the features available on the standard FRE
card for frame relay switching. The PE card is similar in functionality to the
X.25 FRE, but has
more memory, higher packet throughput, greater fanout, and is better suited for
networks that require full per-call accounting. For more information about
X.25 switching, see chapter 2.

Configurable Tables 10-1 (CPC), 10-2 (DCP card), 10-3 (DSP cards and IMC) and 10-4
parameters (FRS, FRE, and PE cards) list all the application and packet switching card
configurable parameters. Table 10-5 lists the SRIM configurable features.

For information about X.25 configurable parameters supported on the X.25

FRE and PE cards, see the MainStreet X.25 Service General Information Book.

Table 10-1: CPC card configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options

B-channel inversion type Circuit No inversion
Mu-law
A-law

B-channel search Circuit Channel search high

Channel search low
Backplane communication Slot Shared
Dedicated
Bearer capability Circuit (index) Speech Clear
64 kb/s
Rate adaption
3.1 kHz

Bearer service Circuit H0 enable H0

disable Nx64
enable Nx64
disable

BRI initialization Circuit Fixed TEI

Auto TEI
SPID 1
SPID 2
Bus configuration

Bus configuration type Circuit Point-to-point

Point-to-multipoint
Call status information reporting Circuit Report off
Report on
Dial delay Circuit (index) First (0 to 60 s)
Subsequent (5 to 60 s)
Dial/nondial Circuit (index) Enable
Disable

224
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameter Level Options

Interface speed (serial ports 1 and 2) Slot 9600 b/s
1200 b/s
Interface standard Circuit NTT
EUROISDN
NI-1
NI-2

Interface type Circuit None

BRI
E1 PRI
T1 PRI

Local number Circuit

Directory number None
Local
National
International
Unknown

Subaddress None
1 to 7 characters

Number of B channels Circuit

BRI 1 or 2
T1 PRI 1 to 23
E1 PRI 1 to 30
Number of B channels Circuit (index) 1 to 30
Auto
PCM encoding Circuit A-law
Mu-law
Auto

Remote number Circuit (index)

Directory number 1 to 25 digits

Subaddress None
1 to 7 characters
Retries Circuit (index) 0 to 12
Infinite
Verify/nonverify (incoming call) Circuit (index) Enable
Disable

225
A closer
view

Table 10-2: DCP card configurable features

Feature Level Options

4 kb/s CPSS Card Enabled
Disabled
CPSS cost Circuit Bias against
Bias towards
Normal

Satellite delay Circuit Accept the delay time

Accept no delay time
Serial port CPSS cost Card Bias against
Bias towards
Normal

Serial port interface speed Card 300 b/s

600 b/s
1200 b/s
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port protocol Card CPSS
VT100
Transport bandwidth Circuit 8 to 64 kb/s

Table 10-3: DSP card and IMC configurable parameters

Parameter Level Options Card

6 dB attenuation pad Circuit Enabled DSP3
Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H

AC15 tone detection Circuit Enabled DSP3

Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H

ADI Circuit (branch) Enabled DSP1

Disabled DSP2
DSP3

Antistreaming Circuit (branch) Enabled DSP1

Disabled DSP2
DSP3

Antistreaming timeout Circuit (SRM) 1 to 255 s DSP1

DSP2
DSP3

226
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameter Level Options Card

Automatic gain control Circuit Enabled DSP5
Disabled DSP5H
Bearer rate Circuit 56 kb/s IMC
64 kb/s

Bit rate (1) Circuit 8 kb/s DSP5

9.6 kb/s
12.8 kb/s
16 kb/s
Break timer Circuit (VoFR) 80 ms to 30 s DSP5
Broadcaster Circuit (bridge) Enabled DSP3
Disabled
Broadcast mode Circuit (bridge) Enabled DSP3
Disabled
Card circuits Slot 2 cct DSP1
6 cct DSP2
DSP3

Card operation Slot Delta signaling DSP1

HCVD DSP2
DDS core DSP3

G3 fax relay DSP4

Subrate switching
G3 fax or super-tandem,
or combined G3 fax and
super-tandem
Application number DSP5
LD-CELP
A-CELP
AVoFR

Application number DSP5H

Fax/HCV
Companding law Circuit (input for A-law DSP1 (PCM
VCBs, SRM for bridging)
Mu-law
PCM bridges, HCV DSP2 (PCM
compression) Automatic
bridging)
DSP3 (VCBs, PCM
bridging, HCV
compression)
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Composite inputs for Circuit (SRM) Composite Not DSP1
SRM branch channels composite DSP2
DSP3
DSP4

227
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card

Compression Circuit 16 kb/s DSP3
8 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Data position for HCM Circuit F0-B6 to F9-B0 DSP3
DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DLCI assignment Circuit (VoFR) 16 to 1007 DSP5
DS0 port interface Circuit (SRS) 2.4 kb/s DSP4
speeds for DDS DS0- 4.8 kb/s
A rate-adapted
subrate sets 9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s 56
kb/s
DS0 port interface Circuit (SRS) 2.4 kb/s DSP4
speeds for DDS DS0- 4.8 kb/s
B rate-adapted
subrate sets 9.6 kb/s

DS0 port interface Circuit (SRS) 2.4 kb/s DSP4

speeds for X.50 4.8 kb/s
rate-adapted subrate
sets 9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s
DS0 port HCM Circuit (SRS) 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) DSP4
bandwidth
DS0 port HCM F-bit Circuit (SRS) B7 to B0 DSP4
position
DSP resources Slot 1  10 DSP5
(2)
2  10
2  10 DSP5H
DTMF tone detection Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5
Disabled
DTMF tone Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5
regeneration Disabled
E1 signaling type Circuit Transparent DSP3
Clear channel DSP4
E&M DSP5
Continuous E&M DSP5H
LGS remote extension
LGS earth calling
LGS PLAR
LGE remote extension
LGE earth calling

Echo cancellation for Circuit Enabled DSP3

HCV circuit Disabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H

228
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameter Level Options Card

Echo cancellation Circuit 3 dB DSP3
return loss threshold DSP4
6 dB
0 dB to 12 dB DSP5
DSP5H
Echo clipping for HCV Circuit Enabled DSP3
circuit Disabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H

Echo clipping Circuit –10 to –50 dBM0 DSP5

threshold DSP5H
Fax transmission Circuit Enabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Disabled DSP5
Forced super-tandem Circuit Enabled DSP4
Disabled
Hub identification Slot 2-digit BCD octal number (00 DSP1
to 77) DSP2
DSP3

Input gain Circuit (input) –16 to +9 dB DSP3

LD-CELP post-filter Circuit Enabled DSP5H
Disabled
Listen-only mode Circuit (input) Enabled DSP3
Disabled
Mode Circuit Mode 1 IMC
Mode 3
Multidrop data bridge Circuit (SRM) Master DSP1
branch channel or Slave DSP2
circuit devices
DSP3
Nonstandard facilities Circuit All messages transmitted and DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
frame handling received
NSF messages blocked
Output gain Circuit (input) –16 dB to +9 dB DSP3
Rate adaption Circuit Transparent DSP3
methods (HCV) HCM DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H

Rate adaption methods Circuit (SRS) Transparent DSP4

(SRS circuit or DS0 HCM
port)
DDS X.50
4 kb/s CPSS

Rx and Tx gain range Circuit –12 to +12 dB DSP5H

SCID assignment Circuit (VoFR) 4 to 255 DSP5

229
A closer
view

Parameter Level Options Card

Set identifier X.50 Circuit (SRS) 1 to 20 (at 2.4 kb/s) DSP4
SRS
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15,
17, 19 (at 4.8 kb/s)
1, 5, 9, 13, 17
(at 9.6 kb/s)
5, 13 or 1, 9 (at 19.2 kb/s)
1 (at 48 kb/s)
Sidetone gain Circuit (input) Enabled DSP3
Disabled
Signaling jitter buffer Circuit (VoFR) Auto DSP5
Off
Signaling type Circuit E1 DSP3
T1 DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H

Silence detection Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5

Disabled
Silence detection Circuit (VoFR) –80 to –30 dBm0 DSP5
threshold
Subframe type Slot M44 DSP1
SIG16S DSP2
SIG16L DSP3
SIG32

Super-tandem Circuit Enabled DSP4

operation (3) Disabled DSP5
DSP5H
Super-tandem Circuit 0.1 to 3.1 s DSP4
synchronization time (0.1-s increments)
0.1 to 5.0 s DSP5
(0.1-s increments) DSP5H
Synchronization Circuit Declare: 0 to 30 s IMC
alarm Clear: 1 to 30 s
Synchronization Loss Circuit Enabled DSP3
alarm DSP4
Disabled
DSP5
DSP5H
Synchronization Lost Circuit Enabled DSP3
alarm Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H

230
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameter Level Options Card

Synchronization Lost Circuit Declare: 0.5 to 60 s DSP3
alarm times DSP4
Clear: 0.5 to 60 s
DSP5
DSP5H

T1 signaling type Circuit Transparent DSP3

Clear channel DSP4
E&M DSP5
LGS LS DSP5H
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS

Transmission level Circuit –3 to –15 dBm0 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

Transmission rate Circuit 4800 b/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
9600 b/s
Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) DSP3
for HCM (HCM_TRANS)
Circuit (HCM 16 to 64 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
8 kb/s)
Circuit (HCM 24 to 64 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
16 kb/s)
Circuit 8 kb/s 16 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
(Transparent)
Transport position Circuit B7 to B0 DSP3
Circuit (HCM or B7 to B0 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Transparent
8 kb/s)
Circuit (Transparent B7 to B1, B6 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
16 kb/s)

User-side interface Circuit 384 kb/s IMC

speed
User/system reserved Circuit (SRM) System DSP1
inputs User DSP2
DSP3
DSP4

Notes
1. The DSP5 card supports an 8 kb/s bit rate when A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) voice compression is
configured. It supports an 8 or 16 kb/s bit rate with HCV voice compression and 9.6, 12.8, and 16 kb/s
bit rates with LD-CELP voice compression. AVoFR uses A-CELP voice compression for an 8 kb/s
bit rate.
2. This option applies to CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression. CS-A-CELP (G.729A) is of a lower
complexity than CS-A-CELP (G.729) voice compression. If AVoFR is configured and this option is
selected, 10 DSP circuits are allocated for AVoFR operation.
3. This option is supported on DSP5 cards configured for A-CELP voice compression and
AVoFR.

231
A closer
view

Table 10-4: FRS, FRE and PE card configurable parameters

Parameters Level Options Card

ACT Encapsulation circuit 1 to 64 kbytes for FRS cards 1 FRS
to 6000 ms for FRE cards FRE
1 to 1500 kbytes for PE cards PE

FASTbus interface 10 to 1000 kbytes FRE

PE
Frame stream 1 to 64 kbytes for FRS cards FRS
1 to 1500 kbytes for X.25 FRE and PE FRE
cards PE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards
Backplane communications Card Dedicated FRS
Shared FRE
PE

Bc DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

0 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards FRE
PE

Be DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

0 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards FRE
PE

Cable name FASTbus interface 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters, no FRE

spaces PE
Card application Card SRIM FRS
No module
CIR DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS
0 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards FRE
PE

Circuit application Circuit Stream FRS

Rate adaption (1) FRE
Encapsulation PE

Class-of-service rate enforcement DLC Enable FRS

Disable FRE
PE

Congestion clear time Encapsulation circuit 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE
FASTbus interface 1 to 1440 min FRE
PE
Frame stream 1 to 1440 min FRE
PE

Switch (2) 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE

232
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameters Level Options Card

Congestion filtering Encapsulation circuit Enable FRE
Disable PE
FASTbus interface Enable FRE
Disable PE
Frame stream Enable FRE
Disable PE

Switch (2) Enable FRE

Disable PE
Congestion raise time Encapsulation circuit 0 to 240 s FRE
PE
FASTbus interface 0 to 240 s FRE
PE
Frame stream 0 to 240 s FRE
PE

Switch (2) 0 to 240 s FRE

PE
CPSS router version Card Router version 1 FRS
Host router
Encapsulated protocol maximum Encapsulation circuit 16 to 4472 octets FRS
frame size FRE
PE

Encapsulation type Encapsulation circuit LAPB RFC 1490 FRS

LAPB Annex G FRE
Transparent HDLC PE
Trace agent

FASTbus CPSS Card CPSS1 FRE

CPSS2 PE
Fault handling mode Card Enhanced FRE
Standard PE
Flags between frames Frame stream 1 to 10 FRE
PE
Fragment payload size DLC 32, 34, 82, 128, or 130 bytes FRE
Fragmentation mode DLC Disabled Fragment FRE
Reassemble
Fragment and reassemble
Interwork

Frame stream name Circuit 0 to 8 alphanumeric characters, no FRS

spaces FRE
PE

233
A closer
view

Parameters Level Options Card

Heartbeat polling interval Frame stream 5 to 30 s FRS
FRE
PE

Interface speed Circuit 8 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

8 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards FRE
PE

Major fault card dead threshold Card 1 to 30000 FRE

Unlimited PE
Major fault card reset threshold Card 1 to 30000 FRE
Unlimited PE
Maximum frame size Frame stream 16 to 4472 octets FRS
FRE
PE

MCT Encapsulation circuit 0 to 100% for FRS and PE cards 1 FRS

to 6000 ms for FRE cards FRE
PE

FASTbus interface 0 to 100% FRE

PE
Frame stream 0 to 100% for FRS, X.25 FRE, and PE FRS
cards FRE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards PE

Switch (2) 0 to 100% FRS

FRE
PE

Protocol type Frame stream LMI User, Network, Network Extended FRS
ANSI T1.617 Annex D User, Network, FRE
Bidirectional PE
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A User, Network,
Bidirectional (= Annex A Network)
No protocol
Auto discovery (network mode) (3)
DLC No port FRE
Annex A bidirectional (5)
Annex B bidirectional (5)
Protocol subchannel DLC 0 to 255 FRE

234
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Parameters Level Options Card

Report type Encapsulation circuit Alarm FRE
Network management events PE
FASTbus interface Alarm FRE
Network management events PE
Frame stream Alarm FRE
Network management events PE
None (FRE cards only)

Switch (2) Alarm FRE

Network management events PE
SCT Encapsulation circuit 0 to 100% for FRS and PE cards 1 FRS
to 6000 ms for FRE cards FRE
PE

FASTbus interface 0 to 100% FRE

PE
Frame stream 0 to 100% for the FRS, X.25 FRE, and PE FRS
cards FRE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards PE

Switch (2) 0 to 100% FRS

FRE
PE

Serial port baud rate Card 300 b/s FRS

600 b/s FRE
1200 b/s PE
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port CPSS cost Card Normal Bias FRS
against Bias FRE
toward PE

Serial port type Card CPSS FRS

VT100 FRE
PE

Service category DLC Real time FRE

Best effort
Station identifier FASTbus interface 0 to 64 FRE
PE

235
A closer
view

Parameters Level Options Card

Status enquiry message timeout Frame stream 5 to 30 s (4) FRS
FRE
PE

Status message rate Frame stream 1 to 255 FRS

FRE
PE

Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s) FRS

FRE
PE

Notes
1. This option applies only to FRS cards equipped with a SRIM.
2. The card CPU takes the same congestion clear time and congestion raise time values as those configured for the switch. Congestion
filtering is always enabled on the CPU, regardless of the configuration for the switch.
3. The auto-discovery option sets the auto-discovery protocol through the protocol type parameter, even though the auto-discovery protocol is
not a link management protocol.
4. This option is configurable as heartbeat, timeout, or status rate.
5. This option is not configurable if the auto-discovery protocol is used.

Table 10-5: SRIM configurable features

Feature Level Options Restrictions

A-bit handling Slot Nonstandard SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
Standard
Aggregate circuit Circuit CPSS –
mode Stream
Rate adaption
Data position Subrate F0-B7 to F9-B0 Rate adaption: HCM
stream
DDS method Circuit DS0-A and DS0-B: Rate adaption: DDS
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s (DS0-A only)
Framing bit position Circuit B7 to B0 Rate adaption: HCM

236
 10. Application and packet switching
cards

Feature Level Options Restrictions

Interface speed Circuit 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM
4800 b/s Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
Subrate 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM
stream 4800 b/s Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s DDS method: DS0-A
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
2400 b/s DDS method: DS0-B
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
2400 b/s SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
4800 b/s Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2, 3
or 5
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
48000 b/s SRIM mode: X.50
Rate adaption: X.50 Bis
Loopback detection Slot On SRIM mode: DDS
Off or HCM
X.50 or HCM

Module type Slot No module –

SRIM
Rate adaption Circuit HCM –
DDS
X.50
Subrate DDS SRIM mode: DDS or HCM
stream
HCM –
X.50 SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
Signaling Subrate On Rate adaption: HCM
stream Off
SRIM mode Slot X.50 or HCM Module type: SRIM
DDS or HCM

237
A closer
view

Feature Level Options Restrictions

Subframe position Subrate 1 to 20 at 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM
stream Rate adaption: DDS
1 to 10 at 4800 b/s
1 to 5 at 9600 b/s DDS method: DS0-B
2 or 4 at 19200 b/s
1 at 56000 b/s (DS0-A
only)

at 2.4 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

1 5 9 13 Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2
17 21 25 29
33 37 41 45
49 53 57 61
65 69 73 77
at 4.8 kb/s: –
1 9 17 25
33 41 49 57
65 73
at 9.6 kb/s: –
17 33 49 65
at 19.2 kb/s: –
1 17 33 49
at 2.4 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
1 to 20 Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 3
at 4.8 kb/s: –
1 3 5 7
9 11 13 15
17 19
at 9.6 kb/s: –
1 5 9 13
17
at 19.2 kb/s: –
1 5 9 13
at 48 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
1 Rate adaption: X.50 bis
Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s) Rate adaption: HCM

Subrate 1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s) –
stream
Transport position Subrate B7 to B0 Rate adaption: HCM
stream
X.50 method Circuit Div. 2 SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
Div. 3

238
Management
11
Management overview
Alcatel management products enable service providers to push the limits of
efficient networking and service provisioning. The management portfolio
includes a full complement of products for managing a growing, carrier-scale,
multiservice network. Alcatel management products provide harmonized
solutions that are optimized to minimize network complexity and control the
total cost of ownership.

This chapter describes:

• types of management used for advanced communications networks

• service management
• network management
• node management
• open interfaces

241
Management

Types of The TMN reference model defined by the ITU-T provides service providers
management with layered management functionswithin a framework for the integrated
management of a communications network. Figure 11-1shows the management
layers.

Figure 11-1: Management layers

Business
management

Service
A Open management
c interfaces c
o
u
n
t
Open Network
ni interfaces g management

Node
management

14765

The business management layer consists of management processes used to

operate the business of providing network-based services to customers.

The service management layer consists of management processes used to

develop and operate the services that the network supports.

The network management layer consists of management processes used to

develop and operate the infrastructure of the network.

The node management layer consists of management processes used to operate the
elements that make up the network infrastructure.

Open interfaces are a method OSSs use to manage the network and service layers.

Accounting is the means of providing information for billing of services.

Service Alcatel service management products offer:

management
• unparalleled subscriber service assurance by using network failure analysis
• reduced time-to-market for new services
• more rapid and cost-effective service activation
• web-based access, visibility, and control for service providers and subscribers
• advanced functions such as touchless provisioning and subscriber self-service

242
 11. Management overview

Service management
products
The suite of Alcatel and CrossKeys service management products leverages the
Alcatel network management products and includes:

• Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager

• Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager
• CrossKeys Resolve Si

Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager

The Alcatel 5740 SSM is a software application designed for broadband
DSLservice providers who use their access infrastructure to offer their own retail
services or offer broadband connectivity to ISPs and multimedia content providers.
Such services include high-speed Internet access, broadcast TV, and video-on-
demand services.

By mapping service-level objects such as retail providers, subscribers, service

subscriptions, and service definitions to network ports and virtual connections, the
Alcatel 5740 SSM reduces the complexity of service activation.

The Alcatel 5740 SSM interprets and displays network events in terms of their
impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5740 SSM provides JAVA-
based GUIs for service providers who provide web-based access.

Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager

The Alcatel 5730 VSM is a software application designed for service providers who
offer private VPN-based services for outsourcing corporate Intranet connectivity.
These VPN services may be offered as:

• managed frame relay

• managed cell relay
• IP VPNs using Internet tunneling such as IPSec
• QoS-based VPNs using MPLS in the core network

VPNs are identified as subscriber sites and services. All configuration, fault, and
performance management of each VPN is presented through this subscriber and
service identification. Network services and events are shown as a visual map and
presented in terms of their impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5730
VSM provides JAVA-based GUIs for service providers who provide web-based
access.

CrossKeys Resolve Si
CrossKeys Resolve Si is a software application that correlates network
information to provide an end-to-end service view by linking subscriber
information and QoS objectives. It manages service performance from a
subscriber perspective and provides the necessary information to ensure delivery
of high-value services that meet the subscriber requirements.

243
Management

Network The Alcatel network management portfolio includes a full complement of related
management management products for managing a growing, carrier-scale, multiservice
network.

Alcatel 5620 Network

The Alcatel 5620 NM is an industry-leading network and element management
Manager
platform that is distinguished by its open, scalable, highly available, multiaccess,
multitechnology management capabilities. Network management functions
include:

• fault management
• configuration management
• accounting
• performance management
• security functions

With the Alcatel 5620 NM, network operators have an easy-to-use GUI to
perform the following across a full range of ATM, frame relay, IP, X.25, and
TDM elements:

• monitor network operation in real time

• set up and manage end-to-end connections
• perform diagnostics
• back up and restore node databases
• perform software upgrades
• isolate and manage problems

The Alcatel 5620 NM provides unsurpassed scalability and flexibility. It can

manage networks of any size, containing thousands of nodes.

Table 11-1 describes some of the features of the Alcatel 5620 NM.

Table 11-1: Features of the Alcatel 5620 NM

Feature Description
Sophisticated A relational database tracks the status of most of the MIB objects in the
network modeling underlying network elements.
Redundancy Service providers can deploy two Alcatel 5620 NM stations: one in
active mode and the other in standby mode.
Scalability The Alcatel 5620 NM offers unparalleled scalability to support networks of up
to 25 000 resources, 5000 nodes, over 250 000 SPVCs, over
1 000 000 SVCs, and up to 255 network operators.
Configuration Network nodes and resources can be configured down to the port and circuit
management level.
Partitioning Service providers can design network sharing structures so that they can
assign as much or as little of the network as required.

244
 11. Management overview

Feature Description
Connection Sophisticated access/backbone link and connection-management
provisioning and capabilities provide precise control over bandwidth usage and
activation connection routing for the following connection types:
• Layer 3
• Layer 2
• Layer 1
• PVCs, SPVCs, and SVCs
• IP services

Network map The network navigation map displays the network hierarchy and a structured
representation and view of the network. Icons represent individual elements and information about
navigation the connections between them.
Node The Alcatel 5620 NM automatically detects new nodes in the network and
autodiscovery immediately initiates a process to reconcile node details into its
management database.
Customized Service providers can represent the network in ways that are most meaningful
network views to the operator.
Fault management Network faults are immediately visible. Sophisticated tools for diagnostics
and maintenance functions aid in the recovery process.
Real-time status An advanced real-time GUI provides visibility of the status of all network
reporting components down to the port and circuit level.
Real-time performance Operators have real-time views of the performance of elements in the
monitoring network.

Trouble ticketing Network status changes result in the automatic generation of trouble tickets
to aid in recording and tracking network faults.
Alarms Service providers can configure network elements to send alarms to the Alcatel
5620 NM.

Fault notifications: Alarms or trouble tickets are exported in real time to other management
CMIP and SNMP systems in the form of CMIP notifications or SNMP trap messages.
Diagnostics and Physical port loopbacks and busy-outs, in-band ATM OAM loopback and
maintenance continuity testing, and the capability to perform on-node and
off-node maintenance connections, are powerful tools that enable
customers to carry out their own diagnostics and maintenance.
Path rerouting and The automatic connection recovery capability attempts to reroute all
recovery connections around any trunk failure because of a physical layer alarm.
If a network failure results in the loss of continuity of an end-to-end
connection, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically attempts to move the service to
an alternate access point.

245
Management

Alcatel 5620 NMStatistics Collector

The Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector is a scalable statistics collection system
that provides raw usage data across all network equipment and technologies
managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM. It can be used to collect statistics on items
such as PVCs, trunks and access links, IP interfaces, and X.25 resources. It
collects statistics at the physical, frame, and cell-switching layers of the network
for traffic volume, network congestion, and error conditions.

Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector

The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector is a billing mediation system that collects and
processes SVC accounting records generated by X.25, frame relay, and ATM
switches. Processing includes aggregation, formatting, rating, and validation of the
collected accounting records.

Some Alcatel nodes can send SVC accounting data records to the Alcatel 5620 NM
Data Collector for processing, aggregation, formatting, rating, and validation.
The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector can send the data to the CrossKeys
NetworkWare KeyBill for flexible billing mediation options, to KeyInfo for
network reporting, and to KeyNotes for operator-to-operator communications.

Alcatel 5650 MultiNetwork Service Controller

The Alcatel 5650 MNSC is a software application that consolidates the
management of multiple Alcatel 5620 NM networks under a single end-to-end
management platform. Its ability to support separate networks makes the
5650 MNSC unique in the industry.

The separate networks may belong to one service provider or are recognized
through partnerships with other service providers. Consolidating the
management of multiple networks enables service providers to extend the
geographical coverage of their services to include partner networks, while
continuing to enjoy
single-touch end-to-end provisioning and service assurance as if they had a single,
integrated network.

Alcatel 5660 Network Design System

The Alcatel 5660 NDS is a software tool for network design, optimization,
planning, and failure analysis. It enables network engineers to eliminate many of
the costly, specialized, and labor-intensive tasks involved in designing complex
networks and planning for future growth.

Network design is a complex process, requiring detailed knowledge of equipment

capabilities, bandwidth provisioning, and future connectivity requirements. The
Alcatel 5660 NDS incorporates years of engineering expertise and includes
automated features to save time inputting data and defining network details.

246
 11. Management overview

Related network
management products
Alcatel provides a number of network management products that complement
the Alcatel 5620 NM. These products share the LAN used by the Alcatel 5620
NM and include the:

• Alcatel 5620 NM Network Simulator

• Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family
• CrossKeys Resolve Ni
• CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo
• CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes

Alcatel 5620 NMNetwork Simulator

The Alcatel 5620 NM Network Simulator is a software application that looks
and functions exactly like the Alcatel 5620 NM but allows network operators to
simulate and test networks without attached equipment or bandwidth resources.
It is useful for training new operators without affecting live network operations
and for studying planned changes to an existing network.

Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family

The Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family includes the
Alcatel 5521 EM, the Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager, and the
Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, and
Windows NT are supported as the operating environments for these products.
The Alcatel 5521 EM provides single-terminal control of small networks up to
100 nodes, allowing remote configuration of network equipment and centralized
alarm reporting. The Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager works with an
Alcatel 5521 EM or Alcatel 5620 NM to keep on-call network technicians
informed of major network events. It allows the technician to remotely access
nodes through network links or through modems on the PSTN.

The Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager provides an easy-to-use, text-

based, menu-based interface for configuring, monitoring, and troubleshooting
nodes through a node management session.

CrossKeys Resolve Ni
CrossKeys Resolve Ni is a software application that enables network operators
to explore and analyze networks from every angle to achieve rapid and
comprehensive understanding of network performance.

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo is a network reporting application.

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes is a software application that
provides operator-to-operator communications.

247
Management

SNMP support SNMP is a management protocol used to set and monitor network configuration
and runtime parameters of entities in a TCP/IP LAN. The Alcatel 5620 NM
provides three levels of SNMP support for SNMP-managed devices:

• direct support as part of the Alcatel 5620 NM basic configuration

• Open SNMP, which is an integration with HP Openview NNM
• element managers such as CrossKeys CrossControl

CPSS The Alcatel 5620 NM uses CPSS, a proprietary communication protocol, to

manage the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. CPSS
messages carry the following types of information:

• control commands
• statistics for performance monitoring
• alarms for diagnostic purposes
• configuration status data

CPSS messages travel through in-band or out-of-band CPSS links. In-band CPSS
links use the same medium that subscriber traffic uses, such as a T1 link between
two 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Managers. Out-of-band
CPSS links use a different medium than that used by subscriber traffic, such as an
RS-232 link between the Alcatel 5620 NM and a 3600/3600+ MainStreet system.

Connection methods Network management equipment can connect to the 3600 + MainStreet system
through network or serial connections.

Network connections
When the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM
through a network connection, CPSS messages travel in band over CPSS links
that use any of the following network links:

• timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

• the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
• the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56
kb/s and n  64 kb/s variants)
• all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link

Serial connections
When the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM
through a serial connection, CPSS messages travel out of band over CPSS links
that use the RS-232 ports on the control and DCP cards.

248
 11. Management overview

Node management The Alcatel element management portfolio provides a comprehensive suite of
tools for managing nodes such as the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit.

Node management
products The node management products include the:

• Alcatel 5620 NM GUI

• built-in node management interface
• Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager
• CrossKeys CrossControl

Node management through the Alcatel 5620 NM GUI

The Alcatel 5620 NM has an intuitive GUI that manages the 3600 + MainStreet unit
over CPSS links set up for network management. The GUI is used for:

• node configuration
• monitoring
• diagnostics
• database backup and restoration
• fault management
• software upgrades

Built-in node management interface

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit has a built-in, menu-driven node
management interface, known as the NMTI, that can be accessed from a node
management terminal or the Alcatel 5620 NM.

The node management terminal can be an ASCII (VT100) terminal, or a PC-based

terminal running terminal emulation software or the Alcatel Craft Interface Node
Manager. The terminal can be connected to the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit locally
or remotely through modems.

The Alcatel 5620 NM enables operators to initiate an NMTI node management

session while running a GUI-based session. An NMTI node management session
provides a supplementary method of managing the node.

See chapter 12 for information about node management sessions and the node
management products used to conduct them.

Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager

The 5520 EM provides remote configuration and monitoring of third-partySNMP
nodes through a GUI. It can operate as a standalone system running on HP
OpenView NNM or can be integrated with the 5520 EM. The 5520 EM extends
the element management footprint of the Alcatel 5620 NM to third-party SNMP
nodes.

249
Management

The 5520 EM can be used to develop device descriptor files. Device descriptor
files are value-added products that interface between the 5520 EM and SNMP
nodes by interpreting SNMP messages. The files are easily developed and
modified.

CrossKeys CrossControl
The CrossKeys CrossControl products extend the Alcatel 5620 NM applications
to the management of third-party equipment. Third-party equipment can be
completely managed from the Alcatel 5620 NM, including equipment
configuration, fault management, and end-to-end 1/0 or 3/1 connection
management.

Open interfaces The Alcatel management portfolio includes open interfaces for service and
network management using either CMIP or CORBA. These interfaces are
scalable,
TMN-standards-based OSS gateways that allow other OSSs to access and control
networks managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM, Alcatel 5740 SSM, or Alcatel 5730
VSN through an object-oriented MIB.

Open interface products The Alcatel open interface products are the:

• Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface

• Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface
• Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface

Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface is an open interface that
enables front-office CORBA-based OSSs to connect to the Alcatel 5740 SSM or
the Alcatel 5730 VSN. This connection enables the exchange of information
related to service level objects such as subscribers, services, subscriptions, and
service definitions. Using this interface, CORBA-based OSSs can be rapidly
bonded to networks managed by an Alcatel 5620 NM, in order to automate
service provisioning and activation.

Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5611 CMIP is a CMIS TMN-compliant OSI-agent interface. CMIP
is the protocol used by CMIS to perform actions such as create, delete, set, get,
action, and event notification. The Alcatel 5611 CMIP acts as a gateway for
CMIP management applications and the Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS
Interface to communicate with the Alcatel 5620 NM.

Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5612 CORBA facilitates the development of distributed object-based
systems. It acts as a gateway for CORBA management applications to communicate
with the Alcatel 5611 CMIP.

250
 11. Management overview

Alcatel Connected ISV

Partner Program
Service providers require OSS solutions that will allow them to quickly and
flexibly offer new competitive services to realize aggressive RO targets. In
addition, service excellence is required to continuously meet subscriber
expectations, to minimize subscriber churn, and grow service selection, To
achieve these objectives, OSS solutions must interact in an end-to-end fashion
with best-of-breed network solutions, including network elements and network
management products. The Alcatel Connected ISV Partner Program is a program
designed to provide service providers with a pre-certified interoperable solution
between the Alcatel management platform and the appropriate ISV application.
When purchasing an Alcatel certified application from the third party, the service
provider can be confident that Alcatel and its partner(s) have jointly participated
in the certification of the application.

251
 12
Node management

The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is entirely

software-configurable. All functions are software-driven and all configurable
parameters are stored in a nonvolatile configuration database. All functions and
parameters are accessed by reading from and writing to the configuration database
during a node management session.

This chapter describes node management sessions and the node management
products used to conduct them. Most node management functions can also be
performed from network managers (see chapter 11).

Node management A node management session is the time during which you use the standard,
sessions menu-driven user interface, known as the NMTI, to perform configuration and
maintenance operations on the 3600 + MainStreet system. Because this user
interface is common to all 3600 MainStreet series bandwidth manager
systems, training is greatly reduced.

A node management session can be accessed from a node management terminal

connected to a 3600/3600+ MainStreet serial port (directly or through a
modem).

253
Management

• PC running the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager

The Alcatel Craft Interface is a PC-based software program designed for
node installation and initial configuration or on-site troubleshooting. It
provides NMTI access to all MainStreet nodes, as well as cards and DTUs
that support an integral NMTI. The PC is connected (usually by a direct
physical connection) to a single node for the purpose of managing that node
only. All configuration and maintenance procedures can be performed
through the Alcatel Craft Interface, which is the preferred tool for local node
management.
• ASCII (VT100) terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal (or a PC running terminal emulation software)
can be used to initiate a node management session with a node, as well as
cards or DTUs that support an integral NMTI. Not all configuration and
maintenance procedures can be performed through a node management
session initiated from an ASCII terminal. Some procedures must be initiated
from the Craft Interface.
• Alcatel network managers
Alcatel network managers, such as the Alcatel 5620 NM or the Alcatel 5521
Element Manager products, can be used to initiate a node management session
with a node, as well as with cards or DTUs that support an integral NMTI.

All common control and node management facilities for the system are
performed through the Control card NMTI. In addition, the following cards and
DTUs support integral node management sessions:

• CPC
• FRS card
• FRE card
• X.25 FRE card
• PE card
• 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs

All DS0-based circuit cross-connections are configured during a node

management session with the Control card. All frame relay DLC cross-
connections are configured during a node management session with the
appropriate FRS, FRE,
X.25 FRE, or PE card.

254
 12. Node management

Active and inactive cards Cards can be active or inactive, depending on their redundancy configuration.
You can initiate a node management session with either the active or inactive
node. For control-redundant shelves, the operating Control card is called active;
the standby Control card is called inactive.

Any configuration change made during a node management session with the
active card is applied to the system immediately. Any configuration change made
during a node management session with the inactive card is not applied to the
system until an activity switch occurs. This allows in-service system upgrades
with little or no interruption of service: a new revision of system software can be
installed on the inactive card while the system is operating, and when the
installation is complete an activity switch can be configured to bring the new
software online.

System serial ports A node management station can be connected to one of two RS-232 ALAPB
system serial ports. System serial ports are accessible on the bulkhead of
3600/3600+ MainStreet shelves and on the faceplates of some cards.

Configuration Complete configuration of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet system, including all slot
and cross- and circuit parameters, can be performed before UCS cards and modules have
connections been installed. The configuration database of any node, or any card and DTU
that supports an integral NMTI, can be downloaded in a newly commissioned
system to reduce the time required to configure basic attributes.

Configuration access can be restricted by the use of user-configurable password-

protected access levels. Five access levels are provided to tailor user group
requirements with read-only, read/write, and no access privileges to critical areas
of system configuration.

You can copy operating parameters (except the circuit name and connection)
from one circuit to another.

Database All node connection and configuration information (collectively called the
management configuration database) for nodes is stored in NVM on the Control card. Any
card that supports an integral NMTI stores its own configuration database. The
configuration databases of DTUs (including those that support an integral NMTI)
are stored in NVM on the Control card.

Checking the NVM The NVM can be checked to determine whether the configuration database
has been corrupted. An NVM problem may be fixed by restoring the database.

255
Management

Backup and restore The database of a node or card, or DTU that has NVM can be backed up to an
external device. If the node database becomes corrupted, it can be restored from
the backup file through a node management session.

The backup file from one node can also be used to restore the database to another
node of the same type. This facilitates configuring a series of nodes with
identical databases. The node number and node name are not affected by a
database restore.

Verify The verify procedure compares two configuration databases to determine if

they are identical. This procedure can be used to determine if the node has been
configured with the correct database.

Reconcile The configuration database for cards that have NVM is divided between the
card NVM and the NVM of the Control card. If inconsistencies develop
between the two configuration databases, the NVM of the card can be
configured to match the database of the Control card. This process is called
reconciliation.

Database
management access All database management operations are performed through a node management
session with the appropriate card. The availability of database management
operations is dependent upon:

• the card type

• the card status (active or inactive)
• the node manager type (NMTI, Alcatel Craft Interface, Alcatel 5620 NM,
or Alcatel 5521 EM)

Table 12-1 summarizes the conditions under which database management

operations can be performed. For inactive cards, the table indicates whether the
verify or restore operation can be done from the external file or from the active
card.

Table 12-1: Configuration database operations

Card and status Operation (1)

Card type Status Backup Verify Restore (2)
Control card Active control To file From file From file
Inactive control To file From file or From file or
active card active card
CPC, FRS, FRE, X.25 — To file From file From file
FRE, or PE (3)

Notes
1. All operations on an active node or on any card or DTU that has NVM require access to an external
device in order to back up, verify or restore the configuration database file.
2. A restore operation cannot be performed through a node management session with an Alcatel 5521
EM connected indirectly to the node through a modem.
3. Available only through a Craft Interface or Alcatel 5521 EM session.

256
 12. Node management

Maintenance and The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system offers an extensive suite of maintenance and
diagnostics diagnostic applications that facilitate network monitoring and problem isolation.
Maintenance and diagnostic applications are:

• loopbacks
• signaling lead control
• alarm monitoring
• statistics gathering
• diagnostics
• digital connection maintenance
• digital and metallic split and monitor test access

Loopbacks A loopback is a maintenance application used to isolate faults in a transmission

path. During a loopback, the transmitted signal is looped back and returned to
the transmitting device. The outgoing and returned signals can then be
compared.

Loopbacks are available on all voice and data circuits, on individual channels on the
primary rate link, and on the primary rate link as a whole.

Signaling lead control The incoming and outgoing signaling leads on the 3600/3600+ MainStreet
system can be examined, and the outgoing signaling leads can be changed to
force conditions at the far end. Table 12-2 shows the supported incoming and
outgoing signaling leads.

Table 12-2: Incoming and outgoing signaling leads

Circuit type Incoming signaling leads Outgoing signaling leads

64 kb/s ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)
codirectional
ASC (AAL1) ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate for A (received) A (transmitted)
TTC2M card
E&M M-lead E-lead
LGS Loop current detect Ringing
Ground detect Tip open
Reverse battery

LGE Ringing Loop closure

Tip ground Ring ground
Forward feed
Reverse feed

DNIC Sync Force unsync

LQ1
LQ2

257
Management

Alarm monitoring The cards and shelves are continuously monitored for abnormal conditions or
significant events. When an abnormal condition is detected or a significant event
occurs, an alarm record is created. For more information about alarm handling,
see chapter 1.

Statistics gathering The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system gathers the following types of statistics:

• usage statistics for voice cards

• quality statistics for aggregate and high-speed aggregate cards
• protection switching statistics for Octal E1, OC-3, and STM-1 cards
• port quality statistics for high-speed aggregate and ATM Services cards
• quality statistics for 27LC2, 27LC3, and 28LC line cards, and for 2B1Q
channel units
• usage and quality statistics for ATM Services cards
• node synchronization statistics
• switch, frame stream, encapsulation circuit, DLC, and CPSS statistics for
FRS, FRE, and PE cards
• FASTbus, station statistics for FRE and PE cards
• muxpooint and muxpoint DLC statistics for FRE card
• X.25 and X.75 statistics for X.25 FRE and PE cards

Diagnostics The cards and channel units in 3600 + MainStreet systemscan perform a number
of system-wide and circuit-specific diagnostic tests. Some tests are performed
during the power-up procedure, while others can be enabled to take place
automatically as a background task or on a directed basis. System commands,
given through a node management session, can enable or disable diagnostics or
perform a specified test repeatedly.

Diagnostics do not busy out a circuit or remove it from service. If the circuit is
required for a call while a test is in progress, the test on that circuit is terminated.
Similarly, diagnostics are not performed on busy circuits.

Table 12-3 shows the diagnostic tests that can be run.

258
 12. Node management

Table 12-3: Background and directed diagnostic tests

Test (1) Function Description

1 Program Integrity Performs a checksum over the entire program space and
Flash memory of the active Control card memory bank.

2 RAM Integrity
3 Nonvolatile RAM Integrity
4 Tone Generator Self Test 1
5 Tone Generator Self Test 2
6 Digital Loopback test
7 Analog Loopback Test 1
8 Analog Loopback Test 2
9 Frequency Test
15 Narrowband Switch Matrix
Integrity
16 Broadband Switch Matrix
Integrity
Performs a read and write test over the entire range of
RAM.
Performs a checksum of NVM space.
Compares the tone from the Timing card to known tone
data.
Applies and checks a tone from the Timing card to a
frequency detector within the Timing card.
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, MRD, T1,
and E1 circuits by performing digital loopbacks on a
circuit and SMACing the data patch over a specified
time.
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to perform a digital
loopback from the codec and applying a 1 kHz tone at 0
dBm0. The system detects the tone.
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to loop back at the
external analog point of the interface and applying a
digital tone. The system detects the tone.
Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to loop back at the
external analog point of the interface and applying a
digital tone. Listen for the tone with a frequency
detector.
Compares the contents of the DS0 connection memory on
the DS0 switching matrix to a copy of the connection
memory stored in the local RAM. If a Narrowband module
is installed on the Control card, the switching matrix on
that module is also tested.
Compares the contents of the broadband connection
memory on the broadband switching matrix to a copy of the
connection memory stored in local RAM.

Note
1. The diagnostic tests are described in the order in which the tests are performed.

Digital connection
maintenance
Digital connection maintenance provides access to the data paths through the
central switching matrix of the 3600/3600+ MainStreet unit, so that data and
signaling carried between two connected target circuits can be verified and
changed by some additional maintenance circuits.

259
Management

Connection maintenance provides these functions:

• monitor maintenance, which duplicates (nonintrusively) the data passing

between two target circuits and then outputs that data on the maintenance
circuits
• split-through and split-back maintenance, which allows the maintenance
circuits to receive sourced data from the target circuits and to source their
own data to the target circuits
• terminate-and-leave maintenance, which does not use any maintenance
circuits, but forces target circuits to apply trunk conditioning to their
line outputs

Almost any connection (primary rate, voice, data, and unidirectional or

bidirectional) can be used as a target for connection maintenance. The exceptions
are:

• any on-card connections, such as connections between SRMs on a DCC

• three- and four-party connections, such as connections involving HCV
or echo canceller DSP circuits
• CPSS connections
• ADPCM connections
• GFC connections
• T1 FDL, E1 TS0, V.35 PRI TS0, or X.21 PRI TS0 connections
• SRS subset connections

Monitor maintenance
This is a nonintrusive maintenance function that provides listen-only access to a
connection. External test equipment is used to monitor the connection.

Bidirectional connections require a maintenance circuit for each direction

(see Figure 12-1). Unidirectional and broadcast connections require only one
maintenance circuit.

260
 12. Node management

Figure 12-1: Bidirectional monitor maintenance

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Target circuit 1 Target circuit 2

Network

Maintenance circuit 1 Maintenance circuit 2

TestTest
equipmentequipment
11219

Split-through maintenance
This is an intrusive maintenance function that inserts the maintenance circuits in
the data and signaling path between the target circuits. External test equipment
is used to insert and monitor test patterns.

As with monitor maintenance, bidirectional connections require a maintenance

circuit for each direction (see Figure 12-2); unidirectional and broadcast
connections require only one.

Figure 12-2: Bidirectional split-through maintenance

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Target circuit 1 Target circuit 2

Network

Maintenance circuit 1 Maintenance circuit 2

TestTest
equipmentequipment
11221

261
Management

Split-back maintenance
This is an intrusive maintenance function that establishes a bidirectional data
and signaling path between each target circuit and its maintenance circuit.
External test equipment is used to insert and monitor test patterns.

Figure 12-3 shows a bidirectional split-back maintenance connection. Split-

back maintenance is not available for unidirectional target connections.

Figure 12-3: Bidirectional split-back maintenance

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Target circuit 1 Target circuit 2

Maintenance circuit 1 Maintenance circuit 2

11218

Terminate-and-leave maintenance
Figure 12-4 shows how bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance is applied
when there is no other connection maintenance.

This maintenance function provides a mechanism to apply trunk conditioning at

the line output of a target circuit without deprogramming the target circuit; the
target circuit can be the source or the destination of a unidirectional or broadcast
connection. Trunk conditioning may be applied at the output of only one pair of
connected circuits, or at the output of both target circuits involved in a
connection.

Figure 12-4: Bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Target circuit 1 Target circuit 2
TC
TC Network

TC = trunk conditioning
11220

262
 12. Node management

Digital and metallic

split and monitor test
Digital test connections provide access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the
access Test card, and can be configured for interface speed, error correction, and fault
signaling. Digital test connections are supported on the 64 kb/s Codirectional card,
ATM Services cards, Optical Extension cards, Single and Dual E1 and T1 cards,
X.21 and V.35 PRI cards, and the DS0-DP and OCU-DP channel units.

Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card, and are supported on the 4WTO line card, and
4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGE, LGS, and MRD channel units.

The Test card supports these metallic test connections:

• direct monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs (see Figure 12-5).
• high impedance monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs with a balanced impedance buffer
between the facility circuit and the Test card (see Figure 12-5).
• metallic split access
This splits the connection between the equipment and the facility, and brings
the tip, ring and signaling pairs to the Test card (see Figure 12-6).
• 4-wire loopback
This loops back the tip to the tip return and the ring to the ring return on both
the equipment and the facility sides of the connection (see Figure 12-7).

Figure 12-5: Metallic direct and high impedance monitor

connection

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Control card
25-pair backplaneChannel unit
connector Primary rate card

Connected Network (facility)

equipment

Test card

Test card Test card

MTAU MTAU 600
FAC A FAC B
T/R T1/R1 FAC A FAC B T/R T1/R1

Metallic direct monitor Metallic high impedance monitor

11213

263
Management

Figure 12-6: Metallic split access connection

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

25-pair backplaneChannel unit
connector Control card Primary rate card

Connected Network (facility)

equipment

Test card

Test card Test card

MTAU MTAU
T/R T1/R1 EQUIP A EQUIP B T/R
EQUIP
T1/R1
C FAC A FAC B FAC C
E/M E/M

11214

Figure 12-7: Metallic 4-wire loopback connection

3600/3600+ MainStreet node

Channel Control
unit card Prima
ry rate
Connected T/T1 T/T1 card Network
equipment (facility)
R/R1 R/R1

Test
card

Test card Test card

MTAU MTAU
T T

T T
1 1
R R

11215

264
Technical specifications
 13
System specifications

This chapter lists the standards to which the 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager conforms and provides specifications for its system
components.

Power supplies Power Supply cards regulate the input power from dc feeds to provide the
various voltages required by the shelf for use by the system, interface and
application cards. The Power Supply card input specifications are as follows:

• –38 to –75 V dc (–48 to –60 V dc, nominal)

• 6.5 A (maximum)
• 215 W (maximum)

Ringing generators Ringinggenerators provide a high-power alternating current to an LGSor an

MRD interface, which drives the ringer on the destination telephone.

The Alcatel ringing generator unit supplies 71 to 79 V rms (75 V rms, nominal)
ringing voltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable).

26
7
Technical
specifications

External timing External timing sources and receivers can be connected to the 3600 + MainStreet
inputs and unit to derive or generate system timing.
outputs

External timing source The 3600/3600+ MainStreet system supports two input ports and two output
ports and supports the following input and output types:

• NRZ
• 8 kHz
• 2.048 MHz
• AMI
• 64 kb/s composite clock
• 1.544 Mb/s DS1
Table 13-1 identifies the connectors used when connecting an external timing
input or output device to a shelf.

Table 13-1: External timing input and output connectors for 36+00MainStreet
shelves

Input frequency Output frequency

8 kHz or 64 kb/s composite 1.544 Mb/s DS1 AMI 8 kHz or 64 kb/s composite 1.544 Mb/s DS1
2.048 MHz clock AMI 2.048 MHz clock AMI AMI
NRZ NRZ
RXA 75  120  120  TXA 75  120  120 
(BNC) (DB25 female) (DB25 female) (BNC) (DB25 female) (DB25 female)
RXB 75  TXB 75 
(BNC) (BNC)

26
8
 13. System specifications

Standards The 3600/3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is compliant with

conformance sections of the national and international standards listed in Table 13-2.

Table 13-2: 3600/3600+ MainStreet standards conformance

Description Document
Network attachment IC CS-03
FCC Part 68
BS 6450 Part 4 (replaces OTR001)
CTR1-4
CTR12-15,17
Digital interfaces T1.105
T1.231
GR-0253-CORE
GR-1400-CORE
TR-1244
G.707/708/709
G.823/824/235
G.781/782/783
G.957/958
Product safety CSA C22.2 No 225
CSA C22.2 No 950
UL1459 Second Edition
UL1950 Second Edition
FDA CDRH 21 CFR 1040 (Laser)
EN 41003:1993
EN 60950:1992
EN 60825 (Laser)

IEC 950 2nd Edition and Amendments 1

and 2
EMC emission CSA C108.8 (Class A – regulated by IC)
FCC Part 15 (Class A)
EN 50081-1 (EN 55022 Class B)
EMC immunity ANSI C62.41 (ac power surge)
EN 50082-1 (ESD, RF Immunity, EFT)
Reliability TR-NWT-000332
TR-NWT-000929
Workmanship TR-NWT-000078

Updated April 2006 269

 14
Voice interface specifications
Tables 14-1 through 14-9 list the audio and signaling specifications for the
4WDX channel unit, 4WTO line card, MRD channel unit, LGE card, LGE
channel
unit, E&M card, E&M channel unit, LGS card, and LGS channel unit, respectively.

Table 14-1: 4WDX channel unit specifications

Specification Variant: 90-2769-01

60 Hz loss (A/D) Loss of 20 dB greater than the loss at 1004 Hz
A to B lead resistance 1250  5%
Amplitude tracking (A/D and D/A)
–37 to +3 dBm0 0.25 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
–50 to –37 dBm0 0.50 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
Companding law Mu-law
Crosstalk Intrachannel
Interchannel > 65 dB maximum
> 65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion < 2%
Idle channel noise (A/D and D/A) 20 dBrnc0 maximum
Impulse noise threshold level
10.0 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0
1.0 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hit in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0
Line impedance 150 
600 
1200 

271
Technical
specifications

Specification Variant: 90-2769-01

Longitudinal balance (A/D and D/A)
200 Hz > 74 dB minimum
500 Hz > 74 dB minimum
1000 Hz > 74 dB minimum
3000 Hz > 69 dB minimum
Maximum loop length 5000 
On- and off-hook detection Over full loop length (0 to 5000 ) and full battery range (42 to
56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling
Peak to average ratio > 94 dB
Receive (D/A) frequency response
200 Hz +1.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz 0.15
3.2 kHz +0.75 to –0.15
3.4 kHz +1.5 to 0
Return loss (Tx and Rx pairs) 1
kHz > 28 dB minimum
300 Hz to 3 kHz > 23 dB minimum
Sending on- and off-hook Over full loop length (0 to 5000 ) and full battery range (42 to
56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling

Signal to distortion (A/D and D/A) measured at 1004 Hz 0 to

–30 dBm0 > 35 dB
–40 dBm0 > 29 dB
–45 dBm0 > 25 dB
Single frequency distortion (A/A with digital loopback) 0
dBm0 from 0 to 12 kHz –28 dBm0 or > at any other frequency
0 dBm0 at 1004 to 1020 Hz –40 dBm0 or > between 0 and 4 kHz
TLP ranges +6 to –10.5 dBr in 0.1-dB increments
+1.5 to –15 dBr in 0.1-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response
200 Hz 2.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz 0.15
3.2 kHz +0.75 to –0.15
3.4 kHz +1.5 to 0

272
 14. Voice interface
specifications

Table 14-2: 4WTO line card specifications

Specification Variant: 90-2687-01

Companding law Mu-law
Gain tracking
+3 to –40 dBr 0.3 dB
–40 to –50 dBr 0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr 1.5 dB
Idle channel noise
A/A < 23 dBrnCO maximum
D/A < 20 dBrnCO maximum
A/D < 20 dBrnCO maximum
Impulse noise threshold level
10 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0
1 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hit in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0
Line impedance 600 
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz 74 dB minimum
500 Hz 74 dB minimum
1000 Hz 74 dB minimum
3000 Hz 69 dB minimum
Peak to average ratio
A/A > 94 dB
D/A or A/D > 97 dB
Receive (D/A) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz) 200
Hz –1.0 to +0.15 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.15 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –28 dB

273
Technical
specifications

Specification Variant: 90-2687-01

Return loss (600 )
1000 Hz > 28 dB
300 to 3000 Hz > 23 dB
Signal to distortion (A/A)
0 to –30 dBr > 33 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 27 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 22 dB
Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)
0 to –30 dBr > 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 9 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit –8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Receive –8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz) 60 Hz
200 Hz < –14 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –2.0 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz –0.15 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz –0.75 to +0.15 dB
4000 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB
> 4600 Hz < –14 dB
32 dB

274
 14. Voice interface
specifications

Table 14-3: MRD channel unit specifications

Specification Variant
90-1755-01 90-1755-02
2-wire impedance 900  + 2.16 F 600  + 2.16 F
900  + 2.16 F
Balance impedance Fixed short (900  + 2.16 F) Fixed short (900  + 2.16 F) Fixed
Fixed long (1650  // 100  + 5 nF) (1) long (1650  // 100  + 5 nF)
Adapt/freeze Adapt/freeze
Continuous adapt

Companding law Mu-law Mu-law

Crosstalk coupling –65 dB maximum –65 dB maximum
Gain tracking
+3 to –40 dBr 0.3 dB 0.3 dB
–40 to –50 dBr 0.5 dB 0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr 1.5 dB 1.5 dB
Idle channel noise
A/A 23 dBrnC0 maximum 23 dBrnC0 maximum
A/D 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum
D/A 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum
Impulse noise threshold level
10.0 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0 41 dBrnC0
1.0 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hit in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0 58 dBrnC0
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
500 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
1000 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
3000 Hz 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum
Maximum external dc loop circuit 280  1600 
resistance
Peak to average ratio
A/A > 94 dB > 94 dB
D/A or A/D > 97 dB > 97 dB

Receive (D/A) frequency response (2)

< 200 Hz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
200 Hz –2.0 to +0.25 dB –2.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.5 to +0.25 dB –0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.25 dB –0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –28 dB < –28 dB

Relative Trans-hybrid loss

ERL 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum
SRL/SRH 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum

275
Technical
specifications

Specification Variant
90-1755-01 90-1755-02
Return loss
ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
SRL/SRH 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringing frequency 20 Hz 20 Hz
Ringers per line 5 REN maximum 5 REN maximum
Ringing voltage 75 V rms 75 V rms
Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)
0 to –30 dBr > 35 dB > 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 29 dB > 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 25 dB > 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit –12 to 0 dBr –12 to +6 dBr
Receive –10 to +6 dBr –10 to +6 dBr

Transmit (A/D) frequency response (2)

60 Hz < –20 dB < –20 dB
200 Hz –3.0 to +0.25 dB –3.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.5 to +0.25 dB –0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.25 dB –0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –32 dB < –32 dB

Notes
1. // = in parallel with
2. Relative to gain at 1004 Hz.

Table 14-4: LGE card specifications

Specification Variant
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
Channel crosstalk < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0
Companding law Mu-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law A-law
Dial pulsing < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps
detection speed
(trunk input duty
cycle 40 to 60%)
External circuit 1750  1750  1750  1750  1750 
resistance
Frequency
response (analog
+0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB
subsection) into
600 

Ground differential < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc

276
 14. Voice interface
specifications

Specification Variant
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
Ground resistance
Tip < 850  < 850  < 850  < 850  < 850 
Ring (nominal) 400  400  400  400  400 
Leakage resistance
Feed removal > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k
Tip open > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k > 10 k
Line impedance 600  600  600  + 2.16 F 900  + 2.16 F 600 
600  + 2.16 F 370  + (620  // 370  + (620  //
0.31 F) (1) 0.31 F)
900  + 2.16 F
Longitudinal balance (average)
50 Hz to 200 Hz > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB
0.2 to 1.0 kHz > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB
Longitudinally 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms
induced voltage
(maximum)
Maximum 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA
operating current
Minimum operating 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
current
Maximum signal power measured across leads
A/D (from line) 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm
D/A (to line) 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm

Return loss
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB
Ring load nominal 20 k + 1 F 20 k + 1 F 20 k + 1 F 20 k + 1 F 20 k + 1 F
Ringing frequency
Minimum 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz
Maximum 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz
Ringing voltage
Minimum 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms
Maximum 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms

277
Technical
specifications

Specification Variant
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
TLP range (dB)
Transmit –4.5 to +3.0 at –4.5 to +3.0 0.0 to –7.0 0.0 to –7.0 –4.5 to +3.0
600 
–6.5 to +1.0 at
900 
–13.5 to +2.0 at –13.5 to +2.0 –13.0 to +2.0 –14.0 to +1.0 –13.5 to +2.0
600 
Receive
–15.5 to 0.0 at
900 
Trans-hybrid loss into nominal impedance, short loop selected
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
ERL > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB
Trunk-to-trunk background noise
C message 3 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0
kHz flat < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0
Psophometric < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0

Note
1. // = in parallel with

Table 14-5: LGE channel unit specifications

Specification Variant
90-1229-01 90-1229-02
Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance
Compromise impedance with loaded Compromise impedance with loaded
cable 1650  // (100  + 5 nF) (1) cable 1650  // (100  + 5 nF)
Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze

Battery signaling limits –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V

Companding law Mu-law Mu-law
Crosstalk coupling < –65 dB maximum –65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion 2% at 12 pps, 64% break 2% at 12 pps, 64% break
Frequency response
(A/D) 60 Hz (relative to 1004 Hz) > 20 dB rejection > 20 dB rejection

A/D or D/A 300 to 3000 Hz –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB

Gain tracking (maximum deviation)
+3 to –37 dBr 0.5 dB 0.5 dB
–37 to –50 dBr 1.0 dB 1.0 dB
–50 to –55 dBr 3.0 dB 3.0 dB
Idle channel noise
Half-channel 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum
Full-channel 23 dBrnC0 maximum 23 dBrnC0 maximum

278
 14. Voice interface
specifications

Specification Variant
90-1229-01 90-1229-02
Impulse noise threshold level
10 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0 41 dBrnC0
1 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hits in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0 58 dBrnC0
Line impedance 600  + 2.16 F 600  + 2.16 F
900  + 2.16 F 900  + 2.16 F
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
500 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
1000 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
3000 Hz 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum
Maximum external circuit resistance 1800  1800 
P/AR
Half-channel > 97 dB > 97 dB
Full-channel > 94 dB > 94 dB
Return loss
ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringing detect 40 to 110 V rms, –36 to –52.5 V dc, 40 to 110 V rms, –36 to –52.5 V dc,
20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz

Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)

0 to –30 dBr 35 dB 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr 29 dB 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr 25 dB 25 dB
Tip ground detect up to 850  up to 850 
TLP levels
Transmit –12.0 to 0.0 dB –12.0 to 0.0 dB
Receive –10.0 to +6.0 dB –10.0 to +6.0 dB
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum

Note
1. // = in parallel with

279
Technical
specifications

Table 14-6: E&M card specifications

Specification Variant
90-0079-03 90-0079-04 90-0079-05 90-0079-06 90-0091-05 90-0091-06
4-wire TLP range
Transmit (dB) –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –17.5 to –10.0 –17.5 to –10.0
Receive (dB) –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 +4.0 to +11.5 +4.0 to +11.5
2-wire TLP range
Transmit (dB) –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –3.5 to +4.0 –3.5 to +4.0
Receive (dB) –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –7.5 to +0.0 –7.5 to +0.0
Companding law A-law A-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law
Frequency
response (200 to < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7)
3400 Hz)to
corresponding line
impedance
Gain linearity (referenced at 0 dBm0)
–55 dBm0 < 3 dB < 3 dB < 3 dB < 3 dB < 3 dB < 3 dB
–50 dBm0 < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB < 1 dB
–37 to +3 dBm0 < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB
Idle channel noise
C-message < 20 dBmC0 < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0
3 kHz flat < 35 dBm < –65 dBm0p < –65 dBm0p < –65 dBm0p < 35 dBm < 35 dBm
Interchannel < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0
crosstalk
Level tolerance 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB
Line impedance
4-wire 600  600  600  600  600  600 
2-wire 370  +620  600  600  + 600  + 900  + 600  +
// (1) 0.31 F 2.16 F 2.16 F 2.16 F 2.16 F

Longitudinal balance (average)

200 Hz to 1 kHz > 63 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 63 dB > 63 dB
1 kHz to 4 kHz > 58 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB

Return loss
4-wire ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB
4-wire SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB

2-wire ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB

2-wire SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Signal balance (200 > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB
Hz to 4 kHz)

280
 14. Voice interface
specifications

Specification Variant
90-0079-03 90-0079-04 90-0079-05 90-0079-06 90-0091-05 90-0091-06
Signaling type V V V IV I, II, III I, II, III
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL > 25 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 34 dB > 34 dB
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB

Note
1. // = in parallel with

281
 Table 14-7: E&M channel unit specifications
2

Technical
Specifications Variant
90-1230-02 90-1230-03 90-1230-04 90-1230-05 90-1230-06 90-1230-07
(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Attenuation range (4-wire audio)
Transmit 23 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Receive 23 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps

Attenuation range (2-wire audio)

Transmit 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Receive 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance
(2-wire only)
Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive
Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise
impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded
cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100
 + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF)  + 5 nF)  + 5 nF)  + 5 nF)  + 5 nF)

Companding law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law A-law A-law A-law

Dial pulse distortion < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps
(2- and 4-wire audio) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break)

E-lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, E&M mode)
On-hook > 550 k > 550 k > 550 k > 550 k > 550 k > 550 k
Off-hook < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA
E lead resistance to
ground (2- and 4-wire 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal
audio)
Frequency response (A/D or D/A) relative to 1 kHz at 0 dBm0, 300 to 3000 Hz
4-wire audio 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
2-wire audio –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5
Line impedance
4-wire audio 600  600  600  600  600  600 
2-wire audio 600  + 2.16 F 600  + 2.16 F 600  + 1.00 F 220  + 820 F // 370  + 620 F // 180  + 910 F //
900  + 2.16 F 900  + 2.16 F 115 nF 310 nF 150 nF
 Specifications Variant
90-1230-02 90-1230-03 90-1230-04 90-1230-05 90-1230-06 90-1230-07
(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Longitudinal balance (4-wire)

Longitudinal balance (4-wire)

200 Hz to 1 kHz > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum
Longitudinal balance (2-wire)
200 Hz to 1 kHz > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum
M lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, PLR mode)
On-hook < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA < 20  at 50 mA
Off-hook –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V
M lead resistance to 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal 3600  nominal
ground (2- and 4-wire
audio)
Return loss
4-wire ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
4-wire SRL 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum
2-wire ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
2-wire SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
TLP range (4-wire)
Transmit (dB) –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0

14. Voice interface

Receive (dB) –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0
TLP range (2-wire)
Transmit (dB) –12.0 to 0.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0
Receive (dB) –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0
Trans-hybrid loss (2-wire audio only)
ERL > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum
SRL > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum

Note
1. // = in parallel with
2
 Table 14-8: LGS card specifications
2

Technical
Specification Variant
90-0029-01 90-0029-05 90-0029-07 90-0030-01 90-0030-03 90-0030-04
Channel crosstalk 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0
Companding law A-law A-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law
Conductor leakage 30 k 30 k 30 k 30 k 30 k 30 k
resistance
Frequency response 0.5 dB +0.25 to –0.5 dB 0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB
(analog subsection)
Idle channel noise C
message 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC
3 kHz flat < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBm < 20 dBm
8 kHz leakage > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB
Line impedance 370  + (620  // 600  370  + (620  // 600  + 2.16 F 900  + 2.16 F 900  + 2.16 F
0.31 F) (1) 0.31 F)
Updated April

Longitudinal balance (average)

60 to 1000 Hz 48 dB 58 dB 48 dB > 58 dB 58 dB 58 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz 48 dB > 53 dB 48 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB
Maximum dial pulse 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps
detection
Maximum ground 1350  1350  1350  1350  1350  1350 
detect resistance
Maximum loop length 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi)
Maximum loop 1350  1350  1350  1350  1350  1350 
resistance, including
termination, at –50 V
battery
Maximum operating 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA
current (0  loop and
100  termination)

Maximum ringer 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
voltage
Maximum short circuit 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA
current
 Specification Variant
90-0029-01 90-0029-05 90-0029-07 90-0030-01 90-0030-03 90-0030-04
Maximum signal power (measured across a-b leads)
A/D (from line) 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm
D/A (to line) 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm
Minimum operating 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
current 6 dB audio
Number of voice 12 12 12 12 6 12
circuits
Return loss
ERL 25 dB 28 dB 25 dB 28 dB 28 dB 28 dB
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Signal balance
0.2 to 4.0 kHz 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB
TLP range
Transmit (dB) –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –7.0 to 0.0 –3.0 to +4.0
Receive (dB) –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –7.0 to 0.0 –6.0 to +1.0
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL 25 dB 34 dB 25 dB 34 dB 34 dB 34 dB
SRL 25 dB > 20 dB 25 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB

Note
1. // = in parallel with

1
Voice interface
2
 Table 14-9: LGS channel unit specifications
2

Technical
Specification Variant
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07
(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance
Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise
impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded
cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100 cable 1650  // (100
 + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF) (1)  + 5 nF) (1)
Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance
Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze
Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption

Battery signaling –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V
limits
Companding law Mu-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law
Crosstalk coupling < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps
(64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break)
Frequency response
A/D 60 Hz (relative to 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection
1.004 kHz)
A/D or D/A 300 to
–0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB
3000 Hz
Gain tracking (maximum deviation)
+3 to –37 dBr 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB
–37 to –50 dBr < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB < 0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr < 2.0 dB < 2.0 dB < 2.0 dB < 2.0 dB < 2.0 dB < 2.0 dB
Idle channel noise
A/D 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max
D/A 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max
Line impedance 600  + 2.16 F 600  + 2.16 F 600  + 1.00 F 220  + 820  // 370  + 620  // 180  + 910  //
115 nF 310 nF 115 nF
900  +2.16 F 900  +2.16 F
 Specification Variant
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07
(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Impulse noise 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max
threshold level (10
hits in 30 min
maximum)
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
500 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
1000 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
3000 Hz 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum 53 dB minimum
Loop feed 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating
Loop length 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi)
(maximum)
Maximum external dc 2000  2000  2000  2000  2000  2000 
loop circuit resistance
On-hook transmission Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
P/AR > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB
Return loss
ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringers per line 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum
Ringing voltage 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms

14. Voice interface

20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz 20 3 Hz
2
 Specification Variant
2

Technical
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07
(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)
0 to –30 dBr 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit (dB) –12.0 to 0.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +0.0
Receive (dB) –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0 –10.0 to +6.0
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum

Note
1. // = in parallel with
15
Power dissipation
Table 15-1 lists the power dissipation of all ringing generators, distribution panels,
cards, and channel units.

Table 15-1: Power and heat dissipation of system components

Item Watts (W) BTU/h

(1)
Ringing generators
Each ringing generator 15 51
Distribution panels
DCC distribution panels PRI 0 0
RJ45 Distribution Panel 0 0

S/T BRI Distribution Panel 0 0

System cards
Control card 11 39

Control card with Narrowband module 21 72

Control card with Broadband module 14 49

Control card with Bank-B Memory module 13 43

Control card with all modules 25 86

Common Carrier card 0 1

Test card 2 8

Test module 3 11
Timing card 5 19

289
Technical
specifications

Item Watts (W) BTU/h

Aggregate cards
ATM Services card with IMA module 16 54

Single E1 card with modules 4 14

Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with VCM3 11 37

Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with interface modules 6 20

Dual E1-2 card 3 10

Dual E1-2 card with FAM 8 27

Dual E1-2 card with interface modules 6 20

Single T1 card with modules 3 12

Dual T1 card with interface modules 5 17

Dual T1 card with interface modules and VCM3 8 27

Dual T1-2 card 3 10

Dual T1-2 card with interface modules 6 20

Dual T1-2 card with FT1 and interface modules 4 14

MPA card 12 42

Octal E1 card 9 32
Octal T1 card 8 28

TTC2M card 6 19
X.21 PRI card 5 18

X.21 ESI PRI card 5 18

V.35 PRI card 6 21

Application cards
CPC 8 26

DCP card 5 17
DSP card (6 DSP) 5 17

DSP card (2 DSP) 2 7

DSP2 card (6 DSP) 5 17

DSP2 card (2 DSP) 2 7

DSP3 card (6 DSP) 5 17

DSP3 card (2 DSP) 2 7

DSP4 card 10 33

DSP4 card with Fax/HCV module 13 45

DSP5 card 11 37

DSP5H card 19 63

IMC 10 34

FRE card 22 74
FRS card 8 26

290
 15. Power dissipation

Item Watts (W) BTU/h

FRS card with SRIM 13 45
PE card 31 106
HSA cards
HSA DS3 card 11 38
OC-3 card 9 31

STM-1 card (electrical) 26 87

STM-1 card (optical) 9 31

VT-1.5 card 13 43

TU-12 card 12 39

Voice interface cards and channel units

4WTO line card 6 20
E&M card (Mu-law) 5 17

E&M card (A-law) 7 23

LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01 14 47

LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01/D 9 31

LGS card (6 cct) 90-0029-02/D 9 31

LGE card (8 cct) 90-0343-09/10 8 27

LGE card (6 cct) 6 20

4WDX channel unit 3 10

E&M channel unit 1 4

LGS channel unit (International) 2 8

LGE channel unit 1 4

MRD channel unit (90-1755-01) 1 3

MRD channel unit (90-1755-02) 2 7

Data interface cards and channel units

V.24/RS232 DCC 3 9
X.21/RS449 DCC (6 cct) 13 45

X.21/RS449 DCC (4 cct) 7 25

V.35 DCC (6 cct) 11 37

V.35 DCC (3 cct) 6 22

RS-422 DCC 7 23

DNIC line card (12 cct with DPM) 6 22

DNIC line card (12 cct without DPM) 4 12

DNIC line card (6 cct with DPM) 6 19

DNIC line card (6 cct without DPM) 3 10

DNIC line card (3 cct with DPM) 5 17

DNIC line card (3 cct without DPM) 2 8

291
Technical
specifications

Item Watts (W) BTU/h

2B1Q line card 7 23
27LC2 line card 9 30

27LC3 line card 7 23

28LC line card 9 30

64 kb/s Codirectional card 3 11

BRI S/T card 7 24

2B1Q channel unit 2 7

DS0-DP channel unit 2 7

OCU-DP channel unit 3 11

4WTO channel unit 1 2

Notes
1. Each ringing generator unit dissipates 15 W (51 BTU/h) of heat when active (that is, when generating
ringing voltage). For the heat dissipation of non-Alcatel ringing generators, consult your supplier.
2. The heat dissipation values for this item assume a maximum configuration: 12 STP FASTbus
modules and 2 STP Cascade modules. STP FASTbus and Cascade modules dissipate 3 W (10 BTU/h)
each. STP Bypass modules dissipate less than 1 W (3 BTU/h).

292
Abbreviations
Abbreviations

2B+D two bearer channels plus one data channel

2B1Q two binary, one quaternary

23B+D twenty-three bearer channels plus one data channel

30B+D thirty bearer channels plus one data channel

4WDX 4-wire duplex

4WTO 4-wire transmission only

A/A analog to analog

A/D analog to digital

ac alternating current

A-CELP Algebraic-Code Excited Linear Prediction

AAR automatic alternate routing

ACC Advanced Computer Communications

ACO alarm cutoff

ACT absolute congestion threshold

ADI automatic or alternate digit inversion

ADM add/drop multiplexer

ADPCM adaptive differential pulse code modulation

295
A closer
view

AIS alarm indication signal

ALAPB asynchronous link access protocol, balanced

ALB analog loopback

AMA automatic message accounting

AMI alternate mark inversion

ANM advanced network management

ANS automatic network synchronization

ANS v2 automatic network synchronization, version 2

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APC access protection capability

AQA activity qualified access

ASC abnormal station code

ASC circuit ATM Services card circuit

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ATM asynchronous transfer mode

ATM SC ATM Services card

AU Administrative Unit

AWG American wire guage

Bc committed burst size

BCD binary coded decimal

Be excess burst size

BECN backward explicit congestion notification

BER bit error ratio

BERT bit error ratio tester

BES bursty errored seconds

BITS building integrated timing system

296
 Abbreviations

BNC A bayonet-locking connector (Bayonet-Neill-Concelman)

BONDING Bandwidth ON Demand INteroperability Group

BRI basic rate interface

C control (a control signal for X.21)

CAS channel associated signalling

CBW central battery working

CCM companding conversion module

CCS common channel signalling

CELP code excited linear prediction

CIR committed information rate

CMI control module idle

CMIP common management information protocol

CMIS common management information services

CO central office

codec coder/decoder

CPC Call Processing card

CPE customer premise equipment

CPSS control packet switching system

CPSS v2 control packet switching system, version 2

CPU central processing unit

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CSA carrier serving area

CS-A-CELP Conjugate Structure-Algebraic-Code Excited Linear

Prediction

CS-LD-CELP Conjugate Structure-Low Delay-Code Excited Linear

Prediction

CSS controlled slip seconds

297
A closer
view

CSM customer service management

CSSNA carrier special services network applications

CSU channel service unit

CTS clear to send

CU channel unit

CUG closed user group

DCC Direct Connect card

DCD data carrier detect

DCE data communications equipment

DCP data communications processor

DCS digital cross-connect switch

DDS Dataphone Digital Service

DE discard eligible

DLC data link connection

DLCI data link connection identifier

DLCS data link connection segment

DM degraded minutes

DNIC Digital Network Interface Circuit

DP dial pulsing

DPM DNIC Processor module

DPM2 DNIC Processor module 2

DPO dial pulse originating

DPT dial pulse termination

DRAGA dual rate adaption gate array

DRM DSP Resource module

DS0 digital signal, level 0

298
 Abbreviations

DS1 digital signal, level 1

DS3 digital signal, level 3

DSL digital subscriber line

DSP digital signal processor

DSR data set ready (a V.24 control signal)

DSU data service unit

DSX digital system cross-connect

DSX-0 digital signal cross-connect, level 0

DSX-1 digital signal cross-connect, level 1

DTE data termination equipment

DTMF dual tone multiple frequency

DTR data terminal ready

DTU data termination unit

DX digital cross-connect

E&M ear and mouth, or earth/magneto

EC earth calling

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC electromagnetic conformance

EMI electromagnetic interference

eoc embedded operation channel at the DSL level

ERL echo return loss

ES errored seconds

ESD electrostatic discharge

ESF extended superframe format

ESI PRI external sync indication primary rate interface

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

299
A closer
view

FAS frame alignment signal

FAST frame relay adaptive switching and transport

fax facsimile

FC-PC fiber connector - physical connector

FDL facility data link

FECN forward explicit congestion notification

f/s frames per second

FRAD frame relay assembler/disassembler

FRC frame stream circuit

FRE Frame Relay Engine

FRS Frame Relay Switch

FT1 fractional T1

FXO foreign exchange service – office

FXS foreign exchange service – subscriber

G3 Fax Group 3 facsimile

GFR generic frame router

GND ground

GS ground start

GUI graphical user interface

HCM high capacity multiplexing

HCV high capacity voice

HCVD high-capacity voice and data

HDB3 high-density bipolar 3

HDLC high-level data link controller

HDSL high bit-rate digital subscriber line

HSA high-speed aggregate

300
 Abbreviations

I indication (an X.21 control signal)

IBERT integrated bit error ratio tester

IBR intermediate bit rate

IC integrated circuit

IFM ISDN Framing module

IHTU Integrated HDSL Terminal Unit (module)

IMC Inverse Multiplexer card

IOTU integrated optical termination unit

IP Internet protocol

IPX Internet packet exchange

IS2DN integrated special services digital network

ISDN integrated services digital network

ITU-T International Telecommunications Union –

Telecommunications

LAN local area network

LAPB link access protocol – balanced

LCDC loop calling disconnect clear

LCN logical channel number

LD-CELP low-delay – code excited linear prediction

LED light emitting diode

LGE loop start ground start – exchange

LGS loop start ground start – subscriber

LIM Line Interface module

LIS loss of incoming signal

LL local loopback

LMI local management interface

301
A closer
view

LOF loss of frame

LOP loss of pointer

LRB loop reverse battery

LS loop start

LT line termination

LULT LT-like line unit

LUNT NT-like line unit

MAC media access control

MAN metropolitan area network

MAU media access unit

MCT mild congestion threshold

MDDB multidrop data bridge

MJU multijunction unit

MNSC MultiNetwork Service Controller

MOS mean option score

MPA Multiport Aggregate (card)

MRD manual ringdown

MSR mean slip rate

MTA maintenance and test access

MTAU metallic test access unit

NCI network control interface

NFAS non-frame alignment signal

NIS network information service

NMTI node management terminal interface

NNI network-to-node interface

NSF non-standard facilities

302
 Abbreviations

NT network termination

NTI network termination interface

NTP network time protocol

NTT Nipon Telephone and Telegraph

NTU network termination unit

NUA network user address

NUI Network User Identifier

NVM non-volatile memory

OC-3 optical carrier, 3

OCU office channel unit

OCU-DP office channel unit - data port

OEC Optical Extension card

OOS out-of-service or out-of-sync

OSI open systems interconnection

OSS operations support system

PABX private automatic branch exchange

PAD packet assembler/disassembler

PBX private branch exchange

PC personal computer

PCB printed circuit board

PCM pulse code modulation

PE Packet Engine (card)

PLAR private line automatic ringdown

PLR pulse link repeater

POTS plain old telephone service

PRI primary rate interface

303
A closer
view

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PTT Postal, Telephone and Telegraph

PTX packet transfer exchange

PVC permanent virtual connection

R2D R2 digital signalling

RAI remote alarm indication

RAM random access memory

RAPID reserved alternate path with immediate diversion

RBS robbed bit signalling or reverse battery signalling

RDL remote digital loopback

RE remote extension

RFC request for comment

RI ring indicator or ring identification

RL remote loopback

ROM read-only memory

RTP reliable transfer protocol

RTS request to send

RU rack unit

RxD receive data

SAM Super-rate Adapter module

SB signal battery

SC snap connection

SCC3 System Control card 3

SCT severe congestion threshold

SDH synchronous digital hierarchy

SDLC synchronous data link control

304
 Abbreviations

SES severely errored second

SG signal ground

SMAC state monitoring array controller

SNA systems network architecture

SNMP simple network management protocol

SONET synchronous optical network

SP1 serial port 1

SP2 serial port 2

SPID service profile identifier/identification

SQL Structured Query Language

SRAM static random access memory

SRIM Subrate Interface module

SRL subrate link

SRM subrate multiplexer

SRS subrate switch

SSU system synchronization unit

STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module - Level 1

STP spanning tree protocol

SVC switched virtual circuit

TA terminal adapter

TAP transmission access platform

TDM time division multiplexing

TE terminal equipment

TE1 ISDN-compatible terminal equipment

TEP-1(E) Telecommunications Equipment Practice – 1(E)

TIA Telecommunications Industry Association

305
A closer
view

TLP transmission level point

TM test mode

TO transmission only

TR tip return

TS0 timeslot zero

TSM Timeslot 24 Signalling module

TTC Telecommunications Technology Committee

TTC2M Telecommunications Technology Committee, Two

Megabit (card)

TU tributary unit

TxD transmit data

UAS unavailable seconds

UCS universal card slot

UDP Universal Distribution Panel

UDP/IP user datagram protocol/Internet protocol

UMC unassigned multiplexer channel

UMS umbrella management system

UNI user-network interface

UPS uninterruptible power supply

VBN virtual backbone network

VCB voice conference bridge

VCM Voice Compression module

VF voice frequency

VoFR voice over frame relay

Vrms volts (root mean square)

VSN virtual switched network

306
 Abbreviations

WAN wide area network

WTR wait to restore

XAC X.25 access circuit

307
 Index
1.544 Mfiberb/s Dual T1 card, 171 2WMRD channel unit
1.544 Mb/s Dual T1-2 card, 172 configuration, 197
1.544 Mb/s T1 Card, illustration, 193
170 19-inch shelf, 106 30B+D, 168, 169, 170
2.048 Mb/s E1 card, 31 Channels, 168, 169, 170
168 23B+D, 172 3DS-0 format, 36
23-inch shelf, 106 4WDX channel unit, 12
27LC2 line card, configuration, 197
11 illustration, 193
configuration, 207 overview, 195
control leads, 214 4-wire loopback, 263
illustration, 201 4WTO channel unit, 12
overview, 204 configuration, 207
rate adaption requirements, 216 illustration, 201
27LC3 line card, 21 overview, 205
configuration, 207 4WTO line card
control leads, 214 configuration, 197
illustration, 201 illustration, 193
overview, 204 overview, 195
rate adaption requirements, 216 56 kb/s V.35 PRI card, 174
2801 MainStreet DTU, 11, 21, 117, 120, 5DS-0 format, 37
204 64 Kb/s Codirectional card
28LC line card configurable features,
enhanced version, 204 207
overview, 204 interface speeds, 215
2B+D, 11 overview, 206
2B1Q channel unit, 11
configuration, 207
control leads, 214 A
illustration, 201
interface speeds, 215 AAL1 adaptation, 28
overview, 203 AAL1/5 adaptation, 28
rate adaption requirements, 216 AAR, 16, 92, 100
2B1Q line card, 11 accounting, 251
configuration, 207 A-CELP, 70
control leads, 214 active nodes, 255
illustration, 201 activity switch control,
interface speeds, 215 22 ADPCM
overview, 203 G3 Fax, 85
rate adaption requirements, 216 ADPCM, 70, 71
aggregate interface connectors, 141
aggregate interface redundancy,
126 aggregate interfaces, 9

309
Inde
x

aggregates bit aligned framing, 53

56 kb/s V.35 PRI card,
174 Dual E1 card, 168
Dual E1-2 card, 169
Dual Optical Extension cards, 175
Dual T1 card, 171
Dual T1-2 card,
172 E1 cards, 168
MPA card, 170
Octal E1 card,
170 Octal T1
card, 173
Single Optical Extension cards,
175 Single T1 card, 170
T1 cards, 170
TTC2M card, 173
V.35 PRI Card, 174
X.21 ESI PRI card, 174
X.21 PRI card,
174 alarm panel, 109
alarms
frame relay, 97
monitoring, 258
queues, 18
A-law, 88
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager, 13,
244 ANS v2
transport layer, 136
ANSI T-1.617 Annex D,
96
applications, 6, 23
architecture, 100
ATM adaptation, 28
ATM connections, 248
ATM Services card, 9, 66, 113
configuration, 175
illustration, 166
overview, 167
automatic alternate routing, 16

B
backplane, 109
bandwidth, 6
basic rate interfaces, 11
Bellcore TA-TSY-000077,
47
Bellcore TA-TSY-000189, 47
Bellcore TA-TSY-000192, 47
Bellcore TA-TSY-000476, 47
Bellcore TR-TSY-000120, 75
BERT, 13
Bisync, 64
310
 Inde
blower unit, 112 LGE, 12, 196 x
bo LGS, 12, 196
ot MRD, 12, 197
P OCU-DP, 12, 206
R circuit switching, 7
O Common Carrier card
M overview, 146
, companding conversion, 88
97 connections
B connection methods, 248
RI ATM, 248
S/ Ethernet, 248
T Control card, 14, 97
ca configurable features, 147
rd illustration, 143
configuration, 207 overview, 144
illustration, 201 control lead propogation, 53
o Control Packet Switching System, 130
ve control redundancy, 121
rv cooling equipment,
ie 112 CPC
w, illustration, 219
20 overview, 221
5
B
RI
S/
T
C
ar
d,
20
5

C
CAS, 169, 170
CAS, 88, 168, 174
CCITT G.721, 75
CCITT G.732, 88
CCITT X.50, 50
CCITT X.51, 50
CCITT X.54, 50
CCM, 168, 170
CCS, 169, 170
CCS, 168
channel units
2B1Q, 12, 203
2WMRD,
12, 197
4WDX, 12, 195
4WTO, 12, 205
DS0-DP,
12, 222
E&M, 12, 195
311
 Inde
x

CPSS, 131, 248 database management

DCP, 132 access, 256
dedicated, 132 backup, 256
domains, 132 NVM, 255
DS3 II, 132 reconcile, 256
overview, 130 restore, 256
routing algorithm, 132 verify, 256
SCC3, 132 DCCs, 10
shared, 132 DCE, 10, 11, 170
transport layer, 132 DCP card
Craft Interface, 13 configuration, 226
CSU-2, 170, 171, 172 illustration, 220
overview, 221
DDS
D access, 40, 47
D4, 88, 170, 171, 172 Channel Unit access, 40, 43
data interface cards continuity checking, 48
27LC2 line card, Core, 40, 48
203 27LC3 line overview, 40
card, 204 28LC line SRS, 40, 49
card, 204 subrate data applications, 39
data interface connectors, diagnostics, 258
140 data interfaces digital connection maintenance, 259
27LC2 line card, 204 monitor maintenance, 260
2B1Q channel unit, split-back maintenance, 262
203 2B1Q line card, split-through maintenance, 261
203 terminate-and-leave maintenance, 262
64 kb/s Codirectional card, 206 direct connect data interfaces, 10
BRI S/T card, 205 direct monitor, 263
control leads, 214 dissimilar voice and data,
DS0-DP channel unit, 205 13 distribution panels
interface speeds, 215 DCC, 112
OCU-DP channel unit, 206 overview, 112
rate adaption requirements, 216 PRI BNC, 115
RS-232/V.24 DCC, 206 PRI RJ45, 113
RS-422, 206 S/T BRI, 116
RS-449/V.36, 206 UDP, 10, 112
RS-530-A, 206 Division 2, 50
signaling lead control, Division 3, 50
257 V.24/RS-232, 206 DMM3, 20
V.35, 206, 207 DNIC line card, 11
X.21, 206 configuration, 207
X.21/V.11, 207 control leads, 214
data spooling, 251 illustration, 201
data termination units, 11, 116 interface speeds, 215
2600 MainStreet series, 11 overview, 203
loop length, 11 rate adaption requirements, 216
2700 MainStreet series, 11 DNIC Processing module, 222
loop length, 11 downloadable memory module 3, 20
DPM, 222
DPM1, 203, 204

311
Inde
x

DPM2, 203, 204

DPM3 module, 21 E
DRM, 172 E&M card, 12
DS0-DP channel unit configuration, 197
configuration, 207 illustration, 193
illustration, 201 overview, 195
overview, 205 E&M channel unit
DSP Card configuration, 197
illustration, 219 illustration, 193
overview, 222 overview, 195
configuration, 226 E1 card, 9
DSX-1, 170 configurable features, 175
DTE, 10, 11, 170 illustration, 165
DTUs, 11, 116 overview, 167
2600 MainStreet series, 11, 118, E1 HDSL LIM, 168, 175
203 E1 LIM, 168, 169, 170
2700 MainStreet series, 11, 119, echo cancellation, 86, 87
204 27LC2 line card, 204 equipment interface area,
2801 MainStreet, 21, 120, 109 ESF, 88, 170,
204 2B1Q line card, 203 171, 172
DNIC line card, 203 Ethernet connections, 248
overview, 116 external equipment connectors, 142
rack-mount shelf, 120 external loopback detect, 125
Dual E1 card, 9 external ringing generators, 22, 111
configurable features, 175 external station clock, 133
illustration, 165
overview, 168
Dual E1-2 card, 9 F
configurable features, 175
illustration, 165 facsimile, 85
overview, 168 failure switching, 22
Dual Optical Extension card, 9 fault signaling, 129
configurable features, 175 fax, 85
illustration, 165 FAX/HCV module, 222
overview, 174 features
Dual T1 card, 9 Release 8.0, 20
configurable features, 175 forced air, 112
illustration, 165 frame relay, 91
overview, 167 frame relay cards,
Dual T1-2 card, 9 7
configurable features, 175 frame relay switching,
illustration, 165 7 FRE card, 7
overview, 172 illustration, 219
overview, 222
FRS card, 7
illustration, 219
overview, 223
FT1 module, 172

312
 Inde
x

G I
G.703, 10 IFM, 168, 175
G.704, 10 IMC
G3 Fax overview, 222
ADPCM, 85 inactive nodes, 255
HCV, 85 independent clocking, 57
G3 Fax, 70, 85 installation
G3 Fax/HCV, 70 power, 121
GFC3 internal station clock,
test connections, 263 133 inverse multiplexing,
66
IOTU, 175
H ISDN access, 32
hardware, 97 ISDN leased line protection,
HCM, 9 16 ISDN transport, 35
and HCV, 56 ITU-T
and Transparent, 56 Q.933 Annex A, 96
overview, 54
Subrate data applications,
39 HCV, 70, 71 L
G3 Fax, 85 LD-CELP, 70
high impedance monitor, 263 LGE, 12
high-speed aggregate interfaces, LGE card, 196
9 HSA cards configuration, 197
HSA DS3, 155 illustration, 193
OC-3, 155 overview, 196
STM-1, 155 specifications, 276
traffic protection, 123 LGE channel unit
TU-12 Mapper, 155 configuration, 197
VT-1.5 Mapper, 156 illustration, 193
HSA DS3 card, 20 overview, 196
configurable parameters, 161 specifications, 276
illustration, 153 LGS, 12
overview, 155 LGS card, 196
HSA interface connectors, configuration, 197
141 HSA interfaces illustration, 193
OC-3, 155 overview, 196
STM-1, 155 specifications, 276
TU-12, 155 LGS channel unit, 196
VT-1.5, 156 configuration, 197
illustration, 193
overview, 196
specifications, 276
LMI, 96
loop extension, 36, 37
loopback detect, 125
loopbacks, 257

313
Inde
x

M NMTI, 13, 253

Maintenance node management, 249
Alarm monitoring, 258 5520 SNMP Element Manager, 249
Signaling lead control, 5620 Network Manager GUI,
257 Statistics gathering, 249 ASCII (VT100) terminal,
258 254 built-in interface, 249
management, 241 configuration, 255
accounting, 251 Craft Interface, 13, 254
layers, 242 cross-connections, 255
network, 244 database management, 255
node, 249 diagnostics, 258
open interfaces, 250 digital connection maintenance, 259
service, 242 loopbacks, 257
types, 242 NMTI, 13, 253
metallic split access, maintenance and diagnostics, 257
263 MJU, 39 overview, 253
MPA card, 9 products, 249
configurable features, 175 test connections, 263
illustration, 165 using CrossKeys CrossControl,
overview, 170 250 node management sessions, 253
MRD, 12 cards and DTUs supporting integral NMTI,
MRD channel unit 254
configuration, 197 Control card, 254
illustration, 193 non-volatile memory, 255
overview, 197 NTI, 168
specifications, 271
Mu-law, 88
multidrop data bridging 53, 58 O
digital, 64 OC-3 card, 9
overview, 63 configurable features, 156
PCM, 64 illustration, 153
Subrate data applications, 39 overview, 155
Octal E1 card, 9
configurable features, 156
N illustration, 165
network management, 15, 244 overview, 170
5620 Network Manager, 15, 244 Octal T1 card, 20
5620 Network Manager Data Collector, configurable features, 156
246 5620 Network Manager Statistics illustration, 165
Collector, 246 overview, 173
5620 Network Simulator, 247 Octal T1 and Octal E1 redundancy,127
5660 Network Design System, 246 Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter, 20,
connection methods, 248 173 OCU-DP channel unit
ATM connection, 248 configuration, 207
Ethernet connection, 248 illustration, 201
CPSS, 248 overview, 206
CrossKeys Resolve Ni, 247
CrossKeysNetworkWare KeyInfo, 247
SNMP support, 248

314
 Inde
x

open interfaces Reserved Alternate Path with Immediate Diversion,

5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface, 250 16, 122
5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface, return loss, 86
250 ringing generators
5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface, 250 external, 22, 111
Optical Extension cards overview, 111
card versions, 175 RS-232 DCC
overview, 174 configuration, 207
Out of Service codes, 125, 130 illustration, 201
overview, 206
RS-232/V.24 DCC, 206
P RS-422 DCC, 10
partitioning, 15 configuration, 207
pass-through clocking, 57 control leads, 214
PE card, 7, 8 illustration, 201
configurable features, 224 interface speeds, 215
illustration, 219 overview, 206
overview, 224 rate adaption requirements, 216
plesiochronous network, 137 RS-422 DCC, 206
Pole Response, 64 RS-449, 170
power dissipation, 289 RS-449/V.36, 10
power redundancy, 122 RS-530-A, 10, 170
power section, 109
power supplies, 110
power supply cards, 109, 110 S
power supply connectors, 142 S/T BRI Distribution Panel, 116
PRI BNC Distribution Panel, 115 satellite links, 86
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels, service management, 242
113 PVCs, 7 5650 Multinetwork Service Controller, 246
5730 VPN Service Manager, 243
5740 Service Subscription Manager, 243
R CrossKeys Resolve Si, 243
RAP+ID, 16, 92, 100, 122 shelves
Subrate data applications, overview, 105
39 RBS, 88 Signaling lead control,
redundancy, 92, 100 257 Single E1 card
1.544 M/bs T1 card, 129 configurable features, 175
2.048 M/bs E1 card, 128 illustration, 165
A/B protection switching, overview, 168
122 AAR, 125 Single Optical Extension card, 9
aggregate interface, 126 configurable features, 175, 183
control, 121 illustration, 165
Octal T1 and Octal E1 card, overview, 174
127 RAP+ID, 122 Single T1 card
V.35 PRI card, 129 configurable features, 175
X.21 PRI card, 129 illustration, 165
Release 8.0 features, 20 overview, 170
remote network control, 13
re-routing, 9

315
Inde
x

site requirements super-rate, 69

altitude, 121 Super-tandem HCV, 77
anti-static strap, 121 Super-tandem VoFR, 82
Electrostatic Discharge, 121 supported connections, 168, 169
grounds, 121 SVCs, 7
location, 120 switch
power, 121 architecture, 100
temperature and humidity, 120 synchronization, 132
working space, 120 system cards
Slip Buffer module, Common Carrier card, 146
206 SNA/SDLC, 64 Control, 144
SNMP, 248 Test, 146
software control, 13 Test module, 146
software upgrading, 14 Timing, 145
SRM, 58 system integrity, 121
Subrate data applications, system serial ports,
39 SRS, 9, 58 255 system timing,
DDS, 60 132 systems
HCM, 62 overview, 105
overview, 59
Subrate data applications,
39 Transparent, 63 T
X.50 Basic and Telco Division 3,
61 standard alarm queues, 18 T Publication 54070, 75
standards, 6 T1 Card, 9
enhancements, 6 configurable features, 185
international, 6 illustration, 165
Statistics overview, 167
Gathering, 258 T1 IHTU LIM, 170, 171, 172
status indicators, 109 T1 LIM, 170, 171, 172
stHCV, 71, 77 tail circuit, 86
STM-1 card, 9 TEP-1(E) alarm queues,
configurable features, 156 18 Test card, 13, 17
illustration, 153 configurable features, 150
overview, 155 illustration, 143
Subrate data overview, 146
Data formats test connections, 263
Multidrop data bridge, 39 test connections, 17, 263
Rate adaption, 39 GFC3, 263
SRM, 39 Test card, 263
SRS, 39 Test module, 13
DDS, 39 configurable features, 150
HCM, 39 illustration, 143
Transparent, 39 overview, 146
X.50, 39 Timing card
subrate switching, 9 configurable features, 150
super-rate, 66 illustration, 143
contiguous, 69 overview, 145
equidistant, 69 Transparent
non-contiguous, 69 overview, 58
super-rate switching, 9 Subrate data applications, 39

316
 Inde
x

trunk conditioning VCM, 168, 171, 175

Abnormal Station Code,
130 custome, 130
fault signaling, 129
hold, 130
idle, 130
Mux Out of Sync, 130
Out of Service codes,
130 overview, 129
TSM, 171
TTC2M card, 9
configurable features, 175
illustration, 165
overview, 173
TU-12 mapper card, 9
32-port, 20
configurable features, 156
illustration, 153
overview, 155
U 257 voice over frame relay, 80
UCS sections
overview, 107
UDP/IP, 131
Universal Distribution Panel, 112
upgrades, 97
V
V.24/RS-232, 10
V.24/RS-232
DCC
control leads, 214
interface speeds, 215
rate adaption requirements, 216
V.24/RS-232 DCC, 206
V.32 modem relay,
70 V.35, 10
V.35 DCC
configuration, 207
control leads, 214
illustration, 201
interface speeds, 215
overview, 207
rate adaption requirements, 216
V.35 PRI Card, 9
card versions, 174
illustration, 165
V.35, 170
VBN, 15
VCM3, 8, 168, 171, 175
Virtual Backbone Network,
15 Virtual Switched Network,
15 VoFR, 80
VoFR with super-tandem,
82 Voice
G3 Fax
ADPCM, 85
HCV, 85
voice compression, 70
voice interface connectors,
139 voice interfaces, 12
4WDX channel unit,
195 4WTO line card,
195 E&M, 195
LGE, 196
LGS, 196
off-premises, 12
on-premises, 12
signaling lead control,
VSN, 15
VT 1.5 mapper card, 9
32-port, 20
configurable features, 156
illustration, 153
overview, 156
VT100 terminal, 13
X
X.21, 10
X.21 and X.21 ESI, 170
X.21 DCC
control leads, 214
interface speeds, 215
overview, 207
rate adaption requirements, 216
X.21 ESI PRI card, 9
card versions, 174
configurable features, 175
illustration, 165
overview, 174
X.21 PRI Card, 9
configurable features,
175 illustration, 165
overview, 174
X.21/V.11, 10,
174 X.25
definition, 97

317
Inde
x

X.25 frame relay interworking, X.50

101 back-to-back SRMs, 53
X.25 FRE card, 8, network access, 11
223 definition, overview, 50
97 SRS, 53
frame relay support, subrate data applications,
97 overview, 223 39 Telco, 50
X.25 switching, 7

318
© 19992006 Alcatel. All rights reserved.
3CL 00469 0093 TQZZA Ed.02